Philippe A. CHARlEZ Mining Engineer from Faculté Palytechnique de Mans Ph.D from Institut de Physique du Glabe de París Rack Mechanics Expert at Total Compagnie Fran~aise des Pélroles
ROCK ECHANICS volume 1
IHEOREIICAL FUNDAMENIALS
Foreword by
Vincent MAURV Chairman of Comité Franvais de Mécanique des Raches Rack Mechanícs Expert al Elf Aquitaíne
1991
t
EDITIONS TECHNIP
27 RUE GINOUX 75737 PARIS ceOE)( 15
Table of contents
Foreword
VII
IX
Preface Nomenclature INTRODUCTION. Some hasic concepts of solid mechanics
XXI
1
1 MECHANICS OF CONTINUOUS BASIC CONCEPTS 1
STATE OF STRAIN 1.1
1.2 1.3
lA 1.5
description of the strain of a solid transformation. VonCiept of displacement 1.1.1 Affine 1.1.2 Convective transport of a vector . ...... . . . . . .. . ..... . 1.1.3 Convective transport of a volume ............. ...... . .. . 1.1.4 Convective transport of an oriented surface ............... . leCOITapC,sltlon of the transformation. Rigidity condition .......... . Eulerian description of the strain of a body ...................... . 1.3.1 Affine Eulerian transformation ........................... . 1.3.2 Convective transport oC a vector ................. ....... . 1.3.3 Norm of a vector. Decomposition of K .................... . 1.3.4 Convective transport of a volume ......................... . of tensor [} as a fundion of velocities .......... . 1.3.5 of the acceleration in au Eulerian 1.3.6 Summary table of the Lagrangian and Eulerian formulae in the case of transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . State of strain under the hypothesis of small
9 9 9
10 11 11 12
13 13 14 14 14 15
15 16 16
XII
Table of contents
1.6
Geometrical of the strain tensor ....................... 1.6.1 Diagonal atraina ... ... .. . ..... ...... ................. 1.6.2 Non strains ...... ............................... 1.6.3 Volume variations. Firat of the tensor f .......... 1.6.4 Elongation of the vector Invariant of the second arder ...
18 19 19 20 20
1. 7 1.8
Plane state of strain State of strain in cylindrical coordinates ... ....................... 1.8.1 Curvilinear coordinates and natural reference frame ........ 1.8.2 Specific case of coordinates ....... ............. Equations of compatibility ....... . ... ..........................
21 21 21 22 24 25
1.9 Bíbliography .......................
2
. ..... .. .............
STATE OF STRESS
27
2.1 2.2 2.3
28
2.4
2.5 2.6
2.7
Internal forces and stress vector ......... . ........ . Equilibrium of the tetrahedron ........... . Concept of boundary condition ................. . Momentum balance equilibrium eql11at,lOllS Kinetic energy theorem . . ..... , ............ , .................... . Theorem of kinetic momentum. of the stress tensor ..... 2.6.1 Invariant quadratic form ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..... 2.6.2 Diagonalization of the stress tensor with """'1"\""or. to its principal dircctions . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........ . ...... . Change of cartesian reference frame .............................. .
coordinate .............. , .... . 2.8 Equilibrium equations in 2.9 Stress tensor in Lagrangian variables ......... . 2.10 Plane state of stress. Mohr's cirde .... .. .. ..... .. . ......... .
27 30
31 32 33 33
34 35
35 36 38
41 ·3
THERMODYNAMICS OF CONTINUOUS MEDIA
43
A. REVIEW OF 3.1 3,2
3.3 3.4
3.5
3.6 3.7
3.8
Internal energy of a system ... First of thermodynamics ............ . .................. . Second state fundíon: entropy of a system ....................... . Second of thermodynamic." ...... , . . .. . . . . . .. . ...... , .. Free energy , ................................. _................... . and free enthalpy of a fluid .. ,........... . .. . state functions ...................................... . variable and state equation
43
44 44 45 46 46 47 47
XIII
Ta.bie of contents
3.9
Total differentiation oí state íunction .............................. 3.9.1 Calorimetric coefficients ................................... 3.9.2 Thermoelastic coefficients oí a fluid ........................ 3.9.3 Further equalities between partíal derivatives .............. 3.10 Expression of a fluid entropy ......................................
48 48 49 50 51
B. CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS OF SOLIDS 3.11 The fundamental inequality oí Clausius-Duhem .............. .... . . 3.11.1 Mass balance.............................................. 3.11.2 Momentllm conservation ................................... 3.11.3 First principie of thermodynamics ......................... 3.11.4 Second principIe of thermodynamics ....................... 3.11.5 Fundamental inequality of Clausius-Dllhem ................ 3.12 Choice of state variables .......................................... 3.12.1 The memory of a material................................. 3.12.2 Observable state variables ................................. 3.12.3 Concealed or internal state variables ....................... 3.13 Thermodynamic potential ......................................... 3.14 Case of reversible behaviour elastici ty ............................. 3.15 Hooke's law ....................................................... 3.16 Case of irreversible behaviour ..................................... 3.17 Dissipation potential .............................................. 3.18 Yield locus and plastic behaviour .................................. 3.19 Plastic flow rule and continuity condition .......................... 3.20 Specific case of standard laws ..................................... 3.20.1 Hill's principIe of maximum plastic work ................... 3.20.2 Uniqueness of the solution (or Hill's theorem) ..............
51 52 52 52 53 53 54 54 54 54 55 56 57 57 58 59 62 65 65 66
3.21 Conclusion........................................................
68
Bibliography ............................................................
68
11 MECHANISM OF MATERIAL STRAIN 4
LINEAR ELASTICITY. GENERAL THEORY
73
4.1 4.2 4.3
73 74 74 76 76
Hooke's ]aw ....................................................... Thermodynamic considerations. Symmetry of the rigidity matrix .. Case of isotropic materials ........................................ 4.3.1 Generalízation to any Cartesian system of coordinates ...... 4.3.2 Physical interpretation of isotropy .........................
XIV
4.4
4.5
4.6 4.7 4.8
Ta.ble al cantents
The common elastic constants .................................... . 4.4.1 Young's modulus and Poisson's ra.tio .................... . 4.4.2 Hydrostatic hulk modulus ...................... . ....... . 4.4.3 Shear modulus ........................................... . Further of Hooke's equations .......................... . The Beltrami-Mitehell differential equations ................. . ... .
77
of the elastic solution of a boundary problem
81
theorem ....................................... . in cyIíndrical coordinates ................ . .... .
PLANE THEORY OF ELASTICITY
83 83
84 84 85
state of strain Basie of Stress harmonic ,."""t'lrm potential ........................ . Plane coordinates ............................... Application to the calculation of stresses in infinite pi ates .......... 5.4.1 Determination of function for an infinite plate ....... disturbance. Kirsch'g problem 5.4.2 Effect of a circular pressure on the borehole ............ 5.4.3 Effect of a
85 86
5.7
The finite elastic solid: a.pproximate solution ............... The method of of Muskhelishvili ............... 5.5.1 Analytical functions and Cauchy-Riemann conditions (CRC) 5.6.2 Application to the biharmonic equation .................... 5.6.3 Expression of stresses and . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformation of the basie formula..........
92 98 98 100 101 102
5.8 5.9
conditions in the image plane .......... by integrais .........
103 105
5.10 Applieation to the case of an infinite containing an elliptical cavity ..................... .. ..................................... 5.11 Conclusion................... ....................................
106 109
Bibliography ..... ................... . .. . . ......... .... ...........
110
BEHAVIOUR OF A MATERIAL CONTAINING CAVITIES
111
6.1 6.2
111
5.1
5.2 5.3 5.4
5.5 5.6
6
78
78 79 79
82
4.9 4.10 4.11
5
........ .
77
6.3
Determination of
Phenomenological Strain energy associated with a Definition of effective bulk modulus ........................................................ . Specific types oí cavities: pares and microcracks '" .............. .
87 87 87 89 92
111 113
TabIe oE contents
7
6.4 Evolution of the effective modulus with loading ................ . . . . 6.5 Determination of the cracking spectrum using Morlier's method .... 6.6 Closure of a crack population under a compressive stress field ...... 6.7 Additional observations concerning the closure of the microcracks .. 6.8 Conclusion. Concept of porosity ................................... Bibliography ............................. ..............................
115 116 119 121 122 122
THERMODYNAMICS OF SATURATED POROUS MEDIA
123
Basic hypothesis of thermoporomechanics ......................... The importance ofthe Lagrangian description for writing conservative laws .............................................................. Mass conservation ................................................. Conservation of linear momentum and mechanical energy balance. . First principle of thermodynamics ................................. Second principIe of thermodynamics inequality of Clausius-Duhem. Choice of state variables (intrinsic dissipation) .....................
124
7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11
Constitutive state law and thermodynamic potential ............... Case of reversible behaviour. Laws of thermoporoelasticity ....... ,. Case of irreversible behaviour ..................................... Diffusion laws of thermoporomechanics ............................ 7.11.1 First diffusion law: hydraulic diffusion law or Darcy's law .. 7.11.2 Second diffusion law: heat diffusion law or Fourier's law .... 7.11.3 Hydraulic and thermal diffusivity laws ..................... Bibliography ............................................................
130 131 131 131 132 132 132 133
INFINITESIMAL THERMOPOROELASTICITY
135
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7
8
xv
8.1
8.2
8.3 8.4 8.5
Hooke's law in thermoporoelasticity. Concept of elastíc etIective stress 8.1.1 Decomposition of the state of stress. Hooke's law of a porous medium ................................................... 8.1.2 Biot's coefficient and elastic effective stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume variations accompanying the deformation of a saturated porous medium ................................................... 8.2.1 Bulk volume variations .................................... 8.2.2 Variation in pore volume .................................. 8.2.3 Relative porosity variation ................................. Mass variations accompanying the deformationof a saturated porous medium ........................................................... Undrained behaviour. Skempton's coefficient and undrained elastic constants ......................................................... Thermal effeds ....................................... ...........
124 125 126 127 128 129
135 136 137 138 138 138 140 141 141 144
XVI
8.6
Table of contents
Entropy variation accompanying a transformation ........ ........ 8.6.1 (m O) isothermal (T:;;;;; Tú) test.... .. 8.6.2 Undrained (m O) isochoric (e:u O) test... ....... 8.6.3 Isochoric (eu O) isothermal (T = To) test............
145 146 146 146
8.7
Variation in fluid free enthalpy during a transformation '"
.. _.....
147
8.8 8.9
potential ......................................... Relation between thermal expansion coefficients ...................
148
8.10 of hydraulic diffusivity ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ......... 8.11 Particular cases .................................. ................ 8.12 oí thermal diffusivity .............. _... . . .. ............ 8.13 Resolution of a thermoporoelastie boundary BeltramÍ-Mitchell and consolidation eQllatlOrlS
151 151 152
= =
=
=
9 THE TRIAXIAL TEST AND THE MEASUREMENT OF THERMOPOROELASTIC PROPERTIES 9.1
9.2 9.3
9.4
9.5 9.6
9.7 9.8
9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13
9.14
9.15
150
153 156 156
159
of the test and of the experimental cireuíts ......... _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. ... Strains measurement ......................................... .... Friction ......... , ........... _................ _. . . . . . .. . . 9.4.1 Friction oí the piston ................................ . .. 9.4.2 Fl'iction of movíng piston ...................... ..... ..... and installation of the sample ........... ............. saturation of the sample ....................... _... _. _. .
159 161 162 163 163 164 164 165
Calculation of from the consolidation time.... ........ Undrained hydrostatic compression measurement of B and 9.8.1 The measuring circuit of pore presEure _.................... 9.8.2 The heterogeneity of the stress field ........... .... ....... Second of consolidation ................... ................. Measurement of drained elastic parameters ....................... . Measurement of undraÍned elastic . . . . .. .. ., ....... ., Measurement of Biot's coefficient and matrix bulk modulus ...... . Measurement of the coeffic.íents of thermal " .......... . fluid ................ . 9.13.1 Thermal expansion coefficient of • '" ...•. . 9.13.2 Measurement of Q:u and O'B ...••...•. Thermal conductivity ...................... . heat ................ _.......... .
167 168 170 173 173 173
174 175 176 177 177 178 180 181
Tabie oE contents
XVII
10 THERMOPOROELASTOPLASTICITY. GENERAL THEORY AND APPLICATION
183
A. GENERAL CONCEPTS
10.1 Constitutive laws in ideal thermoporoelastoplasticity .............. 10.1.1 Variationsin pressure associated with a TPEP transformation 10.1.2 Constitutive law in TPEP ..... ........................... 10.1.3 Variation in entropy associated with a TPEP transformation ............................................ 10.1.4 Variation in fluid free enthalpy ............................. 10.1.5 Thermodynamic potential in TPEP ........................ 10.2 InequalityofClausius-Duhem and concept ofplasticeffective stresses 10.3 Physical concept of hardening. Calculation of hardening modulus and of plastic multiplier ........................................... 10.4 Incrementallaw in the case of an associated plastic flow rule ....... 10.5 Generalization of elastoplasticity: concept of tensorial zone ........ 10.6 Laws wi th more than two tensorial zones: theory of mul timechanisms . . 10.7 Laws with an infinity of tensorial zones ............................
183 183 184 185 186 186 187 188 191 192 193 193
B. THE CAMBRIDGE MODEL
10.8 Space of parameters ............................................... 10.9 Phenomenological study: normally consolidated clay under hydrostatic compression ........................................... 10.9.1 Behaviour in the elastic domain .... . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9.2 Behaviour in the plastic domain ........................... 10.10 Behaviour of a clay under deviatoric stress. Critical state concept .. 10.11 Expression of the plastic work ..................................... 10.12 Determination of the yield locus ................................... 10.13 Hardening law .................................................... 10.14 Plastic flow rule and hardening modulus .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 Application of the Cambridge model to sorne specific stress paths .. 10.15.1 Isotropic consolidation ..................................... 10.15.2 Anisotropic consolidation .................................. 10.15.3 Oedometric consolidation .................................. 10.15.4 Undrained triaxial test .................................... 10.16 Diffusivity equations associated with the Cam-Clay ................ 10.17 The concep~ of overconsolidation application to triaxial tests ....... 10.17.1 Undrained overconsolidated test........................... 10.17.2 Drained overconsolidated test ..............................
194 195 196 197 198 200 200 201 202 204 204 204 205 206 207 208 208 212
XVIII
Table
o( contellts
C. THE CONCEPT OF INTERNAL FRICT/ON THE MOHR-COULOMB CR/TER/ON 10.18 The ,.."", .. ,,..,,
214
10.19 The line ............................. .... 10.20 Yield locus in the space of principal stresses ...................... .
215 216 218
10.21 Special case of triaxial test ... . ................................. . 10.22 Special case oí biaxialloading .................................... . 10.23 Tension cutoffs .... 10.24 Generalization of Mohr-Coulomb criterion: concept of intrinsic curve 10.25 Tbe non-assoeiativeness of tbe plastic fiow rule ................... . 10.26 The Rudnicki and Rice model .................................... . 'f'Y\1'\l'!I'Hrrt> and Mohr-Coulomb models 10.27 Correlation between
218
219 220 221 222 224
D. APPLlCATION OF THE LADE MODEL TO THE BEHAVIOUR OF CHALK under bydrostatic loading . .. ..... ..... under deviatoric loading ................ Lade model ........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... 10.30.1 Elastic behaviour. modulus ...... 10.30.2 behaviour under deviatoric loading .... 10.30.3 behaviour undel hydrostatic loading ... 10.31 Shao and simplified model ............................. 10.32 Taking into account resistan ce to traction ............... .... .... of effective stresses ........... .. ...... 10.33 Lade's model and Bibliography .......... :... ............................................ 10.28 10.29
OF
226 227 228 228 228 232 233 235 236 237
MECHANISMS COHESION LOSS
11 FISSURING 11.1 11.2 Basle of brittle ...... ........................... 11.3 Stress field assóciated with a. crack concept of stress intensity factor oí stress intensity factor ............. 11.4 Generalization of the oí the stress factors ................. 11.5 Physical fa.ctor .......................... 11.6 Calculation oí the stress with a rectilinear crack in a uniaxial stress field 11.6.1 with rectilinear crack in any far stress field 11.6.2
241 241 241 243 245 247 248 248 249
XIX
TabIe o[ contents
11.6.3 Infinite plate with a concentrated force on the crack 11.6.4 Infinite with rectilinear crack and continuous LVU,UU',r. 11.7 Condition for crack initlation. Griffith criterion ................... . 11. 7.1 Writing the first .. .. . ... . ....................... . of a crack .. 11.7.2 Kinetic energy associated with the 11.7.3 Griffith criterion .......................................... . 11.8 Growth of an initiated crack. "lU=JI:5L
12 INTRODUCTION TO DAMAGE THEORY A. LEMA/TRE'S
249 250 250 251 251 252 253 254 255
255 256 257 257 259
260 261 262 265 265 265 266
268 268 269 269 271
272 274
274 277
MODEL
12.1 Theoretical bases ... . .... . .. 12.2 Experimental determination of . ."'''''''0,1'.''' ndonH"IIHII!: law 12.3 Case of materiaIs ....... . ......... .
......... .
278 280 283
B. HOMOGENIZATION OF A FISSURED 12.4 Introduction ..... ........................... . ... . 12.5 Macroscopic and local stress flelds 12.6 Macroscopic and local strain fields ........ ..... .. ...............
286
287 288
xx
TabIe ol contents
12.7 Expression of
*
in the case of él. crack ....... , .....................
289
Introduction of the "damage" variable ............................. State law. Expression of the thermodynamic potential ............. Inequality of Clausius-Duhem. Associated thermodynamic Corees. . . No damage. Open cra.ck ........................................... No damage. Closed crack ............................ ,............ Damage ........ ..... .... ......... ....... ...... ............ ........ 12.13.1 Specific case in which the crack is open .................... 12.13.2 Specific case in which the crack is closed ............... , .. , Bibliography ............................................................
290 290 293 294 295 298 298 299 302
13 APPEARANCE OF SHEARING BANDS IN GEOMATERIALS
303
12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13
A. INTRODUCTION. BASIC CONTRADICTION B. THE MOHR-COULOMB CRITERION. THE CONVENTIONAL MACROSCOPIC A PPROACH C. THE MICROSTRUCTURAL APPROACH OF TJIE SHEARING BAND
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6
The rock considered as a material with a population of cracks Rupture probability of a. single crack under biaxialloading ......... Collapse of a sample concept. Concept of reference volume. . . . . . . . . Case of heterogeneous state of stress ............................... Pseudo-three-dimensional extension and shape of the failure envelope Nemat Nasser's micromechanical model ...................... ,....
306 307 309 313 313 315
D. APPEARANCE OF A SJIEARING BAND SEEN AS A BIFURCATION 13.7 Existence of the phenomenon Desrues's experimental approach ..... 13.8 Mathematical formulation of localizaban ...................... ,... 13.8.1 Kinematic condition ....................................... 13.8.2 Static condition ........................................... 13.8.3 Rheological condition ...... ,............................... 13.9 Elasticity and .bifurcation ................ ,........................ 13.10 Case of Rudniki and Rice's elastoplastic model .................... 13,11 Bifurcation and associativeness .............................. ,..... 13.12 Discontinuous bifurcation ......................................... 13.13 Conclusion and recommended research ............................ Bibliography ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317 318 320 320 320 321 321 326 326 326 327
INDEX..... ....... .......................... .................. .........
329
N omenclature MATRICIAL NOTATION
ü,v
vectors. vector Nabla.
6,lj tr(¿1)
tensor of the second order.
=¿
AH
= AH
trace of a tensor.
k
contraded product of two tensors.
¿1= i1 ® V
Aij =
matricial product of two vectors.
UiVj
transposition of a tensor. symmetric part of a. tensor.
¿1= \l ® i1
.. _ OU, A 1) u. •-
- 2: -OU,
\JU=
i
e==
gradient of a vector.
OXj
ox'•
oAs·J
2: _OX'_ j
divergence of a tensor.
J
di vergence of a vector. tensor of the fourth order. product of two tensors. scalar product of two vectors.
XXII
Nomenc1ature
MAIN SYMBOLS vector. f.,
fluid thermal expansion coefficient.
(XI
strain tensor. matrix thermal expansion coefficient.
elastic strain. plastic strain.
L
latent heat.
stress tensor.
k
isotropic ... <>'!''''''",,,
deviatoric stress tensor.
thermal conductívity, CamClay swelling coefficient.
first Lame constant. second Lame constant, vis"""'un".. .., friction coefficient.
E
Young's modulus.
[{
bulk modulus, kinetíc energy.
v
heat capacity at constant volumic deformation.
u, U, U m
W, '1/;, 'l/;m free energy. S, S, s"..
entropy.
Poisson's ratio.
h, h m enthalpy.
shear modulus.
9, gm
drained
modulus.
>.
drained bulk modulus. drained Poísson's ra.tio.
M
undraíned
e
modulus.
undrained bulk modulus.
critical state line. void ratio.
pore volume.
Biot's coefficient.
matrix volume.
Biot's modulus . coefficíent. drained coefficient.
multiplier, compressibility coefficient.
bulk volllme.
matrix bulk modulus.
B
free enthalpy.
porosity.
undrained Poisson's ratio.
."
interna! energy.
expanSlOn
undrained thermal expansion coefficient.
4>(z ),
fil:st complex potential of M llscbelish vili.
W(z), 'I/;(z} second complex potential of M llschelishvili.
d
.... "".u,,'I'>" variable.
XXIII
Nomenclature
isothermal consolidatíon coefficient. H
hardening modulus.
9
energy release rate.
r
surface energy. shape coefficient. stress
lúe
fracture
factors.
INTRODUCTION
Sorne basic concepts of solid rnechanics
Very gene rally speaking, two categories of physical parameters can be distinguished in mechanics: (a) The dynamic quantitíes which give rise to motion. These are mainly forces or force couples. (b) The kinematic qua.ntities which describe motion geometrically. These are mainly displacements, velocities a.nd accelerations. Before getting down to the founda.tions of continuum mechanics, there are certa.in general concepts that need to be recalled. These will be a. good starting-p'oillt for a proper understanding of rock mechanics.
REPRESENTATION OF THE MOVEMENT OF A POINT IN SPACE AND TIME To describe the movement of a. moving object, an observer requires a reference frame and a dock. A' reference frame is defined by a.n,origin (which we will assume to be identical with the observer) and a basis which, depending on the case, can be orthogonal and unit vedors. We shall assume it to be Galilean, i.e linked to the earth. At a given moment, the moving object will be localized in space. Its position will be represented mathematically by a vector linking the origin to the moving object that is 3
OM = ¿ i=l
Xi
éi
(1)
2
lntroduction
where Xi are the coordinates of the point, C¡ the vectors oí the basis. If this latter is orthogonal and unit vectors
(2) in which Dij is the Kronecker symbol. Given a moving object initially situated at point X defining the "initial configuration". At the instant t, the moving object has a velocity v(t) and is situated at point i(t). These parameters define the "present configuration". There are two separate methods of representing the movement that we shall describe succinctly below.
Eulerian configuration The movement is described by evaluating the present velocity of the moving object on the basis of its present position x(t) and of time
v(t) = <$E [i(t), t]
(3)
At any time, the driver of the moving object informs the observer of his position. The laUer can then evaluate the present velocíty oí the moving objed without taking account of the previous information. The observer is not obliged to follow the moving object and can ignore what has occurred between the initiaI instant and the present one. The transformation is then "increme~tal".
Lagrangian configuration The present position of the moving object is evaluated on the basis of its initial configuration and of time
(4) The observer must then follow the moving object, otherwise the information at his disposal (X and t) would be quite insufficient to describe the present position of the movíng objed. Fundíon <$ L will enable the observer to follow the moving object as it moves. The movement described by a Lagrangian transformation is therefore a "finite" transformation. The Eulerian configuratíon ís the most physical representation mode sínce all quantity is compared with the present configuration. In the Lagrangian configuration, on the other hand, since the quantity is compared with the initial configuration, it can lose its physical meaning. We shall see therefore that the stress tensors issued from the Lagrangian configuration (Piola Lagrange or Piola Kirchoff tensors) have no physical meaning since they compare a present effort with an initial surface. However the Lagrangian configuration is appreciable when calculating particulate derivatíves (derivatives with respect to time), for these are reduced to a partial derivative with respect to time. ForO an Eulerian description, on the other hand, time
3
Introduction
appearing in x(t) , the particulate derivatives a.re total derivativ~. We may note lastly that the kinematic variables X, X, V, and the acceleration f do not depend on the representation mode and are equal irrespective of the configuration chosen since, in both cases, they are compared with the same reference frame. One must then avoid any confusion between representation mode and change of reference frame.
INTRINSIC QUANTITIES AND PRINCIPLE OF OBJECTIVITY The kinematic quantities decribed below (x, V, f) are not intrinsic for they depend on the reference frame. It is known, for example, that an observer will give a different description of a moving object depending on whether or not he himself is moving. On the other hand, certain quantities, such as stresses, cannot depend on the choice of the reference frame. They are said to be objective, that i8 invariant in any change of reference frame. Now, such is not always the case if one does not proceed carefully. For instance, let us consider a solid in rotation subjeded to a tension load (Fíg. 1). In a fixed reference frame Ro the vector can be written
(5)
F ----
e Fíg. 1. PrincipIe oí objcctivily.
while in a "mobile" reference frame
Rw linked to the solid, this same vector wiU be (6)
4
Intreductíon
If the rotational velocity w is constant and Rw is such that
CB = wt), the rate of the tension load in R
Q
dF = Fow ( ' _ _) dt - sm Wtcl + cos wte2
(7)
dF =0
(8)
and
dt
in
Rw
The force rate depends then on the chosen referimce frame. Clearly in this example the physica.l reality ls the second oue (wíth respect to Rw) sínce ¡ is assumed to be constant. If one wishes however to use the fixed reference frame, it is necessary, for the rate to be objective, to eliminate the rigid movement of Rw with respect to Ro. There are several methods of eliminating the movement of the observer. The best known are the convective derivative (calculation of the variation rates with respect to the material itself) and the Jauman derivative (material derivative with respect to the corotational reference fra.me). In the framework of this study, we shall consider that the partieulate derivatives are objective and always expressed with respect to a fixed observer. This lS a perfectly realistic hypothesis fOl rock strain where movements are aIways sma.ll and sIow.
FUNDAMENTAL LAW OF DYNAMICS: THEOREM OF LINEAR MOMENTUM The linear momentum of a mass point m with velocity v is the vector quantity The linear momentum theorem is expressed as follows: "When the velocity of a mass point m varies because of the influence of forces applied to it, the resulting variation in the linear momentum is su eh that"
mv.
(9) If this reasoning is extended to a solid oí density p, of volume V and of external surface S subjeded both to surface forces oí resultant F and to body forces of resultant f~ the theorem can be written
(10)
5
Intraductión
MOMENTUM definition, the kínetic momentum with resped to a point 0, of a mass point oí masa m driven by a velocity i! ia the vector ¡; such that
l
OM Ami!
characterizes the circular motion of a masa point around an axis is linked to an axis z, on the action of any force rotate around the z axis since onÍy its tangential force ifIt can create a. movement is taken up the rigid bond). The rotating mass point will be driven i! su eh that This
(Fig. 2). Indeed, if a F, this point will
(12)
in which w is the
~UI~~"~' "'11),Ul'"
A
oí tbe considered point. With resped to the z axis, momentum ¡; such that = r 2 mw (Un
A Uf -)
= r 2 mwu- z
z
(13)
y
""---'---I----iIlllllllB... X
Fig. 2. Theorem of kinetíc mornentum.
Extending the
CaoVUJlHj<.
to a solid oí volume V, one can write (14)
introducing
(15) moment of inertia oí the solido
6
lntrodudioll
Ir one rep(aces (14) in (11) and derives wjtb respcd Lo time one obt.ains (16)
or by applying (9)
(17) since iOMjdt = r (dü.. jdt) = rwiit = V. "A solid begins lo rotate around ao axis ir the resulting: momentum oC the Corces aeting 0 0 this poio!. is not nil."
CONCLUSIONS From Eqs (10) and (17). one can then state the conditions under which a salid
will not move (dvjdt;;; dwjdt;: O). JI. is necessary and sufficient that: (a) The resultant of ihe (orces applied 1.0 ihis salid be zeto. (b) Tbe resulting moment.um oCthese forces also be zero. In this case, tbe salid i8 said Lo be in static equilibrium. This i5 the general Cramework oC rack mechanics.
BmLIOGRAPHY COUARRAZE, G" snd GROSSIORD, J .L. , Initiation d la rhlologie, Technique et docu-
mentation Lavoisier, 1983. FRANEAU, J ., Physique glnirale, Academy Press, Bruxelles, 1970. GERMAIN , P ., Mécanique, tome I, Ed. Ellipse, Ecole polytecbnique, 1986. STUOT2, P., Lois de comportement : pnnc1pes génirata, manuel de Rbéologie des géomatériaux, Presses de I'ENPC, 1987, pp. 103-127.
Part 1
Mechanics of continuous media Basic concepts
CHAPTER
1
State of strain
1.1
LAGRANGIAN DESCRIPTION OF THE STRAIN OF A SOLID
Given a solid S located with tesped to a rcference (rame of fixcd axes Ro and given X the initial coordioate of any paint of this solid. Consider a motian of this point which at time t is in a position i(t). We explained in the inlroduction that it was possible to describe the salid motian referring to its initial position and time; it is expressed using the Lagrangian transformation
x= 4)L(X ,t) where
1.1.1
X a~d t
( 1.1)
are known as Lagrange variables.
Affine Lagrangian transformation
Concept of displacement The displacement vector , of the considered point is the difference betweeo the initial configuratian and the present configuration relative to the initiaJ oonfiguration so that (1. 1) can be written
ii~.i(+;¡(X,t)
(1.2)
where ü(X,t) is the displacement vector. Tbe Lagrangian transformation is known as "affine" ir the displacement vector varies linearly with X
ü(X,t) = lf(t) ,i(
(13)
10
P.rs l. MechaniCIJ of cont;nll"WI m«li". B..ic coneept"
Deriving this expression witb respect to
Ji
one abtains 8Ui
ax.,
where H'j =
f!(t) Is the "displacemenl gradient" associaled with Replacing (1.3) in (1.2) one obtains
~he
(1.4)
affine transformation .
(1.5)
L is tbe unit tensor. Writing
where
HI(O
(1.6)
=>; = J'(t).X
(1.7)
J'(t) = l
thell deriving again witb resped to
8; J'(t) = uX
X, one obtains
ux·
,
where F. . . = --' '1 8X.
(1.8)
f(t) is thus the "transforma.tion gradient" matrix. The Lagrangian "afline" description can be generalized to tbe case of any hans-facmalion. The affine lransformation becomes then of the incremental type and one can still "read" (1.7) by saying that in the vidnity of a.ny point M, the function c$ can he approximaled by a linear fundian known as a "linear tangent lransformation" such that
di= J'(X,')dX
1.1.2
(1.9)
Convective tran.sport oí a vector
Ir we apply the pteceding formula to a vector into P, one obtains
Po at zetO
time transforming itself
(1.10) so that the vedorial variation
óP will be equal to (1. 11)
11
Gbaptcr 1. Statc 01 slrain
1.1.3
Convective transpbrt of a volume (Fig. 1.1)
[f one has three initia.l orthogonal unit vectors is such that
v, =
Po, Qo, Ro
tbe assodated volume
(p, t"~,) .R,
(1.12)
Fig. 1.1. Convective transport of a volume.
Indeed,
Po
and
Qo
beiDg perpendicular,
Po" 00:::: IPoIIQolit; Similarly, if
P, Q, ii represent
these same vectors alter transformation,
v = (PI";¡)· R
(1.13)
Taking account of (1.10), one obtains
V =
(fp, A fa,) IR.
(1.14)
which can also be written alter development
v = J Va in which J:::: del 1 !1 is the Jacobian ofthe transformation. 1.1.4
(1.15)
Convective transport of an oriented surface (Fig. 1.2)
Using tbe same reasoning, one can write
Qa " Po = Soiio
(1.16)
12
Part l. Me.:halliC$ o( continuoWl media. Buic concepts
-
-
-
00
O
'0 rig . 1.2. Conveclive t rAJlsporl ot 811 orienled surhce.
( 1.17)
(1.15) can also be written
(1.18) that is, ta.king account of (1.10) (1.19)
1.2
DECOMPOSITION OF THE TRANSFORMATION RIGIDITY CONDITION
A material becomes strained when the melric properties (distances and angles) of tbe respective body are modified, On the contrary ir the moticns affecting the salid do oot modify t he metric properties, one can speak oC "rigid moticn" . Let us translale these definitioos into mathematical formulae by expressing tlle norm of any vector P
,IP ,1= ,-P.?-= ,([Po. -) (f·P-)o = PogPo --
(1.20)
with
q= I[.!
being a symmetric tensor
(1.21)
One conclucles from (1.20) that the motian is rigid provided that
9=1 1 GeneralIy,
(when a
( 1.22)
tramposition is omitted for th e scaru product except where th e resuhs lLre affecteJ
ma~rix
is introduced lor example).
13
Clu.pter 1. S(ate of , Ir";"
Relation (1.20) can then be decomposed ioto a rigid part and a st raining part
, - ['2«'- D1. - - ['2«('+ Dl. -
IPI = Po'
Po+ Po ,
Po
(1.23)
Equation (1.23) shows that the second term i5 characteristic of a purely rigid motion and the litst of apure strain. Therefore, one defines t he straio GN!t:n LfJgrangt: tensor 5uch that
,,=! (C- 1)
In lhe 5ame way as
1.3
g
2· ~ is a symmetric tensor.
(1.24)
EULERIAN DESC RIPTION OF THE STRAIN OF A BODY
Tbe Eulerian description, contrarily to the Lagrangian description defines moLion ooly on the basis of the coordinates of lhe present configuration i and of time. The Eulerian t ransformation exprcsscs the veloeity of a point of the salid in tht! pre5ent configuration as a fun etion of z and time t whi ch are consequcntly known as "Eulerian variables". The transformation is thus expressed by the equation
v= t$E(i, t)
(1.25)
¡; being tite present velocity of the considered poiut .
1.3.1
Affine Eulerían transformation
This assumes t hat the velocity is a linear fundion of the presenl coordina tes. that
" (1.25) We m ay observe that i is no looger (as was the ioit ial coordinate X) a constant . As we shall see litis maJ.:es the derivation with respect to time much more complex o If one takes the Lagtangian t ransformaLion again , and derives ii with respecl to time, one obtains d%
.
-
-=v=F·X =KF ·.Y
(1. 27)
:::} K=t".r
( 1.28)
dt
-
- -
[being tbe derivative of fwith resped to timc.
l
Pa.rt l. Mechanics of conljnuous media. Buje coneepts
14
1.3.2
Convective transport of a vector
If one applies Eq. (1.26) to a vector
P,
it may be deduced that (1.29)
1.3.3
Norm oC a vector. Decomposition of !S
Let us decompose first [( into its syrnrnctrie an:l its skew symmetric
par~s
such
that
[S=[J+g
(1.30)
wit.h 1
D= - (K+ 'K)
-
2 -
-
íl= -
~2 (K'K) -
We can study the evolution oftbe norm of the vector to time, that is
P by derivil!g it witb respect
d (_ _) p. P
di
= p·fS·P+lS·¡; · p
(1.31)
P·IS· p+p·'IS ,P p·Wp In the Eulerian description of motion, the movement is rigid (i.e. the norm of P does not change with time) ifand only ir Q= O. So t,he symmetric part of!f. characterizes the late oí strain in the salid wbile Q, skew symmetric part, represents tbe rigid motiaD (tbe cate of ratation).
1.3.4
Convective trnnsport of a volume
As for a Lagrangian transformation, one can ca\culate the variation in volume associated witb an Euleria.n transformation. Considering P, Q and Ras three vectors, the volume associated i8 suro that (1.32)
The
deri~tive
of V with resped to time is such that ( 1.33)
Ch.. p ter l . Stllte
or strain
15
( 1.34) from which one can easily show (by taking vectors parallel
,
V= L
J(¡¡
Lo
tbe reference axes)
V
(1.35)
i=l Ol
what. is exactly t.he S
V
3
-V = '""' L Di; = tr -D
(1.36)
;=1
VIV ;8 a knowo 1.3.5
as the "rat.e of volume strain".
Expression of tensor D as a Cunction of velocities
Ir one derives ( 1.26) wit.b resped 10 E, one oMai ne
[{ = ~
.. _ I)vi K '} - o UX- j
lJii
ez
(1.37)
K is t.hus t,he "velocity gradient" tensor. The tensor pcan tben be exp res..<¡ed as a runction of the strain velocities such t bat D ij
= ~ 2
[8v; + 8Vi ] {JZj
OZi
(1.38)
whicb cao also be wfitteo in the tensorial form
(1.39)
1.3.6
Expression oC the acceleration in an Eulerian desc ription
The acceleration of a material point of a salid is the derivative of ita velocity with resped to lime (total derivative) such that _
dii
7
= dt
whe re ii:; ii[i(t) , t]
( 1.40)
Applying the cbain ruJe ol" derivation, olle obt ains ( 1.41) (1.4 2)
1.4
SUMMARY TABLE OF THE LAGRANGIAN AND EULERIAN FORMULA E IN THE CASE OF HOMOGENEOUS TRANSFORMATIONS
LAGRANGF.
EULER
z = X + If(')X z=[(') -X
ti = ~(t) . % K~f·!1
Convect.ive transport. of el vector
P=f· Po
P=/SP
Convedive transport oC volume
V = J Vo
V = "W)V
'1tansformation
J
Convective transport oC a surface
Candítion oC rigidity
= d,t([)
ñf'S:;:
Jn~
Sg
Q:;: l with
p=O
Q= '[ -E
Strain tensor
Accelcration
1.5
24=
fl'- f-[
aiJ 'i = &t
p= ~ [" eH '(" e0J _8ii(
"'(=
al +
;¡_
"V~v ·V
STATE OF STRAIN UNDER THE HYPOTHESIS OF SMALL PERTURBATIONS (SPH)
Let U8 tale the Lagrangian description again and assume "hat the variation oC norru associated wi th any vector j5 is sufficiently small 1.0 neglect the infinitely small of t he second arder.
Given Cl.P t he variation associated with the vector configurations, thaL is
P between
¡nitial and present
p = Po+ Cl.P
(1.43)
Tbc nOI m of t his vector 18 therefore (1.44)
Negled ing
6.p2
(SPlI ) and taking account
or the fad that 6.P = It · Po, where!!
18 Lhe displacement grl\dient, (see Eq. (1 . 11 ») one obt ains
-. -=2 ('Fj ) P2 =2 Po + lj . Po Pu +Po . .ti . Po Po +Po' + IJ . Po
(1.45)
that 18 by writing ( 1.46)
one obtains (1.47)
P;
In othcr words, p 2 = (rigid mot ion) if and only if f = O. The vector 6.P cal! now be written by decomposin g !Jin its symmetric part and its skew symmetric part:
-
- [1
, 1(
1-
/lP = H · P,= -(H+H)+ - H - 'H ) · po 2--2-
or writing
2º = 1j -
( 1A8)
'{!
( 1.49)
n,
Since in the case of a rigid motíon, ~ is zera, skew symmetric par' or the tensor H(d isplacemcnt gradient) eepresents tbe rigid motion whi le" represents the strain . Foe that reason, € IS called "sLrain tensor ~ in the hypothesis of small perturbat ions. lt Is represented by the symmetric part oCt he displacement gradient !.enSQr. In the case of a purely strai ni ng motion, one will have (1.50) A fi rsL conseqncnce of Lhe small perturbatious hypothesis is the identification of the G reen Lagrange tensor é- wi th the tensor f. lndeed
~ =
!(C-I)=!('F.PI) 2-2 ---
=
:; [([+ 'in ([ + if) - 1[
'"
:; [('1!+if)[ =[
1
1
(1.5 1)
18
Pllrt ,. Medul.lIk... o( continuow media. B4.Sic conupu
A further oonsequence oC thc spa i8 the identity of Lagrangian and EuJerían configu rations. Indeed ir '¡;¿(X , t) and ~ s(i, t) represellt the same qUAlltity
(1.52)
ú , displacement vector being small, we will have ( 1.53) to
This identity shows us tllat ene can (in SPll) derive ind iscrimillately witb respect i and tbaL Lbe particulat.e derivative becomes a partíal derivative witb re-
X 01
sped to time. One can &ka undcrstand why it ill preferahle to speak about "Sma.ll
perturbalions" rather than "SmaH deformations". In raet, ene has lo take into consideration thaL botb the displacerncnt ¡¡ and the displa.ccment gradien t llhavc to be smaU. Finally {rom (1.6), (1.7) sud ( 1.26) one deduces
( 1.51) and replacing (1.54) in (1.30)
. D= -1 [ H+ fH. J = i: 2 -
(1.55)
smce the pa rticulate der ivative c.oincides with a par tia.! deri vative witb respect 1.0 time. Ta sum up, one should nole a1l the following basie formulae in the SP H
(1.56)
1.6
GEOMETRlCAL SIGNIFICAN CE OF THE STRAIN TENSOR
The state of atrain at any ptu't oC the solid ls therefore rep resented by a symmetric tensor ~ auch that
( 1.57) The diagonal com ponenls are known as normal strains and the no n diagonal ones as shear alrains . Their geometric significante can be underst.ood as Collow$. If one considers Eq . (1.50) taking account oC (1.57), one obtains
19
C I,apter J. S t ate o ( s train
c:u
Cr~
1.6.1
P..~ Po.::
+ e:r;v P"v + E~. P", + CYII POlI + EVI PN
Diagonal shains
Ir the initia.l vector is pa.rallel to O:r;, Po, ~ Poe in length 6 P", , thc Eqs (1.58) are reduced to
= O and ir one assigns B.n inerease
ll.P:r; = En Po", Cn rep tesen1s then t he relat.ive variation of a vector parallel lo the axis reasolli ng .....ould be idcnti cal ror y and z .
1 .6.2
(1.58)
(1.59) % . The
Non diagonal strains
Given t he initial vect.or merged witb O. whose coordinales are PD'" =- Pa., Paz. Let. us apply to it a displacemenl ll.P" ( Fig. 1.3)
=- O allcl
Fi¡. 1.3. No n d ia,:ollal sl'·3ins.
The Eqs (1.58) are titen redueed t.o ( 1.60)
ó.P" being smal1
Oll e
can write
8=
e".
I"P,I
= [PDII
(1.6 1)
20
Part l. Mccl>llnjcs
e ll O i:,
tbcn ehllrllde ri:ltic of the
~lip
of
11
Q(
c:ont;mwus meroa, Buje conc"'pts
plane pe rp endicular to
.t
and parllllel lo
y. This slip creatcs a distortion oC thc medium and is characLeristic oC¡ts change in sha.pe. It IS called shear slrain.
1.6.3
Vo lum e variatio ns. Fi rst invariant of the t ensor
é
We have shown ill tbe case of ao Eulerian configuration [Eq. (1.36)] dV ~ t, (D)V dt SPB we will have
-
TakiD.g &Ccount oC (1.55)
fOI
( 1.62)
( 1.63) which ;5 the firsl invariant oC {. dVIV is known as "cuhic cxpansioD" . As a condusian, the normal strains charac.t.erizc the relative changcs in length and eventually in voLume while l he shear strains charac1erize the changes of form oC a continuou!I mediurn.
1 .6.4
Elongation of the vector j5. In variant o f the second arder
The elongation of a vector becomes after sLrain that
P =.
p~
P represeots
+ -¡;;P \\le
its relative variation in length. If
Po
define the elongation! (scalar quantity ) such
IPI -I P.I IPI
(1.6')
Uuder the hypothesis ofsmall perturbations, one has
11'1 ' -11'.1' - IPI -I _ P.I __ IPI' -11'.1' IPI(IPI + IP .I) '" 2d' !PI
é _
where d is tbe norm of P"(P,, == dñ) and ñ a unit vector parallel to Taking accou nL of ( 1.50) o ne obtains in Lile SPH
!PI' ~ !P.I' + 2P,. M ~ IPI' -11'.1' ~ 2 P, . ~ . p.
(1.65)
P" . ( 1.66)
By substituting (1.66) in (1.65) one ootains finally ( 1.67)
is the invariant oC the second order oC tbc tensor { and js t lterefore indepe ndent of Lile reference frame .
é
21
C¡"'plfll' 1. Slate uf str",n
1.7
PLANE STATE OF STRAIN
A solid is in a state of pla.ne strain paralJel to 11. plane Oxy if the displacement component w (Le. perpendicular to Oxy) is zero and if the components Iinked t o tbis plane (i.c. tl and v) depelld only on x and y hui not on z. Consequently, this definition induces that
=
f: yy
F: rz
8W] ="21 [8u f}z + ox CH
0' f}y
: :; O :::
Cy •
1
="2
[o, + Ow] ay = o f}z
(1.68)
oW OZ :::; o
The st.ate o f strain is thell expressed by t he tensor
( 1.69) and , the elongation (. Ln a. direction 8 (with resped to Or) by e:::;
1.8
f: rr
cos 2 8 + f:YII sin 2 8 + 2.!,..y sin O cos 8
(1.70)
STATE OF STRAIN IN CYLINDRICAL COORDINATES
In certain specific problems such as wellbore stabili ty, it is often useful to refer to other types of reference feame than t he conventional Cactesian coardinates system. One uses curvilinear coardinates defining a "'local reference (rame" associated with the specific point where the state of stra.in is calculated.
1.8.1
Curvilinear coordinates and natural reference frame
Given a system of Cartesiall a rthogonal and llnit vectors coordina.tes Xl, X2 , X3 and given él, e2, ej the vectors associated with this basis (~ ~:::; 6'J' le. 1:::; 1). Let us cnvisage a change of variable sucil that a point M previously localizcd by the coordinates Xl, X Z, X3 will after cha nge of referente Crame be
(1.71)
22
PM(
l. Mechanics
Q(
continuous
m~; •.
Basic concepts
In arder that thc sequencc UI, U2, tia should make it possible to achicve an llUambiguous ¡acatian of point Al, it is neccssary that there should be ane to one correspondence between u; and Xi . It i5 therefore necessary tho.t there exists a unique inver:>c of (l.71). Furtherrnore we sho.11 assume tho.1 the ti; are continuous derivable functions with respect to the Xi (and conversely). A point M so dcf1ned, one can effed an infinitesimal displacemenl dOM while only vruying tI¡ and monitoriog U2 and U3. Ooe describes thus a curve known as "coordinate tine" associated with tll. ln tlle same way ooe could describe starting from M two other "coordinatc lines", ene associated with U2 , the other with u;:! (Fig. 1.4). ~
Fig. 1.4. Natural ¡·eference IIlCes associa.te<.l ...ith curvilinear coo¡·di!Hlles.
Space can then be meshed by a set of three networks of coordinate lines. Tbus starting from point M, one can define three specific direct.ions tangent to the coordinate lines at this point. One builds tbu$ a local basis with which are associated the vectors 91,92,93 (Fig. lA) such that
- = L -¡;-ej 8. , j _
g¡
.
uU;
(1.72)
Tbe new base in the general case is not orthogonal and nol composed of unil vectors.
1.8.2
Specific case of cylindrical coordinates
T he cylindrical coordinales constitute the most classic case of a local refere.nce frame. They are defined by their relations to rectangular coordinates x, y, Z such
23
ChapUr J . S'Al", 01 "lr"in
tlHl.t
=
z y
,
pcosO psin8
(1.73)
,
In the Eucl idian space, a ny point M can t hen equally well be located ei ther by a. sequence of values x, v, Z or by the ~uence p, O, z called "cylindrical coordinate of pomt M ". A set of coordinale tines (Fig. 1.5) is dcscri bcd , consisting of straightlines lile O/M (fJ and:: constant, p variable), P¡H (p and O cOllstant , z variable) and drclcs of radiliS O/M (p and z constants, 9 variable). In each point of the space it is tben possible t o define a local reference frRlIle of basis 9", g" g, such t hat [~(gq. 1.72)]
+ s iu Oé, -psin Oé~ + p cos 9Fy
9, ff. g,
c060ér
(1.71)
i,
~
z
'z
-'U
O'
"
' ¡;
O
fi¡¡; . 1.5. Cy li ndrit'1I1 coord inalc syslcm.
Arno ng these three vect.ors,
5,
Iff,1 ~
is nol unit vector (its norm is equal to p) . 1
Iff.1~ p
Iff,1
~ 1
(1.75)
P a re l .
24 'fhe
:; ~I ai n
o( c(meimro u. Ined ia , BlI.! ic
¡"f~ch a n ;e~
te n:r.or a.:>1IOciated with tiJe 1I0 n P,ud idian bMis
gp, g/l, 9.
C(J II Cl:'p~
is called
"tensor oCna t ural strains" . 11. does nol correspond to t he physical o ne sinct th e lJ(ulS is not unil vedeTS. Qfie can deduce the compone nts of Lhe physical si raio te nsor ("'1 from t hose oCl ile natural slrain tern;or ':, by lhe relationship
(1.76) In t he case of an ort hogonaJ a nd u ni ~ vedors local referente frame, the n a~ ural components are equal to t he physical components. 111 Lhe case oC cylind rical coordillates, one can tbererorc defin e a sLrain tensor (associated wiLh l he local basis c;,. é" ez ) suth lhat [ <"
e"
f =
<.,
".". ]
<"
9' e,=-
€p = gp
( 1.77)
<..
i',.
p
:= ¡¡~
( l.i8)
Oue can also determine Lbe differelll ial equations connecting deformations and displacement in thc case of cylilldrical coordi nales by calcul atmg t he symmctric part of t he displa ccme nt g rad ient . Qne is led to t lle classical equatio ns (for demonslration se<: Germain Vol.I pp. 383-387).
= -
f;p~
-
1.9
1 811, Vp Cu=--+P !JO p
8"
é pp
8p
_~2 (8"Or + 8,.) 8p
_~(8', ~8,.) 2 {};, + P 88
C,z -
EQUATIONS OF COMPATIBILITY
Equal io ns (1. 56) make it possible to establish rel ationships between lhe strains known as "com patibili ty equ alions". Indeed ir o ne considers Eqs ( 1.56) th a t fo llow
!~~
1
="2
(8U8y + ó:r8, )
and if a ne derives t hem twicc such as 8'!u
8y' 02!$
{J2!~v _ ~
= 83 u 8%Oy~
1(
~ ="2
0%' - Oy{}:r"l
fFu
8:r8y2
lJ 3
v)
+ Oy8;r."l
25
Ch ...pter 1. Stat", of stra.ill
one obtains the equality
(1.80) One could show similarl)'
(1.81) 2
8 é,'I
OZ2
+ 02é~z = 2 Oéy 011 2
¿
(1.82)
oy8z
Three other compatibility equations can be obtained
(1.83)
that is,
8 = .!!.... [~ 8(:,. 8y/Jz 82: 8x 2
e:&:&
+ {)f;,,~ + /J'r y] 8y
oz
(1.84 )
One oould show similar!y
(1.85)
(1.86) The compatibility equations show that the strain field must be continuous (since derivable two timesq across the medium. Their physical significance is clear: the state ofstrain in a point (or in a smal l volume e/ernent) must be compatible with the strains of its ncighbours; the compatibility equations characlerize conlinuity oC the matter.
BIBLIOGRAPHY DRAGON , A., Plasticit é et endommll'gement, cours de ttoisieme cyde, université de Poitiers - UER Sciences. ENSMA 1988. JA EGER, J.C., and COOK, N.W.G., Fundamentafs 01 rock mechanlcs, third edition, Chapman and Hall , London , 1979.
26
Part 1. Mech/Ul;es o( cont;nu
JEA N-PERRIN, el. , ln itiation progn s.sive aH calclt( j ~ nsori d, Ed . ElIipse, Ecole Polyt.echnique , 1987. CERMAIN , p" M écan ique, Vo l. T, Ed. El lipse, Ecole Polyt echniquc, 1986.
CHAPTER
2
State of stress
2. 1
INTERNAL FORCES AND STRESS VECTOR
Let us consider asolid in equilibrium under the Retioo oC external force5 distri buted on its external surfa.te. We neglect presently body forces , forces of inertia and moment! of forces. Let us cut this solid by a surface (Fig. 2.1) and ¡el us take as p08itive ~hc external side of the section and negative Lba.t situated towards the remaining material. The solíd can only remain in equiJibrium ir one applies 10 th!! positive side of the section, Corces wbose resultant ir¡ is equal to that exerted previously on the removed part of ihe body. We define the stress vector fin aL point M oC the section, such tbat
(2.\ )
The elementary force dP" acting on the infinitesimal surface dS whose externru normal is ñ is therefore such that
With resped to a Cartesian reference frame x , y, z the stress rcprescnted by its three components u.,,, , (J'l/'" (J'zn t.ha.t i5,
p..
=
L (J"nei
in wbich ii are the vector5 of.the Cartesian basis.
vec~or
ca.n be
(2.3)
28
Part l . Mechan;u of cOtltiuuo ... rncili • . Bas,c (;oncep"
O"zn -', '.
s ñ + +
•
dS
y
(J•
. ......... . ......... :: ;.:
, rilo 2. J. Defi nilion oí lhe slreu ,,«tor .
2.2
EQUILffiRIUM OF THE ELEMENTARY TETRAHEDRON 1
The stress vector is fl ot representalive oí lhe mechanical state in a. point of tbe material. We , hall show t hat the com plete st ress state is represented by a. set o f tbrce ¡tres, vectors on three perpendicular planes. Far l his purpose let. llS consider (Fig. 2.2a) a coordtnatc syst.em x , y , z. On each coordinate plane tbere acts a stress vector that is
p. . = u"re" + ullzi', + qué~ Py = uryez + Uyye; + (T~!I¿~ p~ = uu~ + uy,ell + uui.
(2.4)
We may now write lbe statie equilibrium of a.n infinitely small tetrahedron OABC ( Fig. 2.2b) . This will be writLen in 1\ vectorial form
t. A foz
+m
A
P, +11
A
P. ::::- A Pn
(2 .5)
IThi. demonl~T.~ion neAIKL5 Ih~ praence o f body fOf'CetI ..nd fOf'C6 of illuti ... Ooe c..n "how lhal in a f,eoer¡oJ CNe the resulu aTe Wlmodilied. lile V(¡!lIlne of Ihe ~tlrahedrOJlle "dio, more rapidl y lo,..ard. ¡ ero lh..n iu exluo¡oJ surf&ee.
Ch .pter 2 . S t.ate of.!tre.l'
, (J
I i/
(J
: !
UyZ
~
t
-
..................... .
"
l 'y
........ .. P"
,.....
•
~_ ......
..
:
,
fl¡: Z.Za. Co mpollefllS o r
SU-C S>l
y
,",cc: lO l"S
on coor dl na l t pllllltll .
where t, m, 11 are the di rector cosines of ñ aJld A the area of triangle ABe. By identify ing in (2.5) tbe coefficiente of~ , e~ and e~ one obtaine the three equations
..
a,o
~
(l"OJr
t + (T",,~m + O'"r . n t + (TuI/m + (T~ .. n
a,o
~
(Tu:
l
"
(Tn:
+ (T~~m + O"un
wh ich can also be written
Pn =e · ñ
(2.6)
with
2
~
(",. an a,.
a., a"
".,
an
a"
aH
)
(2 .7)
2
-"
o
r----*c--I~
}'
, FiC Z.2b. Equihbrium of lhe element!lry tclrnhedroll.
Tbe stress sta~ in any point of the solíd is then represented by a tensor oC tbe secand arder known as "stress tensor". The quantities appearing in the tensor are called «stress compoMnts" . The dillgonal compone.nts are called "normal slresses"; they are pOIIitive ir tradions. The non diagonal componenLs (0"" with -#J) are on t,he aLher haDd called sbear slresses. The koowledge oC this tensor makes it possible Lo calculate t he stress vedar on any face! passing lhrough this point..
2.3
CONCEPT OF BOUNDARY CONDITlON
In each point of the external surCace oC the solid the equilibrium cand itioD must be respected . Thus. ir F is the surface force apptied on the houndary of the solid and ir ñ repreaents the cxternal normal to this BUrrare, in any point of this external surfa.ce one has
F = e .ñ M E S This equat.ion is known as boundary condition. Eq. (2.8) SboWB that application betwecn F and ñ.
~ is
(2.8) a linear
Chapler ,. SCate 01 s'reu
2.4
MOMENTUM BALANCE EQUILIB RIUM E Q UAT IO NS
From thc moment.um balance one can deduce a first. property oC tbe stress tensor. This fun dl\rnental principIe (see lnt.roduction) can be writLen
(2.9) Ir one assurnes tbat the external (orces are both sur(ace forces F applied o n .. he e:tlernaJ boundary and bod)' (orces (gravity for uample) , Eq. (2.9) can be written
l
(2.10)
Iv
ABsuming m ass conservation (i .e. djdt pdV = O), taking acoount o( (2.8) and app lying the divergence t lleorem to the surface integral one obtains
1.
v
di! p-dV = dt
1.
v
V' · !ZdV+
1. v
(2.11)
/dV
or loeally (in other wo rds at any point of the salid) i( one extends the above formula l o any volume V _ dü "\l.!?: +f=P
(U, )
dt
When tbe body Co rees (:U 2) is reduced to
CM
be neglect ed and when l he ¡nertia effecls are negligible
'V. !Z = 0
(2.13)
o, {}d u
& lJtr,,,,
& lJ(T u:
&
+ + +
3:, Tu 8tr
lJ(T 1/"
Tu lJtr. ,
lJus~
+ &
O
lJtr 11 %
+ &
Tu +
{}tr u
a,
O
=
(2.14)
O
These equations known as "cquilibrium equations" must be vcrified in any point
oC tbc solid.
2.5
KINETI C ENERGY THEOREM
Assuming j = O in Eq. ('2. 12) Bnd multiplying eacll mernbcr by ü, (displacement vee.t.or a' Lbe considercd poinL) we ob Lain _( ~ ) dv _ u , v · !! :;Pdt - u
(2. 15)
Observing tba' i] . (V·
2") == 'V . Cü,!!) - 2" ; (\7 ® ü)
aCter int.egration on the volu me V of Lhe solid, one obtains
(1.16) Usiag lhe dassical properly
l!:
(V' €l u)"' dV
(1. 17)
1 (2 .¡:)dV and applying the divergente theorem to the first !.erm oCLhe left hand member one i5 led to
fs (2ñ)iidS- 1(2f)dV ~ 1p(~~)¡¡dV
(2.18)
e l takin g account oC(2 .8)
(2. 19) The fi rst term of the leCt hand member rep rcsents Lbe acLion of the exlerna! forces through Lhe displacemenLS oCthe ex ternaJ sur(ace, Lhe second Lhe acUen ofthe internal forees, the tl'lird on the rigilt hand member, lhe action of the forces of ¡ncrLia. Thi!! is a. diroct oonsequence of the rnomentum balance. (2.19) can also be written in tcrms of energy tate. For this , one derives it with respect to time (the rorces are supposed to remain constant )
fs F ¡;dS- l<~ ~ )dV = 1p (~~);¡dV
(2.20)
'l'he last form reveaJs the killetic energy rate since.
J. (dV) v
P -
dt
-
. tlaV = -d
J.
1 _pv'ldV = K. div2
(2.21 )
ChapCer~.
33
S'aCt o( . Irea
Tben, one finally obt&ins
(2.22) where
P~Z I
2.6
THEOREM OF KINETIC MOMENTUM SYMMETRY OF THE STRESS TENSOR
and P;nJ are respectivel)' tbe ene.rgy late of external and internal forces.
Up to now we. have only vcrified the momentum balance. It is also necessary tbat the resulting moment around each coordinate axis, in &Il)' point af t he solid, be nil. Lel us cansider an infinitesimal cu be of m aterial and obser ve thal on1y the COInpanenla acting in ea.clJ of the planes (shear components) are able ta aeate a ratatian. Around z axis, the couple u wz tends to create an anticlockwise rotation while t he couple U zw creates a clackwise retatlan. The resulting momentum around axis z can then be written (Fig. 2.3)
(2 .23) The momentu m equilibrium can tben be wri tten
(2 .24) T he two otber equilibria (around z and V) would similarly Icad ta
(2.25) Tbe momentaequilibrium shows that 2' is a sy mmctríc tensor. Two basic cansequences can be deduced fram this proper ty.
2.6.1
Invariant quadratic form
lf!! ia the stress tensor expressed in reference frame xyz and ji (P.· , P,I , P.) any vedar expressed with resped to thiB Btlmtl re{eren ee fl'ame, the qu1l.d.ro.t.i.c fo rm
112' ( Pz,P,JtP. ) = +20'zy p. f1~
2
un:P~
2
:.¡
+O'noP, +uup.
+ 'luz. PzP~ + 'luy.P,P.
(2.26)
is invariant (in o thcr words independent o r the coordinate system ). Eq. (2.26)
(2.27)
34
;(!..
u.
---_. -- ------_. --------;f--o dy
y
.,)"---------------"'
Fil"_ 2 .J. Theorem oC the kinetic momenlum
(symmeu')' of the stress tensor).
2.6.2
Diagonalization of the stress ten sor with respect to its principal directions
2" being symmetric, t here exlst three values 0'1,0"2 . (13 diagonalizing the tensor when expressed in a specifi c set ofaxes named principal directions. Tbey are roots of t.he characteristic equation (2.28) where 11, I'J, 13 are three invariant8 such that. l¡
=
l7 u :+U.... +(Ju
12
=
-(Q'y~O'"u
13
=
U.,rO'n(1u +20"y.orzU,.. .. -
,
-O'"y~cr~r
+ l7u -
tT:u
,
+ O"rrUyy) + U~ , + (T~., + O';~ 0" ..... 17;.
Uuu.,y
0"10 (7 ~, (13 are called prin,jpal strcsses. The tensor ~ can theo be expressed
(2 29)
35
U,
~;; In a plane perpendicula r to stress tensor at e thus nil.
2.7
&
(
~
(2 .30)
principal direction, the shear components of t hc
CHANGE OF C ARTESIAN REFERENCE FRAME
Givcn a coordina te system z, y , z wi t ll respect to which Lile statc oC stress al poinl O is representcd by a ten80r !! . Let us consider anothet orl hogonal unit vectors coordinate systern % ', 11 ,r wiLh a new basis éj, é~, i':;, such tba1.
-,= " ne, ,
~ r ijej
(2.31)
where ~ (; = 1, 2,3) are lhe buis vedors of lbe first coordinale system . In (2.31) in lbe previous basis. l he P" are t be components of vector
i:
(2.32) 'fhe change oCCartcsian ,eferencc frame is lben defi ned by a malrix f (nKessa.rily orthogonal). Following l he defin ition oCa malrix
T=T,;(,,®'))
(2.33)
one can easily show that tbe relation¡¡;hip between Lhe stress tensor !'!' (wit h respect to x' , rI, z') an d ~ is such thaL
~.=
2.8
e .~ .'f
(2.34)
EQUlLffiRIUM E Q U ATIONS IN C YLINDRlC AL C OORDIN ATE
As for the strain tensor (see C hapter 1, Eq. ( 1.74)], in cylindrical coordinates, one introd uces the orthogonal (but not neusslltily un it vectors) 10caJ refelence f,ame g" g, , ~ .
The sute of stress is then represented by the physical tensor
(2.35)
36
Part l. Mechllnics o( cont; nuous medi". Ba.sic c
in which
d
is known
pp
116
radia.! stress and
q"
<1:>
tangentia.l (or ortboradial) stress.
They are respect.ively parallel to the vectors gp and ffe. Similarly (Tu is parallel te g~. The equjlibrium equation can be established by ca.lcuJating the divergence operatcr in cylindrical coardinales. Dne is led to ihe cJassical equations 1
aUpB
+
U'pp -
+
+
2
+ ¡'7i8 +
+
+ "P8e + +
1 OUI8
¡, ue
1 OCT,.
2 .9
(1"
o
P lTp6
P p
=
O
=
O
(2.36)
STRESS TENSOR IN LAGRANGlAN VARIABLES
Up to now, we have used, withoul specifying, an Eulerian description since tbe Cauchy's stress tensor q: relates a current force to a current area incremento lt can be useful te describe the stress concept in a Lagrangiall configuration. The simplest way to define a "Lagrangian stress tensor" is to staft (rom the exptessioll oC the internal energy rate whi ch musl, of course, be independent of the representatiou. Given this quantity expressed in Eulerian variables and pl the same quantity expressed in Lagrangian va:riables. In an Eulertan description this is written
P.e
P.e = in which that is
p
f(~ ' P)
dV
(2.37)
ia lhe symmetric part or the velocity gradient (see Chapter 1, Eq. (1.30)1
D=!(K+'K)
-
p,E=_ f~'
Ir Va
(2.38)
-
[~UH '!!" )ldV=- !
(239)
ís the volume in lile unstraineu state, one has [Chaptcr 1, Eq . (1.15)J
V=J Va
E p¡= -
Now,
2 -
f
¡
v.
dV=JdVa
IS=f·f-1
(,
J=detfE
I
(2.40)
IEq. (1.28), eh.pt., IJ
(2.41 )
dV,
J~:t
(2.42)
being tile velocity gradient in a Lagrangian transformatiolL one is Icd lo
U =Jrz·ff- l
(2.43)
37
Chapter 2. State of stress
that is (2.44)
U is known as the mixed "Piola Lagrange" stress tensor. Its physical meaning clearly appears in Fig.2.4. Whereas the "Cauchy" stress tensor represents the action of a current force f on a current area increment da (normal to ñ), the "Piola Lagrange" stress tensor represents the action of the same current force f on the initial area increment dao (whose normal is ñ o). This fact appears clearly in Eq. (2.44): U.t.f is (like l!), purely Eulerian whereas tE is a mixed Eulerian Lagrangian tensor so that TI has to be mixed to balance This is the reason why U is nol a symmetric tensor.
fe.
-
--.
n
-
-
T
a)lnilial un9lrained configur alion
::--__ .~ T
b )Currenl str ained configuration
Fig 2.4. Geometrical represenlalion of lhe Piola-Lagrange and Cauchy stress tensors.
The energy rate oí the internal forces can be expressed then in Lagrangian configuration that is (2.45) Equation (2.41) has the disadvantage of using the velocity gradient. Furthermore
U is a mixed non symmetric tensor. One can obtain a more homogeneous formulation by defining the "Piola-Kirchoff" stress tensor. Indeed
39
Chapter 2. State of stress
y
(Jyx (Jxx
x
Fig. 2.5. Plane slale of stress.
y
l
n
..
x
Fig. 2.6. Equilibrium of lhe lelrahedron.
tr
This latter equation makes it possible to calculate on AB the norma.l component and the shear component T.
Chapter 2. State of stress
41
Two diametrically opposed points on the circle are then representative of the state of stress on two perpendicular facets. We may note that on these perpendicular facets, the shears are opposed (but of the same sign). We may further note that for a hydrostatic plane loading (0'"1 = 0'"2), Mohr's circle is reduced to a point.
BIBLIOGRAPHY GERMAIN, P., 1986, Mécanique, Vol. I and TI. Ed. Ellipse, Ecole polytechnique, Paris. JAEGER, J.C., and COOK, N.W.G, 1979, Fundamentals ofrock mechanics, 3,d edition, Chapman & Hall, London. LEMAITRE, J., and CHABOCHE, J .L., 1988, Mécanique des matériaux solides, Dunod, Paris. MUSKHELISHVILI, N.I., 1977, Some basic problems of the mathematical theory of elasticity, reprint of the 2 nd English edition, Noordhoff international publishing.
44
3.2
Part l. Mechanics o( continuous media. Basic concepts
FIRST PRINCIPLE OF THERMODYNAMICS
Let us consider a transCormation during which one subjects the system to a variation oC internal energy AU by modiCying the kinetic energy oC its partic!es. Experience shows that only a part of this variation of interna] energy carries out mechanieal work. In order to satisfy the fundamental principie oC energy eonservation, one has to imagine another form of energy: heat. The physical interpretation is simple: if one ¡nereases the velocity of the partic!es, one also inereases the frietions between partic!es from which results an energy loss by heat dissipation. Dnder these eonditions the energy balance can be written AU
= AW+AQ
(3.1)
A W representing mechanical work and AQ the quantity oC heat furnished to the external medium. If, in addition, in the eourse of transCormation, the kinetie maeroseopic energy oC the system is modified (this energy being brought into the system is to be put in the leH-hand si de) Eq. (3.1) can be written AU
+ Al(
= AW + AQ
(3.2)
in which Al( is Lhe variation in kinetic energy of the system during transformation. One has to differentiate c!early the microscopic kinetie energy of partic!es which define internal energy from kinetic energy which results from a maeroscopic motion of the solid. The incremental form of Eq. (3.2) can be written
d dt (U
in whieh
3.3
vV•.:!
+ K) =
.. W e.: t
+Q
is the power of the external forces and
Q the
(3.3) heat fiow.
SECOND STATE FUNCTION: ENTROPY OF A SYSTEM
The first principie of thermodynamics alone is noL sufficient to explain the transformation of a system. Indeed, experience shows Lhat in the absence of any exchange of heat or work with the exterior an isolaLed system is able to evolve. The most classical experiment is that of a container of volume 2V shared between two compartments A and B of Lhe same volume V, separated by a screen pierced with a pinhole. If initially, A contains a gas and B is empty, the system evolves and the gas spreads spontaneously throughout the pinhole until the pressure becomes uniform or, which is equivalent, until the number of particles is equal in A and B. This so-called equilibrium state is irreversible, since the system never reverts spontaneously to its initial state (by spontaneously is meant without additional energy supply).
Chapter 3. Thermodynamics of contínuous media
45
The problem is therefore equivalent to that of the distribution of N particles between two compartments A and B. Now, the number of possible combinations for placing n particles in one compartment and N-n in the other is such that
N! W 71 = ---:-;-:-:-----:-: n!(N - n)! Jt can be se en that \lVn , known as "complexion number", is maximum for n = N /2. In other words the system always evolves towards a state in which the complexion number is maximum. The equilibrium state of a system is therefore a state of maximum probability. The entropy of a system containing N particles in any state (i.e. not necessarily in equilibrium) is by definition
s = k en W"
(3.4)
in which W n is the complexion number of the system and k a constant known as Bo!tzman's constant. In the equilibrium state, the complexion number will assume its maximum value Wo so that the equilibrium entropy will be equal to
s = k en Wo
(3.5)
This shows us that the evolution of a system towards an equilibrium state is always accompanied by an increase in entropy. On the contrary, the entropy of a closed system in equilibrium is stationary.
3.4
SECOND PRINCIPLE OF THERMODYNAMICS
These considerations enable us to state the second principie of thermodynamics by postulating the existen ce of a second state fundion S known as entropy such that
dS> dQ - T
(3.6)
in which T is caBed the absolute temperature of the system. The second principie thus enables one to define two fundamental processes: (a) Irreversible transformations: these satisfy Eq. (3.6) with the supersc.ript sign meaning that they cannot be reversed. This will be the case for plastiClty. (b) Reversible transformations: these represent the ideal Jimit case for which Eq. (3.6) is an equality. They can be reversed which means that the system can revert to its initial state by returning all the energy it has received during transformation. This will be the case with isothermal elasticity.
46
Part J. Mechanics ol continuous media. Basic concepts
3.5
FREE ENERGY
It is possible from U and S to define other state functions. If we imagine an isothermal reversible transformation (T = Const) without variation of macroscopic kinetic energy, the two principIes can be written respectively
dU
dWext
dQ
TdS
or by substítutíon of dQ diJI
= dWext iJI = U -
+ dQ
(3.7)
wíth
(3.8)
(3.9)
TS
known as free energy of the system. This ís a state functíon in the same way as U and S.
3.6
ENTHALPY AND FREE ENTHALPY OF A FLUID
Three fundamental concepts define mechanically a perfect fluid: (a) Zero tension resistan ce. (b) Zero shear resistance. (c) Normal stress equal in al! directions. These properties show us that a fluid possesses a stress tensor such that ~
=
-p (
O O)
O
-p
O
O
O
-p
in which p is the fluid pressure (the minus sign shows that this relates to compression). Consequently the force exerted on an external element of surface dS of the system will be equal to
d] = -pñdS
(3.10) -->
If one displaces this force by an element of length di (parallel to ñ) one reduces the volume of fluid, ana the work carried out (at constant pressure) -->
dWext = -pñdS di = -pdV
(3.11)
If one again assumes the macroscopic kinetic energy to be zero the first principIe can be written for this isobaric transformation dH =dQ
(3.12)
47
Chapter 3. Thermodynamics of continuous media
with H
= U+pV
(3.13)
H is known as the enthalpy of the system. It is also a state function. In the same way one can define the free enthalpy of a system by defining the state function G= H-TS
3.7
(3.14)
SPECIFIC STATE FUNCTIONS
All the state functions can be reduced to the mass of the system. One spea.ks then of specific quantities written u, s, h, "p, g. If p is the density of the constituent of the system (assumed to be unique), one will then have for example
u = ¡PUdV We should note that the specific enthalpy of a fluid can be written
(3.16)
3.8
STATE VARIABLE AND STATE EQUATION
Experience shows very clearly that three variables influence the behaviour of a fluid (except chemical phenomena): volume, pressure and temperature. It would seem judicious then to choose these variables when describing the state of a fluid. In fact, these variables are not independent: it is known for exa.mple that if one heats a fluid while maintaining its volume constant, its pressure increases uncontrollably. One therefore has to admit that these three va.riables are linked by an equation: the state equation, which is generally written f(p, V, T)
=O
(3.17)
The function f must be determined experimentally: it defines the behaviour of the system. One therefore speaks of a "constitutive law": it must obey the thermodynamics principIes, but only experimentation makes its determination possible. The subjective choice of state variables determines then decisively the expected results of a constitutive law.
3.9
TOTAL DIFFERENTIATION OF STATE FU NC TIO N
St.ate runchons are generally Ilot ac.cessiblc t o experimentation . Ho weve r con51der ing their total diffcrentials one can deduce ccrtain irn portant propert.ies from Lhc m and define uperimentally measurahl(" coefficients.
3.9.1
Calori met ric coefficients
Ir o lle caU5eS the tem p<:rature o f a system t o rise fro m T to T + dT al con~ ta.Jlt ptessu re, l he ¡ncrease in temperature is accompanicd by an i"<.rease in vollJm e. M o r~ Qver, ir thc ma.."-S of the syslem lS m , it is observed t hat l ne quan~ ity of heal recei ved by the 5ystem is more al lcss, in a [ange oC re&sonable t.emperalures, prop orlloua l to lhe increflSe in tempe.rature, thal i5 (3. l8)
dQ:::: mCdT
in which e W l IJe specific !leal o f the fluid . lf one assumes that tlle pressure work is the only t;O urce o f rnechanicaJ ~cJ¡a n ge with thc exterior , th e first prillciple can be wrj tten
dU == mCdT - 1xi\'
(3. 19)
e
Equation (3. 19) sh ows us that j5 only determined jf one k.now8 t he type oC transformation; consequently, it is theoretically possible to d efi ne an infinity of specifi c heats associated with each transform at ion . UsuaJl y one defin es t wo d ifferent specill c beats corresponding respcctively to l:Hocesses a L constant pressure alld con stant volllme. Let us calculale firs t the perfect clitTerential of U considcring T and V as stíl.~e variables,
dU ==
BU) (BV
T
dV
+ (8U) aT v dT ==
.
(3.20)
mCál - pdV
Ir one assumes 3n isochoric transforrnation (dV ;:; O), o ne obl ains
Cv ~ ~ (8U) oT v
(3.2l)
m
On Lhe othe r hand, let us now differen tiate H, co nsiclering p and T variables, dH::::
8H) T dp+ (8H) 8T (7iP
p
.
dT= Vdp+mCdT
lL9
sta.tc
(3.22)
assuming an isobari e transformation (dp == O), ont" obtains
eP == ~ m
(81/) 8T ,
(3 .23)
For obvious rea.qons, Cv is known as specific heal at eonst ant vol ume and Cp speciftc heal. al. constaul pr cssu rc . ThcorcticaIly thcy dcpcnd only Oll thc fl Lü d considered. It is also possible to connect specific heat al. constant pressu re and entropy. Inde«l., in lhc case of a reversible transformation
dQ
~
TdS
(3.14)
or taking aceounl of(3. 18)
meclr:::. TriS ~·1 orcvcr
(325)
com¡jrlering T and p as fltate variables, lhe lotal diffcrcntial of S can be
writtcn
dS=
(~;)p dT+ (~~')T dp
Irolle assurnes an isoLari r transfor m atioll (dp = O), (3.2&) and (3.26), one obta;ns ~ m
3 .9 .2
e=
(3.'6) C p and , by identi fyi:Lg
(DS) _C, ar
p
T
(32 7)
T h erm oe last ic coe ffic ients oC a fluid
Depending on whether one chooses the pair of state variables p - T , p - V or V - T , ane can define three different transformations and one associat.es with each of lhem a differellt lherm oelastic coefficLent:
(a) Isothc l'nla l com p ressio n (p and Vare state variables) In tiL is case Oll': defi nes the bu lk modulus of thc fluid /{J such that
(3.28) lhe minus sign indicating t.hat an increase in pressure creat.es a reduct.iolL ilL volume . (b) b obaric h eating (T and Vare st.ate variables) In t.his case one defines the volume expansion coefficient cr J of lhe fluid sll-ch that d\l = VajdT
(3.'9)
(c) I soch o ri c h ea t in g (T and pare state variables) One defines tiLe coeffi(".ient X SUCIl that
dp ~ PXdT
(330)
50
P.rt l. Mecha.n iu 01 con,inuc>us mema. B ... je conc" p t,.
We may note that each of t he Eqs (3.28) (3.29) and (3.30) can be expressed in tbe form of partial derivative!!I since they correspoll d fOI each special case to a well-defined Lransformat ion _1 = KI
3.9.3
_~ V
(av) 8p
T
01
=
~ V
(W) liT
x= ~(ap) p
p
liT v
(3.3 1)
Further equaliti es between partial derivatives
At this stage it is useful t o deri ....e a few remarkable equalities by exploiting the Cauchy Riemann condition fol' a funetian F(z, y), that is
dF ~ Pd<+Qdy= ap ~ aQ .
By
(3.32)
()x
Ca) p and Tare chosen as staLe variables dS =
(as) OT
p
d'F +
(as) op
dp
(3.33)
T
From t he Cauchy RiemaDIl condit ioD ane obtains (3.34)
Similar ly dH = Vdp+ TdS =
[v+
T
(~!)T] dp+ T
( : ) p dT
(3.35)
dH being a Lota! differenlia! the Cauchy-Riemann condition induces
(3.36)
wbich ¡eads afier dcrivations aud identificatioll wiLh (3.34) lo (3.37)
(b) V and l' are c.bosen as s t ate variables. The same reasonin€ lIsing internal energy U instead of ent nalpy H would lead lo th~ equality (3 .38)
51
Chapter 3. Thermodynamia of continuóus media
3.10
EXPRESSION OF A FLUID ENTROPY
The definition of the various Ihermoelastic and calorime~ric coefficients (accessibJe to measuremellt) makcs it possible to express state funct.ions such as entropy , interna! energy or free energy. If we choose p and T as statc variables the pcrfect differential of S c.an be wrltten as
dS = (85) dT (8S) dP 8T ,
+{)
(3 .39)
P T
takin,ll; account of(3.27) (3.31) and (3.37) one is \ed t.o the expression dS= ()f
Cm
~ dT-a¡Vdp
(3.10)
hy d ivirling the t.wo memhers hy m
e
al
T
p
ds= -----.EdT- in wLich,
oS
dp
(3.41 )
is lile specific eIltropy and p lile fluid dem¡ity
B. CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS OF SOLIDS 'rhe behaviour of solids should be consistent with thermodynamic res t.rictions and the balance equations, but, as we shall see, thermodynamics can only provide "cl ues" regarding constitutive equations. Jt is up to thc experirncntcr to choose judiciously, l.he state variables for ol.fH
3.11
THE FUNDAMENTAL INEQUALITY OF CLAUSIUS-DUHEM
The two principIes of thermodynamics can be combined in an inequality: the inequality of Clausius-Duhe.:n. First we shall write the di fferent conser vation laws.
52
Pan l. MedJ ... n;a 01 co:mt;nuow media. Basic -COl>CepLt"
3.11.1
Mass balance
Ir pis the solid density and V its volu me, it can be written
(3.42)
3.11.2
Momentum conservation
This hllS been expounded in various forms in the InLtoduction and in Chapter 2. 1t expresses the conscrvation of mechanical power in the form (Eqs (2.20) and (2.22) - in the absence of body forces)
h
F · iJdS -
[ (rz :{}dll = i<.
(3,4')
We ndopt Lhe hy pothesis of small slrains (~ is the strain velocity tensor).
3.11.3
First principie of thermodynamics
"fhis is writlen in a local form
(3,41) in which Pt r l is the po wer of t lle externa! forces and Q the heat ratc . Thc hcat rate con 1ains 111'0 terms: an intt'Jllal source contained in V and the eonduction heal fl ow (only this mode of transfer is envisaged al present) through the sali d surfacc S, t hat
" Q=
Iv
rdV -
fs if·
(3.45)
ñdS
in which r represenls thf': Internal heat productioIl per uni t of time and vo!ume and q lile heat flux per unit of üme, ñ being lhe external no rmal to the surface . we introduce the specific interna! energy ti (see Eq. (3.15)], by eli minating i< belween Eqs (3.43) and (3.44) and taking account of the rac~ t hat
Ir
Pw =
1¡
(3.4S)
iídS
in tbe abk nce of body forces, one obtains
!!.. { pudV = r (~ :f
)dV
+
j
rdV _
r q - ñdS
(,.47 )
dtJv Jv v J... By applying the divergence t heorem lo lhe las! t(!fm oC the right-haod member , tlle local statement relali\'c to (3.41) is
53
ptl~U
.t +r-'V · q
(3.48)
in wh.,ich ú is the deriva\.ive of u with tcspect 1.0 t ime.
3.11.4
Second princ ipie of thermodynamics
Its genera! expresslou (:.U:i) can be clarifled by tak lng account of(:i .45) 10 the form
J.' 1.
qd ñS - dVdt-vT sT
-dS >
(3.49)
or by ¡ntroJudog s pedlk. entrop)' a nd hy applyi ng Lhe di\'ergence theorem to t bc surfacc ¡nt.cgrat of (3.49)
ds ri r Pdi+ 'V ' T - T~O
3. 11.5
(3.50)
F\mdamental inequality of Clausius-Duhem
Lel us extracL r from Eq. (3 .18) and replace il in (3.50). One obtai ns
d, dI
p-
[pu- u ·{ +'V . q1 >O + \l Tf_-.!. T - 'J -
(3.51 )
Observing thaL
V.
(f) = T'V · q-if 'V· T T' T
o ne can write (3.5 1) in the fOlln
P [T
dS dl
_
dh] + 2: : t dt
-,- .-'VT >O l' -
(3 .52)
Let us introduce t he s pecili c free energ.)'
.p =
u - Ts
d lb ::: du _ T ds _ s dT dt di di dt one fina lly obtaillS .
.)
VT
(2: ; f )-P ( t/J+sT -iíy?' O (3 .53) is known as tll e ineq uali t,y of Clauslus. Duhem .
(3.53)
Part J. Mechanics of continu ous media. B.ui c concepu
54
3.12
CHOICE OF STATE VARIABLES
The inequality oC CJausius-Dubem defines the f,hcrmodynamic admissibil ity of thc system. Al every moment in its evolu tion this has to be satisfied . The lhermodynamic potentiaJ depends, a.~ we saw in the previous paragraph , on a certain number of variables known a8 :>tate variables . Th~ variables can be "measurable" but also internaJ Ol "hidden" onc&. The choice is based on phenomcllologlcal obSo!rvations. It results then partíally rrom the subjectivity of thc experimenter.
3.12.1
The m emory of a material
Any material call have a precise memory of the past, in particular of the irrevcrsibilities it may h'\\'e experienc.ed. This is apparcnt in t lle dassic dio.gram reptesented in Fig. 3.1. A material wiU bchave differcntly depending on whether it has bel!:n loaded up to point A (no memory) or up to point 8 . In t his (:asc, during e. future loading the irreversibilities will appear in B and not in A as previously. In thermody namic formalism one will therefore have te define a certAin oumber of "memo ry" variables also known as inte rnal hardening varial;.les. As suggested above , these oons ideralion., lcad us lo envisage two types of slate variables : the measurable variables a nd the internal variables.
3.12.2
Observable state variables
The state variables truly accessible lo expedmentation are those deduc.ed conventionally from me<.haoics: di.splacement , force, time , temperature. In mechanics of continuolIs media, the rollowing will therefore be obser vable variables (a) Tbe st.ate of total strain at any point oCthc system . (b) The state of stress at any p
3.12.3
Concealed or internal state variables
'fhese intervene in the dissipativc processes and can be dassified in two categories: 1. First, ooe must inlroduce a distinction between reversible-typc strain f..c alld tbe irreversible one (Fig. 3.1) {p. One introduces an additional hypothesis of
dccoupling of the reversible 3ncl irre\'ersible processes: lile "pa rtitiolli ng rule" which is writ~cn under the h)'pothesis of sma ll perturbatiolls (3.54) Wc ma)' note that in the case of a purcly reversible process (e.lasticitr) f.,e becomes atl observable variable . (J
u
(J
o
~
__________~____~___ f
f' ¡ ~.
3.1 Cnncept of
"
hard ~n \llg.
2. Lastly, lile va ri ablf'_<; cllaracterizing o ~her dissipative phenomena. These varIables constitute in fael the "memory of tiJe past" . Dne introduces Lhus ViLriOU.\J irreversib le proceSse3 (Ilardening, damage, rupture) through slate variables Vi , 'fhey eao be of a sealar Of t ensorial nature.
3.13
THERMODYNAMIC POTENTIAL
Thc state law assumes the existence of a scalar fundion '" also known as "tl1ermodynamic potcntial" function of state variables. \Ve shall see that , cxccpt in purely reversible processes, tlle knowledge of t/J is insufficient lo complelely define the behaviour of the material. Among all s tale fundions, we chose Lhe spedfic fr ee energy 1/J as potential that is
... =
,J,
...ol-It:-
' T ' t;. f '-tJ' ' v..]
(3.55)
ó6
Pan l. Mcchanics of
or taking
i\ c coun~
conlmu o ~
,"edia. Basic COllccpls
of Lhe s l.rain part it ion;ng hypothesis (3 .54) 1!J :: tb k
,T.{" ,V.I
(3 .56)
The fun ction 1/1 being a sti\t,e funaion Dne can caku late its to t.al differential thaL
=
a"
8.
(3.57)
+ 8T dT + tJ Vt dVt
a"
8(f _ {f') : d({ -
a"
D" dT + av¡. dV.I: e) + 8T
8Tj¡ éJ¡p EN> = Oct : df.t + fJrdT+ {jVi dVt
•
•
Thc partilioning hypot hcsis enables one theterarc to wrile the deri vative (with res pect lO tinll!) of '" in lhe form
: _ EN . ¡. ~ 1p -
Q{e - ...
8"' 1' fJTj¡ ir, + iJT + 8 V¡. k
(358)
repla.d ng (3 .58) in (3 .53) ;"nd takiug aecou nt of (3.54) olle ohtains
(3 .59)
3. 14
C ASE OF REVERSIBLE BEIIAVIOUR ELASTICITY
Let us consider a reversible transformation (no irreversible strain i;.P and no evolu tion oC lhe hard ening variables) al. constant a nd un iform temperature ('r = 0, 'V. T:;:: O). In this case Eq . (3.59) becomes equality and yields 8~
~ = p u,-'
(3.60)
One may also consi der the eMe of a reversible t ransformation consisting of a uniform heating of the soli d. In this case (3.59) implics that
,= -
a~
8T
(3 .61)
\
/
60
Pllrt l. Mechllnics of continuou$ medill. Basic concepts
fundion of order zero which means that /{J is homogeneous of order 1 (since !Z is the derivative of /(J). These properties have fundamental consequences on the formalism of dissipative phenomena (independent of time scale). 1st consequence
If /{J is homogeneous of order 1 then /{Jo conjugate of /{J is homogeneous of infinite order. Indeed, given k and m, the respective homogeneity orders of /{Jo and /{J. /(J and I{)being conjugate, one can write [see Eq. (3.70)].
i;.P :!Z -
taking account of (3.69)
/(J
01{)·
which can also be written
8u :!Z-/(J
(3.73)
considering the Euler identi ty l (3.74) Similarly one would prove last two equations to
I{)* :::::; 1{) ( m
- 1) which leads by eliminating I{)- from the
k=~
(3.75)
m-l
The order of 1{) being 1 (m == 1) the order of I{)" is
~hen
inn.nite.
2nd consequence
If there is dissipation, then!Z belongs to a hypersurface I(q: , Ak) == O knowD as yield locus. If there is dissipatioD,!Z o/{J/oi;.P =!l. (e, Ak) in which Q. is a bomogeneous fundion of order zero that is
=
(3.76) which can also be written (3.77) ,\ being arbitrary; one can choose ,\ such that '\if == l.
The elimination of the
'\i~ ... '\i~ from the 6 equations of the type (3.77) leads to a scalar equation of the
type (3.78) lOne of the fundamental properties of homogeneous functions is the Euler identity: if 0(x) is homogeneous of arder m, then
x 80
8x
= m0
66
Part l. Mechamcs oE continuous media. Basic concepts
O~~~=-
__
~~
________
yield locus
~Í-_____
P' Fig. 3.5. Principie of maximum plasUe wOl"k.
![' being any plastically admissible field (f(!!:') ~ O]. Eq. (3.97) alone expresses therefore normality and convexity. It shows that for an associated plastic law, the material "works" plastically to the maximum limit of its possibilities. Plastic dissipation is thus maximum.
3.20.2
Uniqueness of the solution (or Hill's theorem)
A further important consequence of the associativeness of the plastic law is the uniqueness of the solution of a boundary-value problem. Let us consider a certain volume of material, V. In certain portions of this volume V, the loadings paths correspond to plastic loading, in another portion they correspond to elastic unloading posterior to a primary plastic state and, in the remainder to a purely elastic state. We assume that the present state of stress![ at all points of the solid is known as well as the yield locus J(t¿ ). We assume an associated plastic flow rule U == F). Let us suppose that a loading increment dF (or an increment of displacement dil) is applied to the surface of the solido The stress increment and the associated strain increment must verify three conditions: 1. Firstly, the components of the incremental strain field must be kinematically admissible, that is
(3.98) in which dil is the displacement increment associated with df .
67
ChapLer 3. Thermodynamics of contínuOU5 media
2. Subsequently, the components of the incremental stress field must be statically admissible, that is
o dF
\1. d~ dq: ·Ti
or
in V on S
(3.99)
3. Lastly, the components of the two fields must be plastically admissíble, in other words (the condition is written here in terms of increments instead of particulate derivatives) remembering Eqs (3.89) and (3.90) in the case of normality, one obtains df = A '"
tl :
1
+ -H (da : n ) . n ---
da -
with
H >O
(3.100)
a¡ a~
in which
-4 el is the elastic tensor.
Let us now assume two sets of increments (d~, df. ) and (d~', df.') that satisfy the three condítions (3.98), (3.99), (3.100). They are at the same time kinematically, statically and plastically admissible, and let us consider the volume integral 1 such that
1{[d~'-dQ"]: =1{( 1=
[df'-df]}dV
(3.101)
Condition (3.98) enables one to write 1
dQ"' - dQ") : [\1 0 (dü' - dü)} dV
(3.102)
or agam
l
=
1
\1. [(dQ"' - dQ") . (dü' - dü)] dV
-1
(dü' - dü)· [\1. (d¡z' - dQ")] dV (3.103)
The second term is zero [Eq. (3.99)]. By applying to the first right-hand ter m the divergence theorem, one obtains
1=
¡
[(d¡z' - dq:) . (dü' - dü)] . ñdS
(3.104)
in which Ti is the externa! normal to the solid surface. As on the exterl1al surface, the loading increment dF (andJor displacement increment) is prescribed
dF = d~ ñ = dil = dü'
dQ"' ñ
on bF
(3.105)
on bu
which means that (3.104) has to be zero, that is coming back to (3.101)
1[(
dQ"' -
d~ )
: (df.' - df )] d V
=O
(3.106)
68
Part l. Mechanics oE continllous media. Basic concepts
To come back now to the constitutive relation (3.100), let us calculate the integrand of Eq. (3.106) 1 (d[' - d[) : (df.' - df) = H(d[' - d[): [(c/d[': 2 - exd[ : 2)·2]
+4 el
:
(3.107)
(d[' - d[) : (dll' - d[)
with
ex
1 if f([ ) = O
and du : n ~O
O'.
O ir f(1l ) < O
or f([ ) = O and d[ :n
a'
1 if f('!.') = O
and d'!.' :!! ~ O
a'
O if f(t;z')
~
O
(3.108)
or f('!.') = O and d'!.' : n < O
The second term ofthe right-hand member is non-negative (it is a quadratic form). It is zero for d'!.' d'!. . SimilarIy the four conditions (3.108) show that the first ter m is never negative (it is sufficient to test all the combinations to be convinced of the fact).\ The integrand of (3.106) is therefore always positive except when d'!.' d[. Expression (3.106) can then only be zero if d'!. d'!.' everywhere in V which proves the uniqueness of the solution.
=
=
3.21
=
CONCLUSION
The inequality of Clausius-Duhem has established the thermodynamic admissibility of the solid behaviour. Two additionnal hypotheses (time independence and continuity of the strain increment across the yield locus) have enabled us to build a general formalism for a class of dissipative mechanisms. One now has to determine the various potentials (thermodynamic potential, yield locus, plastic potential) in agreement with the actual behaviour: experience and phenomenological considerations wiII guide this choice.
BIBLIOGRAPHY BOUTIGNY,
J., 1986, Thermodynamique, Vuibert.
DRAGON, A., 1988, Plasticiti et endommagement, cours de 3" cycle, Université de Poitiers, UER Sciences - ENSMA. HILL, R., 1950, The Mathematical theory of plasticity, The Oxford Engineering service senes.
Chapter 3. Thermodynamics oi contjnuous medja
LABETHER,
1985, Mesures thermiques et flux, Masson.
LEMAITRE,
J., and
CHABOCHE,
69
J .L., 1988, Mécanique des matériaux solides, Dunod,
Paris. NOWACKI,
W., 1986, Thermoelasiicity, Pergamon Press, Polish scientific publishers.
DUZIAUX, R., REIF,
and
PERRIER,
J., 1978, Mécanique des fluides appliquée, Dunod, Paris.
F., 1965, Statistical physics, Mac Graw Hill, Berkeley Physics course.
ROCARD,
Y., 1967, Thermodynamique, Masson.
Part 11
Mechanis of materIal strain
CHAPTER4
Linear elasticity General theory
Many sedimentary rocks display elastic behaviour, in other words, instantaneous and aboye aH reversible. It seems worthwhile therefore to review certain fundamental concepts of contínuum media elasticity with a view to extending them subsequently to saturated porous media. There are many stout volumes that deal exhaustively with linear elasticity: we would mentíon in particular the works of Musckelishvili, Timoshenko and Ooodier, and Oreen and Zerna.
4.1
HOOKE'S LAW
In its original conception we have seen [Eq. (3.63)] that the theory of linear elasticity is based on the foHowing hypothesis: "The components of the stress tensor at a given point of a solid are linear and homogeneous functions of the components of the strain tensor at the same poínt." This definition induces automatically the small perturbations hypothesis
-rJ=A:e.... :::
(4.1)
in which A known as "elastic tensor" is a tensor of the fourth order containing 81 compon~nts in the general case. Since!?: and f are symmetric tensors, A only contains 36 independent components. Because of linearity A is then an intrinsi~ characteristic of the considered material independent of stress ~nd strain components.
, ¡)
75
Ghapter 4. Linear elasticity. General theory
coordinate z. In
configuratiol1 Hooke's first isotropy)
can now
written,
(4.6)
z
r+--+~3
,+-+__~2 2
x
b
Fig. 4.1. Isotropy with respecl 1.0 pl'incipal axes.
ídentifying
and (4.6) one 12 -
A13)
(4.7)
13
so that (4.6) can be expressed in the form
(4.8) us write 12
=A
(4.9)
All -
Observing that the cubical expansion is such that
€1
+ €z + €3
(Einstein convention) one finally obtains
(4.10)
lTl
similar rotations around y account the symmetry of .Q.)
one would
A€H
+ 2J1€2 + 2J1€3
obtain
into
(4.11)
76
Part TI. Mechanism 01 material strain
or in a tensorial form (4.12)
In linear and isotropic elasticity, the nllmber of elastic constants is reduced to two: Lame 's constants A and ¡J.
4.3.1
Generalization to any Cartesian system of coordinates
Equation (4.12) can be generalized to any Cartesian reference frame by using the quadratic invariant form of tensors !! and f.. Let us consider a vector P with respect to a reference frame linked to the principal directions 1, 2, 3. The quadratic invariant is then written (4.13)
or taking account of Eq. (4.12)
nO"- =
.AéulPI 2 + 2¡JP· & . P =
-
-
.\tu!?1 2 + 2¡Jn&
(4.14)
Given now any reference frame x, y, z with respect to which the components of P "1,(. The invariance of (4.14) makes it possible to write it with respect tO!! and f. expressed in the new basis, that is after development are~,
+ O"yy"12 + O"zze + 20"yz"1( + 20"zx(e + 20"xy~"1 Aékl; (e + r¡2 + (2) + 2¡J (éxxe + &yy"12 + &.zz(2 +2&yz"1( + 2é:zx (e + 2éxy er¡)
O"xxe =
(4.15)
By identifying the variolls coefficients of the two members one obtains a relationship identical to (4.12) i.e. (4.16)
4.3.2
Physical interpretation of isotropy
Hooke's law (4.16) shows that: (a) Normal stresses generate only normal strains. (b) Shear stresses generate only shear strains or, which is identical. (e) Normal stresses are responsible for changes in volume. (d) Shear stresses are responsable for changes in formo
77
Chilpter 4. Linear elasticíty. General theory
4.4
TIIE COMl\10N ELASTIC CONSTANTS
Lame's constants >. and J.l are rarely used in practice. Other elastic constants can indeed defined [roIn loading
4.4.1
Young's rnodulus and Poisson's ratio
If one a.<;sumes that the material is loaded uniaxially (Fig. 4.2) the only non zero component of the tensor f! is (1'zz. Eqs (4.16) are reduced to
o =
2¡lé:c:r:
o
2j.Le yy
>.éa
+ 2J.lé u
Young's modulus
summing the
(4.17),oIle O'zz
by extra.et.ing
éU
Poissons's
= éa(3)' + 2J.l)
from (4.18) and replaeing in t,he third Eq. (4.17) one is led to
in whích E = J.l (3)'
+ 2",)
>'+Jl IS
(4.18)
as ''Young's
78
Part II. Mechanism o( material strain
On the other hand, by eliminating in (4.17) .\ea between one of the first two equations and the last, one obtains U
zz
+ 2J.LE. zz
= -2J.LE. yy
( 4.20)
U zz e yy 2J.L = - 2J.L-+ ezz E. zz that is by taking account of (4.19) one obtains
(4.21)
(4.22)
= .\ /
in which v 2(.\ + J.l) is known as "Poisson's ratio". Figure 4.2 shows the physical significance of E and v: E represents the rigidity of the material under uniaxal loading while v represents the capability of the material to transfer its deformability perpendicularly to the loading. The definition of E and v enables one to express lIooke's equations in their conventional form, that is
1
E.x:r; = E [U.,., - v (u yy
1 E.:r:y = 2J.L u:r:y
+ u zz )]
1
eyy = E [uyy - v(ux:r; + u zz )] ezz
4.4.2
U yy
exz =
1 - U xz
2J.l 1 E. yz = 2J.L u yz
= E1 [uzz-v(u",.,+uyy )]
(4.23)
Hydrostatic bulk modulus
In the case of a hydrostatic loading, the three normal stresses are identical (uxx = = U zz = P); Hooke's law will be written
==> E.",,,,
1
= E. yy = E. zz = E
[P(1 - 2v)]
(4.24)
so that the volume expansion eu is such that
P
E.a
= J(
(4.25)
in which K = E / 3(1 - 2v) is known as "bulk modulus".
4.4.3
Shear modulus
Let us consider a Ioading path such that (4.26) It is known as "pure shearing" and it corresponds to a Mohr's cirde whose centre is the origino In this case, Eqs (4.23) become
79
Chapter 4. Linear cIasticity. General theory
Cxx
=
2G
_ Cyy -
(4.27)
(J"yy 20
with G I 2(1 + being known as "shear modulus" . One can easiJy verify that G is in fact equal to Jl (Lame's second coefficient).
4.5
FURTHER EXPRESSION HOOKE'S EQU ATIONS
Hooke's Eqs (4.2;1)
be put L(J"kk k
a genel'al form by introducing
(TU
convention)
3 Indeed, the first Eq. (4.23) can be written Ex"
1+1I
1I
--(Txx -
-
mean stress
(ITxx
+ (J"yy + IT zz )
311
2G
-(j
E
or finally in a tensorial form
~J
1
2G !Z -
I
v_
1I
(J"- -
2G -
E
(4.30) (J'kk 1
-
smce Jl
4.6
THE BELTRAMI-MITCHELL DIFFERENTIAL
A linear elastic problem contains in fact fifteen unknowns, namely: ( a) síx com ponents of the stress tensor. (b) síx components of the strain tensor. (e) The three components of the displacement vector. To solve this problem there are fifteen equations: (a) equilibrium equations. (b) Six compatibility equations. (e) Six Hooke's equations.
81
Chapter 4. Linear eIasticity. General theory
or again by introducing the Laplacian 'V 2
_1_ [8 + 1
V
2
(J'kk
8y2
= 82 /
+ 82(J'U] 8z 2
8x2
_ 'V
+ 82
2 (J'xx
/
8y2
+ 82
/
8z 2
= O
(4.38)
which can also be written ( 4.39) Two other equations can be obtained respectively with respect to (J'yy and (J'zz and, by summing these three equations, one easily shows that 'V 2 (J'kk = O. Finally, one can derive six Beltrami-Mitchell equations, that is
(1
4.7
+ v)
8 2 (J'kk
2
'V
(J'ij
+ 8x i 8Xj
(4.40)
= O
UNIQUENESS OF THE ELASTIC SOLUTION OF A BOUNDARY PROBLEM
Given an elastic solid subjected on its boundary to a force surface field creates within the solid a statically q.dmissible stress field 2 such that
F.
It
(4.41)
'V·2=0
and a kinematicalIy admissible strain field such that €o
=
~
['V!2l 17 + t ('V !2l 17)]
(4.42)
The material being elastic 2 and €o are linked by the equation
-(J'= A:é
(4.43)
:::.-
in which -1- is defined positive. Given -2' and €O' another solution to the boundary problem verifying Eqs (4.41) (4.42) and (4.43). Given the volume integral (4.44) Taking account of condition (4.42), (4.44) can also be written
1=
1
[(2-d:('V!2l(ü'-17))]dV
(4.45 )
or after deri vation
1=
1
'V.
[(~'-~). (17- ü')] dV
-1
(ü' - 17) ['V.
k'- ~)l dV
( 4.46)
82
Part II. Mechanism of material strajn
The second integral is zero since the two fields ![ and ![I are statically admissible. By applying the divergence theorem to the first integral, one is led to
1
=
1
[(![ -
17)] ñdS
(4.47)
= =
On the boundary one has ü' 17 ifJ when displacements are prescribed, (J'.Ti = f when forces are prescribed. Therefore, 1 is nil everywhere on the surface and,
- =(J.ñ
![~ . (ü" -
1{k' - 2"] : k' - ~J }
dV
=O
(4.48)
Let us now introduce condition (4.43) into (4.48), one is led to
(4.49)
~
The integrand being a quadratic form, Eq. (4.49) can only be zero if t;.' = t;. since is defined positive. The solution to a boundary elastic problem is then unique.
4.8
ENERGY OF ELASTIC STRAIN
When an elastic solid submitted to externalloads passes from a non-strained to a strained state, it accumulates a certain quantity of potential energy that it wiII return entirely if it is unIoaded. In accordance with the first principIe of thermodynamics, the variation in internal volume energy associated with an incremental variation of strain df. is such that (in the absence of thermaI processes [see Eq. (3.48)]) pdu = (J : dé- = A: é- : dé,... =::
(4.50)
Between a non-strained and a strained state f, the volumic elastic energy W accumulated is such that
W
e
i
=
l
E
O
A:E '"
-
:
1 dé = - E : A : é 2- '" -
(4.51)
or
( 4.52) For a solid of volume V, the total accumulated elastic strain energy wil! therefore be such that
(4.53)
Chapter 4.
Ljlle,~I'
83
theory
THEOREM
4.9
Equation (4.53) can also be expressed as a function of the boundary conditions. Indeed, ~ being kinematically admissible W
= ~!vr¿ :(\7 ® 11) dV 1
\7 .
(r¿. 11) dV -
i
(4.54) 11 .
(\7 2' = O), by applying
tbeorem to
(4.55) As on the boundary S
F=2'.ñ
(4.56)
the energy W can finally be expressed by
w =~ f
J
2 s
4.10
BETTY'
F11dS
(4.57)
RECIPROCITY THEOREl'vi
forces of a first system displacements of a to the work carried out second system through the of the first." Given FI , 111 the first system and F2 , 112 the second. The work of the forces of the first system through the displacements of the second is such that Ql
fs
= Fl 112 dS
(4.58)
tbat is according to Clapeyron's theorem
i ~:
f¿l
1~:f2
fs F
2Ül
.
=
Of course, this theorem is only valid if the material is elastic.
(4.59)
84
Part 11. Mechanism of material strain
EQUATIONS IN
4.11
physical state of stress directly express Hooke's
The
1
€pp
=
€89
1 = E
E
1
€zz= E
In
- V (0'08
+ uzz )]
2€p8
l+v = ~Up8
v (u pp
+ u zz )]
2€pz
=
[uzz-v(upp+uoo)]
2é' 8 z
l+v = -----¡¡;0"8 z
[u pp
[0"98 -
l+v -¡¡;-O"pz
cylindrical
(4.60)
BIBLIO JAEGER¡
N.W.G., 1979, FundamcniC!ls
Chapman
& Hall.
and LIFCHITZ, 1967, Théorie de l'élasÚcité, Mir, Moscow. LOVE, A., 1927, Treatise on the mathematica/ theory of elasticity, Cambridge University Press. MUSKHELISHVILI, N.I., 1954, Some basic problems ofthe mathematical theory of elasticity, N oordhoff International Publishing. LANDAU, L.
RICE,
Mathernatir:;d London. TIMOSHENKO,
Afathernatical analysis in the (Vol. II), Academic GOODIER,
J.N., 1970,
in "Fracture, San Francisco, Graw Hill.
CHAPTER
5
lane theory of elasticity
5.1
BASIC EQUATIONS OF PLANE STATE OF
The definition of state of strain has already been given in Chapter 1: the pla,CeInelrlt w (i.e. to Oxy) is nil and the displacements linked to u and v) are independent of z. As a consequence, en exz = eyz O. these conditions to Hooke's law one obtains
=
O"zz
V (O"xx
O"xz
0"'11.10
+ O"yy)
= 0
of z, the
The O"zz stress component
equation reduces
to
+
0
(5.2)
=
+ and the compatibility
to
= 2 {Pexy
+ At and
in plane state of (4.30)], taking account of
the Hooke's equations take the form
- 2(>. =
(5.3)
oxoy
1
eyy
0
~ p)
(0"",,,,
+ O"yy)}
>.
1 { O"YY
1 2p O"xy
Lame's constants
+O"yy)}
(5.4)
86
Part II. Medianism of material strain
5.2
HARMONIC EQUATION POTENTIAL
If one substitutes Hooke's
(5.4) in the compatibility Eq. (5.3), one obtains
+
(5.5)
one derives the equilibrium Eqs (5.2) reTo eliminate the last term of with to x and y. One is led after summation to
"",,,-T>"'A;I,,
(5.6) (5.6) in
+ (J'IIY) = 0
(5.7)
(5.7) is known as "stress harmonic In the trace of the stress tensor is therefore a harmonic function. Let us now consider two functions y) and y) such that (5.8)
account of the
one can {)B
{)A
show that (5.9)
From condition 1 (5.9) one can deduce the existence of a function U(x, y) such that A
{)U
B
(5.10)
Substituting (5.10) in (5.8) and (5.9), one obtains {)2U
(5.11)
then replacing (5.11) in (5.7), one is led to
o U known as "Airy's 1 For
nrll,",'n;T.l"
is a biharmonic function.
proof, see for example Parodi, 1965.
87
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
IN POLAR COORDINATES
5.3 In polar
'-~'JLU,UH"'""",
such
the Laplacian
1a + pap -+
(J'ee
a
(5.13)
(5,11)
one can show the (J'pp
1
lau -+ pap a2 u 1
(J'pe
au
(5.14)
1
p
=
a -ap
=
a (_ ~)]
TO IN INFINITE PLATES 5
1
Determination
Given an infinite parallel to x. The solid is such that
Airy's function
an infinite plate
to a uniaxial state of stress of the the state of stress at all (5.
--(J
Fig. 5.1. Homogeneous elastic plate subjected to a uniaxial uniform compression.
88
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
This state of stress can also be
pVl')rp"''''·(j
1
2 0'(1 1 2
coordinates
III
(2.34)]
+ cos 28) (5.16)
cos 28)
~ sin 20
UpS
In other words, if the plate is ranked with a of infinite radius, the effect of the uniaxial stress can be the sum of a constant component (1) and a component (2) varying with the azimuth 8: " ~(i)
0'
_
vpp -
2
(5.17) %sin28
To these two two different Airy's functions Ui and U2 since the overall problem is considered to be the superposition of two elementary problems (1) and (2). As far as problem (1) is rr.r'rp ... n~·rI condition being uniform the problem is axisymmetric. In other IJV.,"'''''HU is only a function of p, and its derivatives with to e are all nil. account of (5.13) can be written
=0
(5.18)
The general solution of which is of the p+ Cp2
p+
+D
To calculate the Airy potential of the second elementary problem, one can start from Eqs (5.14) that is taking account of (5.17)
(5.20) to () leads for U2 to the general form
which after
g(p) cos 2{) One can
(5.21)
also satisfies the first two equations. Replacing
U2 in the biharmonic "'HH"".'VH one obtains
1 8
+p
ZIt is sufficient to rederive to be convinced of the fact.
89
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
whose general solution is of the
g(p)
=
+ C +D
+
(5.23)
The second Airy function is therefore such that
+ 5
2
C
+ D)
cos 2()
(5.24)
of a circular Kirsch's problem
geometrical disturbance within a solid modifies the original stress distribution. This phenomenon results from the fact that the removed solid This is the transfers onto the adjacent material the stresses it case for a circular hole of radius R in an infinite the effect As one gets further away from the IS for an infinite distance that one the that which pre-existed the appearance of the cavity. As in the previous paragraph, one can divide the problem into two elemEmtary that will later be superposed: Stress field due to component 1 The boundary conditions are such that
o o
(5.25)
since the well is stress free (J'
p=
00
1:::
2 (J'
(5.26)
2
o
(J'p8
These boundary conditions enable one to eliminate the function coefficients (5.19). Indeed, taking account of tives with respect to () are zero) one obtains (I)
(J'pp
A "2 p
+ B(l + 2
A
log p)
--+B(3+2 p2
o
+ 2C
p)+2C
90
Part II. Mecha.nism of material strain
The coefficients A, Band C can be determined by """''''''F. use of the boundary conditions (5.25) and (5.26). One then obtains a of linear equations in the three unknowns A, Band 0 the solution to which is
A= V>~,.HA'"
B
2
(1
0
20=
(5.28)
2
(5.28) in (5.27), one obtains finally
~ (1 R2) p2
(1 )
upp
uie
==
(1)
2
(5.29)
p2
0
(1 p8
Stress field
: . (1 +-)
from component 2
The boundary conditions are such that
P=R{
p=
o
(1pp
U p8
u 00
(1e8
o
(5.30)
cos 2(J
(5.31)
-~ sin 2(J 2
The derivation of
(5.14) taking account of Airy's function (5.24) leads to the
u1~
- (2A + 6C + :~) cos 2(J
uW
(2A
+ 12Bp2 + ~~)
u~~) =
(2A
+ 6Bp 2
(5.32)
cos2()
6C _ 2D
sin 2(J
Substituting the boundary conditions (5.30) and (5.31) in (5.32), one obtains a of linear equations in the unknowns A, B, D, the solution to which is such that A
(1
4
B
o
0=
D==
-(1
2
(5.33)
91
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity.
Substituting
in (5.32) one obtains
(2)
cr68
Global stress field
This is obtained
the two components (1) and (2) that is
cr ( 1 - - ) 2 p2
4
+ -cr2
( 1 + -3R
"2cr
( 1+ 7 3R
p4
) - -4R2 p2
cos 2()
4 )
(5.35)
cos28
2R2) sin20 -+ -p4 p2 At the well bore
for p
R), the component cree is such that p=R cree
= cr ( 1- 2cos2() )
(5.36)
It varies therefore from -cr (traction) in the direction of (1' to 3(1' (compression) in the orthogonal direction. These considerations are of prime in hydraulic fracturing and for the of well stability. Solution (5 can be extended to a biaxial stress field (1'1, (1'2 (1(1'11 > 1(1'21). For this purpose it is sufficient to recalculate condition for a biaxial stress field that is
.....::...-:;--..;;;. cos 20
which leads to the
(5.37)
solution cos 20 (5.38)
92
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
At the well bore (i.e. for p
= R)
the orthoradial component Uee is such that
(5.39) It varies therefore from
5.4.3
-U1
+ 3U2
in the
U1
direction to
-U2
+ 3U1
in that of U2.
Effect of a hydrostatic pressure on the borehole
In the case in which the only external loading is a hydrostatic pressure p applied to the borehole, the problem is identical to elementary problem (1) of the preceding paragraphs since the state of stress is axisymmetric (in other words independent of B). The boundary conditions are such that p= R
p=
U pp
= -p
U pB
= 0
u pp
= UpB = 0
00
(5.40)
The derivation leads of course to the same equations as those of the elementary problem (1) [Eqs (5.27)]. Taking account of (5.40), one is led to a system of three equations in the three unknowns A, B, C to which the solution is A
= _pR2
B
=C =0
(5.41)
Replacing (5.41) in (5.27), one obtains finally R2
U fJP
= -P-2 p Up 9
We may observe that at the well (p orthoradial tensile stress equal to p.
5.5
R2
Uoo
=0 = R)
= P2 p
(5.42)
the pressure generates therefore an
THE FINITE ELASTIC SOLID: SALEH'S APPROXIMATE SOLUTION (Fig. 5.2)
We propose now to extend the theory developed in the previous paragraph to the case of a finite plane with a central hole subjected to a non hydrostatic loading. The difficulty of the problem lies in the different nature of the two boundaries, the external boundary not being a priori expressible in polar coordinates. Let us consider the following transformation (5.43)
93
Chapter 5. Plane tlleory of elasticity
2L
Fig. 5.2 The finite elastic solid (after Saleh. 1985).
in which
z z
+ iy ie e :::: cos 0 + i sin 0 x
(5.44)
Transformation (5.43) enables one to approximate a square a whose corners are rounded 5.3). Indeed, if one substitutes (5.44) in (5.43) after identification one obtains ( cos y
The radius vector
0
sin
~ cos 30) £
0- ~ sin 30) £
(5.45)
is such that
p(O)
0.577 £';3.08 - cos 40
(5.46)
(5.46) represents the of a square with rounded corners. We may note that other more transformations make it to appr()Xlmltte the square more finely. The solution of the elastic problem can be Airy's function and is similar to that of the previous ''>In'''T>I''''
94
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Fig. 5 ..1. Appl·oximaLion of a square by a polnl· figl.ll·c (ufler Muschelisfwili.1954).
On the external boundary, that is for p conditions 1 p=p(8)
"2((J"l
(J"pp
= p(B),
one has the following boundary
1
+ (J"2) + "2((J"l -
-~((J"l -
(J"2)
cos 2B (5.47)
(J"2)
sin 2B
(J"p=R pO
= 0
2 while the periphery of the borehole is such that (J"p=R pp
=
(5.48)
Again, the problem can be divided into two elementary problems. Resolution of problem 1
Problem 1 is purely axisymmetric and such that 1 "2((J"l (J"p=R pp
U1
+ (J"2)
= (J"p=R =0 pO
(5.49)
Alogp+Bp 2 Iogp+Cp2+D
The identification of the various coefficients of U1 is carried out using boundary conditions (5.49) through expressions (5.14). These coefficients are solution of the linear system
A -+2C R2 A p2(B) + 2C
/
(5.50)
95
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
Indeed it can be shown (see Timoshenko and uOOOl,er that the condition for of the zero. From (5.50) one obtains therefore (by
A
1970 for that B should be
B=O
D=Q
(5.51)
Resolution of problem 2 Problem 2 is such that (1p=1\1 pp
1 2
=
=0 1
--«(112
sin 28
and leads to the
- ( 2E + 2E
6G
6G
+ R4 +
4H) + M2 ="21 «(11
4H
0 (5.53)
2E+ 2E+ the solution of which is E
F (5.54)
G H
«(11 -
(12)M 2 .
(M4 + M2R2 2(M2 R2/'
+ R4)
96
Part II. l\fechanism of material strain
Replacing Eqs (5.51) and (5,54) in the expressions of the stresses one obtains the final solution such that 0' pp
M2(0'1 + 0'2) ( R2) 2(M2 _ R2) 1- pi [(M4
+ R2
4(M4 -
'1\12
+ R2
+
+ 4R4) +
. A12 2
M2(O'J - 0'2) 2(M2 _ R2)3
3M (M: + R2)R4 4
+ R4)R2]
P
cos28
(1 + R2) _ M2(0'1 - 0'2) p2 2(M2 _ R2)3
M2(0'1 + 0'2) 2(M2 - R2)
X
2
X
3M2(M2 + R2)R4] 2 4 4 2 p4 cos2B [(M +R ·M +4R )-12 R2.p2+ M2(0'1 - 0'2) 2(M2 _ R2)3 _(M4 [ 2(M4 -
+ R2
X
. M2
+ 4R4) + 6 . R2
+ R2 . M2 + R4)R2] p
2
. p2
+ 3M2(M2 + R2)R4 p4
.
sm 28
(5.55) Does the solution verifiy the boundary conditions particularly on the external contour? On Fig, 5.4, the stress field on this external contour has been recalculated in Cartesian coordinates for various configurations (K :::: LI R) as a function of the azimuth8 (in the particular case 0'2 = 0), For an infinite medium (K = 00) O'xx is equal to 0'1 for 0 < B < 'if/4,O'yy :::: 0 for 7r/4 < {} < 'if/2 while O'xy = 0 on the entire interval. For the limit value f{ = 3, the difference does not exceed 3% for O'xx and O'y"),' and 8 % for O'xy (for a value of {} = 20 0 ), vVe may note that these differences tend to diminish for 0'2 i- 0, In conclusion, the differences observed remain therefore small if the borehole radius does not exceed one third of the semi-length of the square, It can easily be shown that if M is infinity, one finds again Kirsch's solution (stress 0'98 comprised between -0'1 for 8 = 0 and 30'1 for () :::: 'if 12). Similarly if M is constant (the external contour is circular) and if 0'1 :::: 0'2 = P, one has again the well-known Lame's formula. In the event of the finite medium it is observed that the stress concentration around the hole increases very markedly when f{ is low (J( ~ 3) but diminishes rapidly once I< > 5. For example for f{ = 3, the tangential stress at the well is comprised between -1.980'1 and 4.20'1, a very different result from that of the infinite medium (-0'1 and
30'd,
I
When the well is loaded by a hydrostatic pressure (without any stress on the external contour) the calculation is axisymmetric and Airy's function will take the form [see Eq. (5.49)] U = A logp + Cp2 (5.56)
97
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
CJ
~ CJ
1
K
=3
~:~l------':':';;';;"'======"'" 1.21 K ~
0.9 0.6
co
8
M
~:~ '---.--...--.--....--....--.--...--....-.... o
10
1S
20
25
30
35
40
45
O"arK ~ ro3 0.1
K ;;::
0.2 0.3 0.4
()
0.5 '------....-..,...--.~--...--.,..--...... 45
50
55
60
65
70
75
BO
B5
90
Fig. 5.4. Verification of the boundary conditions (after Saleh. 1985)
By expressing the boundary conditions
P= R{
(J'pp (J' p8
-p
and p = M {
o
o o
(5.57)
one can determine the two constants A and C [Eqs (5.27)] (5.58) that is after substitution of U in (5.14)
p·R 2 (M2 _ R2)
[1- ~2]
(J'ee
p·R 2 (M2 - R2)
[1 + ~2]
(J'r9
0
(J'rr
(5.59)
In the same way as for the previous problem, one can easily have Lame's formulas again for M = 00 or M =Const.
98
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
METHOD OF OF MUSKHELISHVILI
5
The method of complex is the most widespread in plane elasIt is also the most powerfuL This formalism is in fact a purely mathematical consequence of the condition of It consists in expressthe on the basis of a variable z instead of two real variables x and y. Without developing in detail this mathematical tool (readers should refer the mystery surrounding it to Muskhelishvili's book) we shall endeavour to complexity occasionally tends to the potential user), then a presentation of some concerning rock mechanICS. However it is essential to review certain basic concerning analytical functions.
5.6.1
Analytical functions and conditions (CRC) and
y) of the real variables x
= P(z, y) + iQ(x, y)
(5.60)
Let us consider two real functions and y, and the complex number Z Given now the
'-VLU .... ''''A
variable z
= x + iy
(5.61)
When one has the variable z, in the complex plane, functions Q and P have determinate values so does the complex number Z. One can therefore say that Z is a uniform function of variable z and write
fez)
= P(x, y) + iQ(x,
The
function can be deduced when one seeks to define the For this purpose, let us differentiate after pooling and division by dx, it becomes
ap ax
.aQ ax
-+z-+
It appears that not only on variables x and dy/dx. One cannot attribute to (5.63) a determinate value at a plane. On the other hand in the specific case in which
aQ i [ap +i ] = ap + ax ax ay
(5.63) y
but also on the ratio
z of the complex
(5.64)
99
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
dy/dx disappears from expression (5.63), and the derivative is equal to df aP .aQ -=-+zdz ax ax
(5.65)
which for its part is indeed unique. (5.64) represents the necessary and sufficient condition for a complex function to admit a unique derivative. It is known as "Cauchy-Riemann conditions" and can be written
aP ax
aP ay
aQ ay
aQ ax
(5.66)
A complex function f(z) is analytical if and only if its derivative is unique. Any analytical function verifies therefore the Cauchy-Riemann conditions. The Cauchy-Riemann conditions have a fundamental consequence: the analytical function is a function only of the variable z. Indeed, if one introduces the variable z conjugate with z and such that z= x - iy (5.67) one can either consider f as a function of x and y or as a function of z and z and express the total differential of f in the two following ways
df df =
af dx+af dy ax ay af af - dz+- dZ -
az
(5.68)
az
Resolving (5.61) and (5.67) with respect to x and y then differentiating, one is led to
i
dy = 2(dZ - dz)
(5.69)
which after substitution in the first of the Eqs (5.68) then identification with the second gives (5.70) By developing this second equation, taking account of (5.62) one obtains
af Oz
=~
2
[ap + i aQ + i aP _ aQ] ax ax ay ay
=0
(5.71 )
If the CRC are verified, function f only depends on z. Similarly, one can prove in the same way that the function conjugate with f, f only depends on z. In other words
af =
az
0
(5.72)
We may note lastly that the CRC prescribe that functions P and Q be harmonic = 0). Any analytical function is therefore harmonic.
(\7 2 P = \7 2 Q
100
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
5.6.2
Application to the biharmonic equation
Let us look for the solution to the biharmonic equation in the form of an function of two variables z and z. Taking account of (5.70), the derivatives with to x and 11 can be written {)
so that the
ua.'~la""la,u
{)
+
{)
and
{)
.
(5.73)
-=~
{)y
to (5.74)
The biharmonic
is therefore written (5.75)
The solution to
is obtained by integration and is of the form
(5.76) it is sufficient to .,.,>'."',.',,,., functions Xl and
into account that
+ U
its
(5.77)
is nil that is (U - U == 0), which induces
(5.78)
~denticallY, one can calculate the real part by summing U and
that is
account of (5.79) One can therefore
the index and write
U =Re
+ X(z)]
function of two real . can be written in the form of two analytical functions
101
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
5.6.3
Expression of stresses and displacements
The expressions of the stresses are obtained directly by deriving Airy's potential twice 3 [Eqs (5.11)]. Taking account of (5.73) and (5.79), one obtains
+ 17yy == 2 [
17xx
(l7 yy -
(5.81)
with
(5.82)
We may note finally that in polar coordinates Eqs (5.81) and (5.82) can be written
2G(u p
+ iue)
= e- i9
[(3 - 4v)
zcp(z) -1j;(z)]
+ 1790 = 2 [
I7pp
(5.83)
The solution of an elastic boundary problem is therefore based upon the determination of two complex functions, which have to be determined from the boundary conditions specific to each problem. The form of the complex potential can be better specified in the case of finite or infinite connected regions i.e. bounded by several simple contours L1, L2 ... Lm, Lm+I (Fig. 5.5) where Lm+l is supposed to contain all the other contours. For infinite regions, the contour Lm+I has entirely moved to infinity. Furthermore one assumes that these contours do not intersect themselves (L, n LJ =0 \;12 and VJ).
G Fig. 5.5. Multiply connected regions. (after Muscnelishvili. 1954).
3Indeed 8",(z)
I
8;;
== ",'(z).
102
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
In these conditions and remembering the uniqueness of the elastic solution both in terms of stresses and displacements, one can show (see Muskhelishvili pp. 121 to 126) that the complex potentials are analytic functions of the complex variable z i.e can be expanded in the form of a Laurent series. This fundamental property (in the case of multiply connected regions) will have an important practical repercussion on complex potential determination.
5.7
CONFORMAL MAPPING. TRANSFORMATION OF THE BASIC FORMULA
Complex representation is especially useful when the boundaries of the related domain are simple. In particular, they are perfectly adapted to circular boundaries. On the other hand, when the boundaries are more complicated (elliptic, square ... ), the boundary conditions can no longer be expressed in polar form. One of the great advantage of conformal mapping is to allow the transformation of a region limited by a curvilinear cavity into a region limited by a circle. The resolution of a curvilinear problem can thus be achieved in polar coordinates. A transformation between a real plane (compJex variable z) and an image plane (complex variable () is called conformal if the application of z in ( is univocal, reciprocal and maintains the angles. Let us consider (Fig. 5.6) in the real plane a point z = x + iy and its image ( such that ( = X + .Y = pe,e. The transformation will be written z
= x + iy = wee) = w(pe,e)
(5.84) y
y
o
x
--~------~--~--+-~....~
Fig. 5.6. Transformation of a curvilinear cavity inlo a cil"cular cavity (conformal mapping).
X
103
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
It is a univocal and plane. If the direction
COl'ref!J)o,naen<:e between the real plane and the of intensity Idz I according to of the image plane will undergo to direction OJ A'. ,-,H"'H}','"" in coordinates will therefore be such that "''-o""HV''-oU.'
dz
(5.85)
0: being the of the vectors OA and Ox. From (5.84) one can easily deduce an equation between 0: and B. Indeed
e,,:t
(5.86) ""'''"H''''~
Similarly, the complex
<1>(z) and \[1(z) can be written in the image plane <1> [wee)] =
\[1(z)
\[1 [wee)]
«) 1li 1
(5.87)
«)
and,
= Taking account of (5.86) and (5.87) and formed formulas for stresses
one obtains the trans-
+ \[1I()] (5.88)
+ Ilil«)] (()] Similarly, it is easily found that
+ ius) = p
5.8
EXPRESSION OF IN THE IMAGE
(5.89)
CONDITIONS
Equation (5.88) makes it possible therefore to solve an elastic
<1>1 and \[11 have been determined. This will be made via the
UUlIlIUa.lY
problem once conditions.
104
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Let us consider 5.7) for this purpose the boundary AB and the surface force applied on a element ds. The boundary conditions can be written that is
Fn
cr xx
cos a
cryy
sin Q'
+ crxy sin + xy cos (J'
Q'
(5.90) Q'
y
dx
Bt..----
A
Fig. 5.7. Boundary conditions.
If one travels along AB an:C}-(:lo,:IiVI'I wards the negative x) while y increases is convex) dy cosO'
As
dx the
domain sin Q'
=
dx
(5.91)
(5.11) ay2
From (5.90) (5.91) (5.92) one obtains
Fi{ that is after
=
on AB
au +t.au)] ay
-
AB -
1
AB
+ iFi{)ds
(5.93)
105
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
or again taking account of (5.73) and (5.79) i {
~B
(F~ + iF~) ds = [rp(z) + zrp'(z) + 1j;(Z)]
AB
(5.94)
in which z belongs to the real (curvilinear) boundary. Eq. (5.94) can be expressed in the image plane by introducing the variable ( such that z = w(() which leads finally to w(() - - _ _
h+ih
+ w'(()
i {
(F~ + zF~) ds
with
=
h + ih
rp~(()+1fl(()
rpl(()
JAB
(5.95)
In the specific case for which the region is mapped on to a circle one introduces in Eq. (5.95) the notation (J = poe ifJ where Po is the radius of the mapped circle that is (the index 1 of complex potentials are not useful anymore)
rp((J)
5.9
+
w((J) rp'((J) + 1f((J) w'((J) (J = poe iB
= f((J)
(5.96)
DETERMINATION OF COMPLEX POTENTIAL BY BOUNDARY INTEGRALS
The objective is now to determine the two complex potentials rp(() and 1j;(() so as to satisfy the boundary conditions. (5.96) can be rewritten in the integral form (after multiplying each member by 1 / (J - ()
1 -y
rp((J) d(J (J - (
+
1 -y
W((J) rp'((J)~ w' ((J ) (J - (
+ l1j;((J)
d(J (J - ( f ((J)d(J = -y (J-(
I -y
(5.97)
where, is the unit circle. The interest of the boundary integration (5.97) is to reveal integrals of the Cauchy type that is in a general case g(t) dt (5.98)
1 -y
t- (
Indeed, the Cauchy integral has some mathematical properties of which one can take advantage for the determination of the complex potentials rp(() and 1j;((). Provided g(() is analytic (which is the case for multiply connected regions) at every point outside " (including infinity), one can show (for demonstration see Goodier and Timoshenko, 1970, pp. 207 to 209) that
1 -y
g(t)dt == -21rig(() t- (
and
1 -y
g(t)dt t- (
=0
(5.99)
106
5.10
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
APPLICATION TO THE CASE OF AN INFINITE PLATE CONTAINING AN ELLIPTICAL CAVITY
Let us consider an infinite elastic plate (Fig. 5.8) containing an elliptical cavity of axes a and b. That is the conformal transformation (5.100)
(J y
y
'--+ ~
x
x
......... ~---~ 2a For m= I the ellipse decays into a crac}(
or
length 2a
(J
Fig. '5.8. Plate containing an elliptical hole.
To the ellipse of the real plane corresponds a circle of unit radius in the image plane. Indeed, by identifying the real and imaginary parts of (5.100) one obtains for p = 1 (that is for ( = u = e,9)
x=R(1+m)cosO
y=R(1-m)sinO
(5.101)
which are the parametric equations of an ellipse in the real plane whose semi-axes are such that (5.102) b = R(1- m) a = R(l + m) Solving (5.102) with respect to Rand m , one obtains m= a-b
a+b
R= a+b 2
(5.103)
107
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
a and b, it is therefore easy to calculate Rand m which are the parameters of the transformation. We may note that this latter possesses two extreme cases: if m 0, the ellipse becomes a on the contrary, if m I, it is transformed into a line (in other words a crack of 2a see To solve the problem one has now to determine the '"v... v,,, .... nnr.pn'r.l In this particulate case,the boundary condition is written its expression 100) that is
dO'
--+ 0'-(
(5.104)
In (5.104) both second and third terms of the first member vanish 4 while the first one is such that r.p(O')dO'
1 'Y
nel·elCH'e.
0'-(
105)
the first complex potential is such that [replacing (5.105) into (5.104)]
r.p«)
=
1
i
0'-(
The second '"'v,,, .... ,,,.... potential 1/;(() can be determined by conjugating is after on l'
(5.106) that
Among the three Cauchy integrals of (5.107), the first one vanishes while the two others are such that
(5.108)
The second
",.."."..",1"" l'UI'''''''.l''''l
is then such that
1/;(() = 4FoT demonstration, see Goodier and Timoshenko, 1970, p. 212.
(5.109)
108
Part II. lvfecllanism of material strain
cavity
with a uniform pressure
In this case, the boundary conditions on an element ds can be written [Eq. (5.90)] -pcosa
FYn
The global boundary condition is obtained count of (5.91)] that is taking account of
h + ih = z
(5.1
-psin a
ac-
[Eq. (5.95)
1,
11)
the conjugate of which is (5.112) these values in (5.106) and (5.1 09), after integration one is led to
ip«() =
pRm
(5.113)
(
replacing (5.113) in (5.88), one obtains the OVlrw<,eelr>n of the stresses and in the expression of the displacements. These results are useful in the case of an infinitely flattened ellipse (crack) for which m L In this case, one obtains for the stress and fields after substitutions
(5.114) ---.~~~==~~==~-
2Gp pRp
--2G-'-r~~~~~
with 3 - 411 (plane state of strain) In the crack extension (that is for B a pp a XT and aeo = a yy )
0),
2p
a xx
== -.-, -1 p-
a yy
114) become (since in this direction
(5.115)
109
Chapter 5. Plane theory of elasticity
In other words, at the fracture tip (that is for p = 1), the elastic solution leads to a singular stress field. This observation, as we shall see, is of prime importance in the study of fissuring.
Infinite plate subjected to a far stress field (Fig.5.8) This classic problem has been variously solved by numerous authors (Muskhelishvili, 1953, Goodier, 1968, Sih and Leibowitz, 1968, Goodier and Timoshenko, 1970, Jaeger and Cook, 1979). The calculations are very similar to the previous problem. Calculation shows that the initial elliptical cavity strains but remains an ellipse whose new semi-axes are such that
a'
= a [ 1- 1 - E2v
2
(J'
]
(5.116)
The solution of the stress field is of the form (J'xx
+ (J'yy (5.117)
On the symmetry axis of the ellipse (J'xy ::::: O. (5.117) only takes account of the disturbed solution and to obtain the global solution, one has to add the trivial solution of the plate without a cavity subjected to the same loading. We shall see that Eqs (5.117) are the starting point for the study of fissured materials. It is also useful to calculate the volumic elastic strain energy associated with the elliptical cavity. This calculation can be easily performed from the stress and displacement fields but one can also evaluate it directly using complex potentials. For a biaxial loading (J', k(J'(k < 1) it is equal to (per unit length perpendicularly to the considered plane)
Wi ::::: 7r(J'2(1 - v
2
[(1 _ k?(a
)
4E
+ b)2 + 2(1 _
k 2 )(a 2
_
b2 ) (5.118)
+(1 + k)2(a 2 + b2 )]
5.11
CONCLUSION
While very condensed, this chapter provides readers with the mam bases for solving a number of plane elastic problems. Although insufficient to solve a concrete problem in rock mechanics, linear elasticity will enable us to introduce very intuitively the concept of a porous medium to which a large part of what follows will now be devoted.
110
Part IT. Mechanism of material strain
BIBLIOGRAPHY J.N., 1968, Mathematical theory of equilibrium cracks, in Mathematical fundamentals" (Vol. II), Liebowitz Ed. Academic Press New York, San GU"","V. London. GOURSAT, E., 1956, COUTS mathimatique, Vol. Gauthier-Villars, Paris. and COOK, N.G.W., 1979, Fundamentals of Rock Mechanics; 3rd ed. Chapman and Hall, London. LANDAU, L., and Thiorie de l'iiasticiti, Moscow. MUSKHELISHVILI, N.1., 1954, Some basic problems of the mathematical theory of elasticity, Noordhoff International Publishing. PARODI, M., 1965, Mathimatiques appliquies a l'aM de l'ingenieur, VoL III, "Fonction de variable complexe. symbolique", SEDES, Paris. PARTON, and 1981, Methodes de la tMorie matMmatique de l'elasticiU, Vol. I, II, Mir, Moscow. V., and P., 1977, Equations intigrales de la tMorie de Mir, Moscow. REKATCH, V., 1977, ProbJemes de La theorie de l'elasticiti, Mir, Moscow. SALEH, 1985, Determination de l'etat de contrainie et des pToprietis ",nCh"",,, d 'un massif rocheux par inversion des donnees ricolties lors d 'un essai de fracturation pressiometrique, Thesis Paris. and H., 1968, Mathematical theory brittle fracture, in "FracG ture, Mathematical fundamentals" (VoL ,Liebowitz Ed. Academic Press New San London. 1970, Theory of elasticity, Mac Graw Hill. and GOODIER, J
CHAPTER
6
Behaviour of a material containing cavities
In a fairly general way, a rock can be ranked with a continuous material containing a more or less substantial proportion of vacuums, often random in shape and geometrically complicated. In this chapter we shall study how the presence of vacuums can influence the macroscopic behaviour of an elastic material.
6.1
PHENOMENOLOGICAL ASPECT
The stress strain curve of the majority of sedimentary rocks (specially sandstones and limestones) offers in compression (uniaxial, triaxial or hydrostatic) a strongly nonlinear behaviour for low stresses (Fig.6.1). Under increasing loading, the modulus of the material (Young's modulus or hydrostatic bulk modulus) gradually increases until a certain value for which the curve becomes pseudo-linear. Furthermore, the rocks often display hysteresis after unloading. These two phenomena, namely non linearity and hysteresis are the dominant characteristics differentiating dry rocks (i.e without interstitial fluid for the moment) from continuous materials. We shall see that they are attributed to the presence of specific vacuums: microcracks.
6.2
STRAIN ENERGY ASSOCIATED WITH A CAVITY DEFINITION OF EFFECTIVE BULK MODULUS
In the preceding chapter we described the effect of a circular and then of an elliptical disturbances on stress and strain fields. From these redistributions, results a modification of the elastic strain energy: generally speaking, the presence of a cavity tends to increase the elastic strain energy of the same identically loaded solid but
112
Part II. Mechanísm
ol mateTÍal straín
Chapter 6. BeJum
without a cavity. Thereíore, the elastic strain energy oí a cavity IVc is the difference between the energy W oí the solid containing the cavity under a given loading system and that Wo oí the same solid identically loaded but without a cavity, that is
(6.1)
700
600
500
~
e
'.." ''"" ..'" e,
400
;:l
300
200
Replacing (<<
100
Fig. 6.1. Classical hydrostatic
behaviour
compression
of a porous
(Indonesian
rock under
Sandstone).
Let us consider a volume oí material (a cube oí side A) containing a cavity, and hydrostatically loaded (Fig. 6.2). In accordance with Clapeyron's theorem, the elastic strain energy accumulated in the material is equal to half the work carried out by the externalloads through the displacements; under hydrostatic loading one has thereíore
W
1
= 20"~V
(6.2)
in which ~ V is the volume variation oí the material between zero and absence oí a cavity, the stress field in the material is uniform so that 1
Wo
0".
In the
1 (j2
= 20"é
kk
V
=2K
V
(6.3)
in which K is the bulk modulus oí the solid material (known as matrix) and V the total volume oí the cube (V A3).
=
KeJf is can bulk modulus (l a cavity) knowi real material (iJ that Wc still hE modulus is less increases the 01
6.3
SPEC
PORl!
Equation (fi linear behaviou necessary to ex For instance tbl mmor axes a al
Chapter 6. Behaviour
of a material containing
•• the difference Ioading system • that is
113
cavities
a A
(6.1)
-
,-------'-------('.-
- - - - - - - - - - --
~aA
L--
-.-
---'
_
a Fig. 6.2. Cavity in a material a hydrostatic
under
loading.
Replacing (6_2) and (6.3) in (6.1), one obtains
~V
V
1 I<
2 Wc V (72
-=-+--=-(7
a cavity, and , the elastic out by the has therefore (6.2) In the
(6.3)
1 I
(6.4)
I
6.3
SPECIFIC TYPES OF CAVITIES: PORES AND MICROCRACKS
Equation (6.4) defines the effective modulus but do es not account for the nonlinear behaviour of the material such as is observed in Fig. 6_1. For this purpose it is necessary to expound Wc which can only be envisaged for simple cavity geometries. For instance the calculation is possible for an elliptical cavity of respective· major and minor axes a and b, under any type of loading (the calculation is performed on the
114
Part Il. Mechanism
of material strain
basis of the complex potentials determined in the previous chapter). In the case of hydrostatic loading the result becomes very simple [Eq. (5.118), with k 1]
=
a..pccr
6.4
'<1
6. B' .
EVOLU WITHl
(6.5) E and v being respectively Young's modulus and Poisson's ratio of the matrix. Replacing (6.5) in (6.4) one is led to _1_ Keff
=..!.. K
+
21l'"(1- v2) A( 2 EV a
b2)
+
Let us coasidI: der increasin~" disappear one a8I remain open, tha
(6.6)
The variation in total volume is equal to the volume variation of the matrix plus the volume variation of the cavity which for a value u of the loading will be equal to
(0'2
has been negl In that case I!
1
(6.7)
Ke, Initially, the volume of the cavity was such that Vo = 1rabA
(6.8)
The volume of the cavity for a value u of the loading will therefore be such that
R; being the día¡ The non-línea gradual closure (J tion of the pares range so that one
(6.9) or by introducing a
= bJa,
the shape factor of the cavity, (6.10)
Under compressive loading (u < O), the cavity volume will gradually be reduced and will be equal to zero for u e such that (6.11) The smaller the shape factor of the cavity, the lower the pressure required to close the cavity. One can therefore differentiate two categories of vacuums with respect to their closure pressure: (a) Those whose shape factor is small with respect to 1. These are sharply flattened ellipses closing under a low stress field. They are known as microcracks. (b) Those whose shape factor is large. They are circular vacuums (spherical or cylindrical). They can practically never close (indeed, a pressure of the order of magnitude of the matrix Young's modulus would be required). They are known as pores. By extension, a medium containing cavities is known as a porous medium.
is a constant. It I material whose b4 will become appa KB is always les! the microcracks a of the curve u - . this straight line the microcracks ( one can define tb
in which
with [Eq. (6.10)]
The crack poi open under u.
Chapter 6. Behaviour
In the case of i= 1]
6.4
115
oi a material containing cavities
EVOLUTION OF THE EFFECTIVE MODULUS WITH LOADING
(6.5) Let us consider a material containing initially np pores and nJ microcracks. Under increasing loading, only the microcracks will close and, their contributions will disappear one after the other. Therefore under loading 17, only n(17) microcracks will remain open, those whose shape factor is such that
of the matrix.
(6.6)
217(1 - 1I2) a> -
die matrix plus "will be equal to
(6.12)
E
(a has been neglected with respect to 1) 2
In that case Eq. (6.6) becomes 1
(6.7)
[{elJ
1
=
J{
n. 4(1 - 1I2) 7rR; A
+~
E
n(q)
2(1 - 1I2) 7ra; A
+~
V
E
V
(6.13)
R; being the diameter of a pore and
ai the length of any microcrack. The non-linear behaviour of rocks at low stress is explained therefore by the gradual closure of the microcracks during loading. On the contrary, the contribution of the pores in expression (6.13) remains quasi constant in a reasonable loading range so that one can consider that
(6.8) be such that
I (6.10) be reduced
(6.11)
2. ~
_1__
(6.9)
I
I
]{B
-
K
+ L..J
(6.14)
EV
.:1
is a constant. It represents the hydrostatic bulk modulus of an imaginary continuous material whose behaviour is equivalent to that of the real material. For reasons which will become apparent in the following chapters J{B is known as drained bulk modulus. J{B is always less than J{. The effective bulk modulus being equal to [{B when all the microcracks are closed, J{B is therefore represented by the slope of the linear part of the curve 17 - Ekk (in which En is equal to ~ VIV). The abscissa at the origin of this straight line represents the variation in relative volume due to the closing of all the microcracks (Fig. 6.3): it is a known as "initial crack porosity" T/a. Byextension, one can define the crack porosity under loading 17, T/( (7) such that T/(17)
I
=
¡
in which . sharply flat_ .icrocracks. (spherical or ofthe order )_ Theyare "- bown as a
4(1-1I2)1l"R;A
VP(17) V
(6.15)
n(q)
VF(17) =
¿ Vi(17)
(6.16)
.:1
with [Eq. (6.10)] Vi(17) = 7I"a;aA
+ 271"(1;
2 1I ) Aar17
The crack porosity is therefore representative open under 17.
a
«:
1
(6.17)
of the cracked volume remaining
116
Part Il. Mechanism
al material strain
a
Chapter 6. Behay¡
Taking acco
in which the sw a shape factor (
The shape ( a higher level a loading ranges whose shape faA
O~~~--~rr--
~"~ Now, d7](a) and a + da, in
Fig. 6.3. Drained bulk modulus (after Morlier. 1971 ).
and crack
porosity
ai
Figure 6.3 shows that '::kk(U)
=
u /{B
+ r¡a -
r¡(u)
(6.18)
in which d 2:, a and a + da. The sum exí
that is by deriving with respect to u
a.:: k k ou
1
=
or¡(u)
/{B-~
(6.19)
that is by repla
which can also be written
1 1 or¡(u) ----tc.¡ f J{B oU which is another form of the effective modulus evolution.
6.5
(6.20)
DETERMINATION OF THE CRACKING SPECTRUM USING MORLIER'S METHOD
The curve 7]( u) can be used to determine the distribution of cracks in accordance with their shape factor. Let us call dr¡( a) the porosity associated with all the crack s whose shape factor is comprised between a and a + da and given h( a) the density probability function such that d7](a) h(a)da (6.21)
=
or again taking
Replacing (~
Let us deriw
•• material
strain
Ghapter 6. Behaviour
of a material
117
containing cavities
Taking account of (6.15), (6.16) and (6.17), one has
=
dr¡(u) da
2
211"(1- v EV
A" 2 L..,¿ a,
)
O'
«1
(6.22)
• in which the sum is extended to all the cracks still open under u, in other words with a shape factor O' such that [Eq. (6.12)] 2u(1 - v2) E
a> -
0'«1
(6.23)
The shape of the compressibility curve leads one to think that O' is bounded by a higher level O'M. In other words for O' > O'M all the microcracks are closed in the loading ranges envisaged. The sum (6.22) is therefore only extended to the cracks whose shape factor is such that (u < O) 2
and
< O' < --
E
(6.24)
O'M
Now, dr¡(O') is the porosity of cracks whose shape factor is comprised between O' + da, in other words
d r¡( 0')
= --::-V-::-=---
O'
(6.25)
a;
(6.18)
is only relative to the cracks whose shape factor is comprised between in which d-¿. O' and O'+dO'. The sum extended to the interval (6.24) can then be calculated. Indeed (6.26)
(6.19)
that is by replacing (6.25) in (6.26)
L ·- j _ a2
(6.20)
aM
-
2<7(1-,,2)
,
E
V --d O' 11" Aa r¡( )
(6.27)
or again taking account of (6.21)
¡:a¡ - ja 2 _
V
1I"A
,
M
_2<7(1_,,2) E
h(O') --;;-dO'
(6.28)
Replacing (6.28) in (6.22), one obtains dr¡(u) do
= 2(1 - v2) E
ja
M
h(O') da
_2<7(1_,,2) E
O'
(6.29)
Let us derive Eq. (6.29) a second time with respect to u, that is d2r¡(u) da? (6.21)
=
2(1 - v2) E
[h(O') 00'] O'
o s«
OU _
2<7(1-,,2) E
(6.30)
118
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
Chapter 6. BehaVÍOl
now, h(o:) being
0.182
or again by writn
•
0.181
¡
0.18
~...
0.179
o
'"
•..
0.178
Po
'"
0.177
E¡¡:;
0.176
O
0.175
¡::
o:: O
P...
a
Let us observe in fact, according
0.174
where
0.173
110
is the 1«
It is then neee
0.172
An example ( case O:M ~ 4.10-:
0.171 100
O
200
300
'100
PRESSURE(bar)
6.6
450 400
CLOSU A CON
350
Knowledge 01 closure under an Given a defec stress fieId (T1, (T2 (Fig. 6.5). The shape C~ a constant direct will be such that
300
c:I
~ .c
250 200 150 100 50
0.001
0.002
a Fig. 6.4. Cracking by Morlier's
spectrum
melhod
b+De ns ty probability í
of Vosges Sandstone
(tifter
a+Cornpre ss ibi Ií ty e urve
0.004
delermined
Under the effi and (6.32), the el
Segal,1989).
versus
versus
0.003
pressure.
sh ape coefficient.
Three cases e its orientation the contrary the be open if its din
su
crlmaterialstraín
Chapter 6. Behaviour
119
ol a material contaíning cavitíes
now, h(a) being a distribution h [_
function, h(aM)
=
20-(1-I/Z)]
E or again by writing
[C]-l
= O hence
2)]-1
[2(1_1/
E
=
2(1 E
2 d 'f}(0-)
o- do-z
1/2)
= Co-d2'f}(0-) 2
h(-C-10-)
(6.31)
(6.32)
(6.33)
d0-
Let us observe that (6.33) is not a true probability density since it is not normed; in fact, according to (6.21), one has
l
cxM
l
cxM
h(a)da =
d'f}(a) = 'f}a
(6.34)
where TIa is the total crack porosity. It is then necessary to divide h( a) by TIa to obtain a probability density. An example (for Vosge Sandstone) is taken from Fig. 6.4 and shows that in this case aM ~ 4.10-3 (h(a) in that example is divided by 'f}o).
6.6
CLOSURE OF A CRACK POPULATION UNDER A COMPRESSIVE STRESS FIELD
Knowledge of crack opening distribution h(a) makes it possible to follow crack closure under an increasing compressive stress field. Given a defect of length a, shape coefficient a submitted to a biaxial compressive stress field 0-1, 0-2 such that 0-1 < 0-2 and whose major axis makes an angle (3 with 0-2 (Fig. 6.5). The shape coefficient being small (a ~ 1) one can suppose that the normal ñ has a constant direction. The normal and tangential components applied to the defect will be such that
{:
(6.35)
~ (o-z - o-d sin 2(3
Under the effect of 0-, the defect initially open begins to close. According to (6.12) and (6.32), the critical value or o- for the crack to close is o-er
= -aC
(6.36)
Three cases can be considered: if O-er < 0-1, the defect will remain open whatever its orientation since the minor component is less compressive than O-er; if O-er > 0-2 on the contrary the defect cannot remain open; finally, if 0-1 < O-er < O-i, the defect will be open if its direction (3 is such that 7r
(3er
< (3 < "2
with o-«(3er) = o-er
120
Part Tl, Mechanism af material strain
Chapter 6. Behavi •••
36 34 32
y
30 28 26
E Z <, E-o Z
x
,,
"
\~" \.
24 22 20 18 16
a \
14 12 10
8 20t Fig. 6.5. Open crack
under
a b axi al loading. í
F.
01'
f3cr
=
. JlJ'l+O:C arcsm IJ'1 -
IJ'2
(o
One can easily find from (6.37) the two first cases: if IJ'1 = -o:C, f3cr = O (the -o:C, f3cr 'Ir/2 (the crack is closed whatever crack is open whatever 13is) and if IJ'2 13 is). Let us consider now N defects and given h(o:) the probability density on 0:. Among these N defects, a certain number d N¿ have a shape coefficient comprised between o: and o: + do: that is
=
01
(6.37)
=
(6.38)
ADDITl THE el
but, among these dN¿ defects, those whose argument is comprised between f3cr (1J'1, IJ'2, 0:) and 'Ir /2 will remain open. If we suppose furthermore a homogeneous distribution of 13, the number of open cracks wiU be then
Under uniaxial pressure shows thl
st«; = Nh(o:)do:
'Ir
"2 dNT = d N¿
f3cr(lJ'l, IJ'2, 0:) 'Ir
(6.39)
2 Under a compressive stress field IJ'1, IJ'2, the percentage of open cracks will be then such that NT (CXM 1 N = J ;h(o:) ['Ir- 2f3cr(1J'1, IJ'2, 0:)] do: (6.40) o
The numerical integration of (6.40) is represented on Fig. 6.6 for Vosge Sandstone and clearly shows that even for a smaU confining pressure IJ'2, only a few percent of defects remain open. Nevertheless we will see afterwards that these open cracks have a great importance as regards rupture.
6.7
(a) The micro Increases, 1 (b) The closun sil" microe tween lips] important non-lineari (e) In the san modulus .E
aJaterialstrain
Chapter 6. Behaviour
oi a material containing
121
cavities
36 J4 32 30 28 26
E
24
z )..
22
z,
20 lB
16 14 12
lO 8 200
300
400
lall Fig. 6.6. Percentage of confining
(6.37)
pressure
600
(bar)
of open cracks
for different
values
(Vosges sandstone)
(after Ctuirlez et al. 1991).
6.7 (6.38)
ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS CONCERNING THE CLOSURE OF THE MICROCRACKS
Under uniaxial compression, direct observation pressure shows that:
(6.39)
, (6.40)
500
of the microcracks closure under
(a) The microcracks perpendicular to the direction of the stress close as the stress increases, while those parallel to the latter have a tendency to open. (b) The closure of the microcracks is nearly always incomplete as far as the "fossil" microcracks are con cerned (non-superimposable lips, residual material between lips). The morphological characteristics of the microcracks playa very important part in their closure. This phenomenon alone explains why the non-linearity is due to the microcracks and not to the pores. (c) In the same way as we have defined J{E, one can define a drained Young's modulus EB and drained Poisson ratio VE such that
(6.41)
122
6.8
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
CONCLUSION. CONCEPT OF POROSITY CHAPTER
The preceding paragraphs clearly show that a porous medium can only be envisaged as an equivalent material whose macroscopic behaviour is finally identical to that of the actual material. With this average material wiU be associated equivalent characteristic parameters which will only be representative of a sufficient quantity of material. Thus, independently of their shape, the vacuums will be characterized by an average parameter: "porosity" 0 which is by definition the volume ratio between the vacuum and the total volume, that is
7
Thern satura
(6.42) This concept, in the same way as EB, l/B and f{B, is a global parameter (in other words associated with a macroscopic quantity of material) and not a localquantity.
BIBLIOGRAPHY BRACE, W.F., WALSH, J.B. and FRANGOS, W.T., under high pressure, JGR, Vol. 73. BRACE, W.F., 1965, Some new mesurements Vol. 70, No 2.
1968, Permeabi/ity
of linear compressibi/ity
of granite
of rocks, JGR,
CHARLEZ, P., SEGAL, A., PERRIER, F. and DESPAX, D., 1991, Microstatistica/ behaviour of brittle rocks, submitted to lnt. Jour. Rock Mech. and Mining Sciences. GHIASSI, H., 1985, Détermination de l'état de contrainte microfissuration des roches. Thesis EC Paris.
in situ par analyse de la
JAEGER, J.C., 1966, Brittle fracture of rocks, in "Failure and breakage VIlIth Symposium on rock mechanics, City Press, Baltimore. MAVKO, M., and NUR, A., 1978, The Effect of non-elliptical ibility of rocks, Jour. Geoph. Research, Vol. 83.
of rocks",
cracks on the compress-
MORLIER, P., 1971, Description de l'état de fissuration d'une roche non destructifs simples, Rock mechanics, Vol. 3, pp, 125-128.
a
partir d'essais
SEGAL, A., 1989, Elaboration d'un modele microstaiistique linéaire de la rupture fragile et application a la stabilité des forages profonds. Thesis EC Paris. WALSH, J .B., 1965, The effect of cracks on Poisson's ratio -' (The effect of cracks on ihe uniazial elastic compression of rocks); - (The effect of cracks on the compressibility of rocks}, JGR, Vol. 70.
"
Porous media taining vacuums ~ beyond a certain could then be Ial associated a globs The chapters de-v pothesis: either o implicitly that th4 the presence of Yo continuous media tally filled by 0114 "interstitial presss If the connect saturated, each al certain conditions rated. Its behavi deals only with p4 Historically sp was supplemented (1975), who for th Mac Tigue (1985) equations the infll Lastly, quite 11 thermomechanics His achievemei and opens the wa¡
CHAPTER
7
Thermodynamics of saturated porous media
.!
(6.42)
..•
rupture
Porous media were envisaged in the previous chapteras continuous media containing vacuums of different forms (pores or microcracks). It was also observed that beyond a certain loading value, the microcracks completely close and the material could then be ranked with an equivalent continuous medium with which could be associated a global parameter characterizing the proportion of vacuums: porosity 0. The chapters devoted to porous media will be made in the scope of the following hypothesis: either one considers that the medium is not microcracked, or one assumes implicitly that the loading is sufficient for all the microcracks to be closed. However, the presence of vacuums is not the only dominant characteristic that differentiates continuous media and porous media. The connected porosity is always partly or totally filled by one or several fluids under pressure p, known as "pore pressure" or "interstitial pressure" . If the connected porosity is entirely filled with fluid, the medium is said to be saturated, each of the fluids participating in the saturation. On the contrary under certain conditions (particularly at low depth) the medium is only imperfectly saturated. Its behaviour becomes then very difficult to model. The following chapters deals only with porous media saturated by a single fluido Historically speaking, Biot was the first to deal with solid fluid coupling. His work was supplemented in the seventies first by Geertsma (1969), then by Rice and Cleary (1975), who for the first time provided a comprehensive formulation of poroelasticity. Mac Tigue (1985) completed the work of Rice and Cleary by adding to the poroelastic equations the influence of temperature. Lastly, quite recently Coussy (1989 a) (1989 b) developed a general theory of the thermomechanics of porous media by writing the major conservative laws. . His achievement makes it possible to go beyond the stage of thermoporoelasticity and opens the way to thermoporoplasticity.
124
7.1
Part II. Mechanism ol material strain
BASIC HYPOTHESIS OF THERMOPOROMECHANICS
7.3
The relevancy of the description of a porous medium is based on the following hypotheses. First of all (and this is the main difference between continuous and porous media) a porous medium is thermodynamically open: it exchanges Huid with the exterior. Secondly, although the medium is profoundly biphasic there will not be any differentiation between Huid and skeleton: the macroscopic description of phenomena will be considered as continuous. At least, the kinematic quantities associated with the medium (displacements, velocities, strains) are described with respect to the skeleton.
7.2
Chapter
•
Jiíodao
iífda
In the presen other hand, the I to (since the mal
where p and (2) present configura mass increment) be equal to m represents the strained configw The total ma
We saw in Chapter 1 that during a finite transformation, volume or area increments are modified and that elements in strained state (that is dV and da) could be determined from elements in the non-strained state (that is dVo and dao) provided the transformation gradient f and its determinant J (also known as Jacobian of the transformation) are known. These convective transports were expressed by the equations [Eqs (1.15) and (1.19)] JdVo
MASS'
Given a non-s Ro, and given 8)
THE IMPORTANCE OF THE LAGRANGIAN DESCRIPTION FOR WRITING CONSERVATIVE LAWS
dV
7. Thermo
(7.1)
Given W ·ñ(l normal Ti (conves is then an exit 11 Mass conserv
't
To give to (7.
with
that
f= o~ oX
x
J
= det If I
(7.2)
where is the coordinate of any point of the medium in the present configuration and X its initial position in the reference configuration (Lagrangian variable). In the case of continuous media, the conservative laws are often described neglecting the convective transports. This can be justified by the fact that the medium is thermodynamically closed. The open character of porous media necessitates writing the conservative laws in finite transformations for fear of committing serious errors particularly with regard to mass balance.
where dao is the to this surface E depends only on From (7.1) al
By inserting the expression ol
Chapter
7.3
7. Thermodynamics
oEsaturated
125
porous media
MASS CONSERVATION
Given a non-strained
volume element dVo with respect to an initial reference frame + solid) such that
Ro, and given 8Mo the total mass of this element (fluid 8Mo
= modVo
(7.3)
In the present strained state, the mass of solid remains unchanged while, on the other hand, the mass of fluid contained in the element of present volume dV is equal to (since the material is saturated) by taking account of (7.1)
= p0dV = J p0dVo
8M!
(7.4)
where p and 0 are respectively the fluid density and the medium porosity in the present configuration. In this way, the total mass increment .ó.M (equal to the fluid mass increment) between the initial configuration and the present configuration will be equal to J p0 dVo - po0o dVo mdVo .ó.M (7.5)
=
« area incre. c..d da) could _d dao) proas Jacobian i!l!!llllIeSsed by the
=
m represents therefore the mass increment between the initial configuration strained configuration divided by the initial volume. The total mass 8¡\.1 in the strained state will therefore be written 8M
= 8Mo
+.ó.M
= (m + mo)dVo
(7.6)
Given Mi· ñ da the mass of fluid flowing by time unit across the present area da of normal ñ (conventionally taken towards the exterior of the volume element). Mi· ñ da is then an exit flow. Mass conservation implies
f ~ (mo + m )dVo + t. f Mi· ñda = O i;
(7.1)
(7.7)
vt
To give to (7.7) a Lagrangian
form, let us introduce
that (7.2) c:onfiguration • le). t.:m»ed neglect• medium is .ates writing senous errors
and the
M
·ñodao
the Lagrangian
= Mi ·ñda
vector
M such (7.8)
where dao is the surface element in the non-strained state and ño the outside normal to this surface elemento In fact, M has no physical meaning, but M, unlike Mi, depends only on X and t. From (7.1) and (7.8) one can extract furthermore (7:9) By inserting (7.8) into (7.7) and by applying the expression of mass conservation
m=-V'·M
the divergence
theorem one is led to
(7.10)
126
Part Il. Mechanísm ol material straín
where m is a partial derivative with respect to time. The divergence operator is defined in (7.10) with respect to the reference configuration Ro. The usefulness of the Lagrangian description introduced by Biot (1977) in writing the conservative laws is especially apparent when one derives Eq.(7.5). The state variable which appears naturally is not p 0 (which is generally admitted) but J p 0. In the hypothesis of small deformations, the J acobian being such that J
=
€kk
Ghapter 7. Thermo
Taking accow gence theorem
where t = 1/2[v the external foro
+1
the variation in mass is therefore equal to (7.11)
7.5
FIRST
where ti is the velocity, and not
m= as is generally admitted
7.4
!
(p0)
(7.12)
when convective transfers are not taken into account.
This principk of the system au external forces ir
Given udV, t volume dV and variation in inte equal to
CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM AND MECHANICAL ENERGY BALANCE
If one neglects inertia and body forces, it is reduced to a static equilibrium (see Chapter 2). Writing directly the equations in the present configuration it will be written
the second term variables (7.20) I
(7.13) where T is the surface force applied on the present surface of the body. The boundary condition implies (7.14) where !?: is the Cauchy stress tensor also defined in the present configuration. It is not then necessary in the linear momentum balance to differentiate stresses in solid and skeleton. !?: and T are to be understood as average quantities. Substituting (7.14) in (7.13) and applying the divergence theorem, one is led to the classical equilibrium equation
The power o paragraph and o respect to the sil If Vr is the ~ surfacic force exl will be such that
(7.15) The mechanical energy balance is a consequence of linear momentum conservation. If v is the velocity of any point of the skeleton (with respect to which, we may recall, the kinematic quantities are defined), one can easily deduce from (7.15)
l
ti(\7 . !?:)dV= l
\7. io. !?:)dV- l!?::
(\7 0 v)dV = O
(7.16)
This equatioi
1For convenienc reference ís made • densíty of the medi
Chapter
7. Thermodynamics
oE saturated
127
porous medía
Taking account of (7.14), Eq. (7.16) can also be written, after applying the divergence theorem
(7.17)
w
a where ~ = 1/2[\7 <'9v + t(\7 <'9v)] is the strain velocity tensor and e the power of the external forces as if the Huid and the skeleton had the same velocity that is
w
a
e
=
v,
¡
(7.18)
v·Tda
(7.11)
7.5
FIRST PRINCIPLE OF THERMODYNAMICS1
This principle expresses the energy balance, that is the variation in internal energy of the system augmented by the rate in kinetic energy is equal to the power of the external forces increased by the heat rate:
(7.12)
(7.19) Given udV, the internal energy of the Huid and the solid contained in the present volume dV and given Um, the internal energy of the Huid per unit of mass. The variation in internal energy of the system during the increment of time dt will be equal to
r
u. = 8ta J v udV + l
A Um
a u. = 7i t
¡
uodVo
+
Vo
(7.20)
W . iida
the second term being due to the open character variables (7.20) can be expressed
(7.13)
..
j-
of the medium.
In Lagrangian
1-
(7.21)
umM . iiodao
Ao
The power of the external forces is the sum of W: expressed in the previous paragraph and of the power of the forces in the relative motion of the Huid with respect to the skeleton. If is the relative velocity of the Huid with respect to the skeleton and TF the surfacic force exerted on the Huid portion of the total area (that is 0da), this power will be such that in the present configuration
W;
v,.
(7.15)
W; =
¡
(7.22)
TF . VrOda
This equation can be written by introducing
the surfacic flowrate
W
such that
(7.23) (7.16)
lFor convenience, the state functíons (u, s, h, 1/J) are related to the unit volume except when reference is made to the Huid (specific state functíon with index m). This is the reason why the densíty of the medium does not appear in the equatíons as it was the case in Chapter 3.
128
Part II. Mechanism al material strain
and the pore pressure p such that
Chapter
7. Therm~
by temperature. 1 paragraphs, one CAl
(7.24) where the minus sign indicates a compression (ñ is towards the exterior). (7.23) and (7.24) into (7.22) one obtains
. ¡-
w; = -
Replacing
In (7.31),
p-
W . iida
(7.25)
AP
So
is
entropy of the flu written
or in Lagrangian variables taking account of (7.8)
. =w;
j
P-
Ao
-M P
·ñodao
(7.26)
Let us extract
Let us introduce finally the heat rate Q such that
Q=
- { q. ñda = - {
s.. Q.
lA
TS¡ ñodao
(7.27)
or after developme
{~
where q and Q are respectively the "Eulerian" and "Lagrangian" heat flows received (the minus sign compensates for the fact that the normal ñ points towards the exterior). The formula of convective transport of surfaces also makes it possible to express
Jq= F·
Q
(7.28)
Neglecting the kinetic energy rate k, substituting (7.21), (7.26), (7.27) in (7.19) one obtains by introducing, hm Um + p] p, the fluid mass enthalpy 2
=
(7.29) By applying the divergence theorem to the surface integral and substituting'' value of ea extracted from (7.17), one is led finally to
vv
Let us introdu thalpy gm of the :f
one is led to the
ti
the One will suppc
(7.30)
7.6
SECOND PRINCIPLE OF THERMODYNAMICS INEQUALITY OF CLAUSIUS-DUHEM
The second principle expresses that the variation in entropy of the system (again volume term plus convective term) is greater than or equal to the heat rate divided 2This hypothesis is not necessary. If k: is not nil, it appears in (7.18) and is eliminated between (7.18) and (7.19). See paragraph 3.11.2 and 3.11.3. 3Equation (7.17) can be written indifferently in Lagrangian or Eulerian configurations (expression of energy).
(7.10),
cll1 is known as
7.7
CHOICl
The inequality of the system (the
or material
Chapter
strain
7. Thermodynamics
129
of saturated porous media
by temperature. The approach being quite similar to that developed in the previous paragraphs, one can write the equation directly in Lagrangian variables that is (7.24) - r). Replacing
(7.31)
(7.25)
In (7.31), So is the volume entropy of the skeleton fluid whole and Sm the mass entropy of the fluido Locally, by applying the divergence theorem, (7.31) can be written
-
-
Tso + T'l· (smM) ~ -'l.
Q
Q + T . ('lT)
(7.32)
Let us extract -'1 . Q from (7.30) and introduce it into inequality (7.32),
(7.26)
(7.33) (7.27)
or after development
{Q': t - (uo
M}
- Tso - 1'so) - 1'so - (hm - Tsm)'l·
(7.34)
+ { - ~ srr - M . ['1 hm
-
T'l
sml } ~
O
Let us introduce into (7.34) the volumic free energy tPo and the specific free enthalpy gm of the fluid such that tPo = Uo - Tso (7.29)
(7.35)
one is led to the final expression of the inequality of Clausius Duhem (7.36) One will suppose the decoupling of the two dissipations that is, taking account of (7.10),
(7.30)
l
t - sor + gm m - ~o ~ o Q - T . ('lT) - M . ('1gm +
Q' :
Sm
<1>1 is known as inirinsic
,
7.7
dissipaiion,
(7.37)
'lT) ~
<1>2 as thermohydraulic
o
dissipation.
CHOICE OF STATE VARIABLES (intrinsic dissipation)
ted between (expression
The inequality of Clausius-Duhem which defines the thermodynamic admissibility of the system (the dissipation must always be positive) reveals three observable state
130
Part Il. Mechanism ol material strain
variables: the total strain ~, the temperature T and the mass variation of the system m (we should remember that it is only a Huid mass variation). This latter state variable characterizes simultaneously the presence of vacuums (through 0), the Huid compressibility (through p) and the medium compressibility (through tu). Taking into account dissipative phenomena such as plasticity necessitates the introduction of additional variables known as internal variables. These variables are of two types: plastic strain and hardening variables that characterize the memory of the material (see paragr. 3.12.3). For a porous medium, plastic strain results, from on the one hand, irreversible strain of the matrix ~~ (which is not an observable variable) and on the other from that of the interconnected porous space. In fact these variables are not independent. First of all, the hypothesis of small deformations induces,
Chapter 7. Therm~
that is replacing
-
(J'-~ (
7.9
<1
~
CASE O LAWS(
(7.38) where ~e and ~p are respectively the elastic and the plastic total strain. Secondly, the total plastic strain can be divided into a matrix plastic strain (on the portion 1-00 of the total volume) and a plastic porosity 0P such that (7.39) Physically, the plastic porosity represents the irreversible change of porosity after unloading. As a summary, taking account of (7.38) and (7.39), after elimination of ~e and ~~ the state variables can be chosen as ~' ~P, 0P, T, m and Vk in which Vk represents the hardening variables that characterize the possible memory of the material.
In case of reves leads to
In the same w; lastici ty. If 1/Jo is ¡ largely devoted ~
7.10
CASE
In the case of i of Clausius Duhen
7.8
CONSTITUTIVE STATE LAW AND THERMODYNAMIC POTENTIAL
In the same way as for continuous media we assume the existence of a scalar function 1/Jo (known as thermodynamíc potential) of the state variables. \Ve shall assume that this is free energy 1/Jo such that (7.40)
(7.44) defines thes
7.11
DIFFU THERJ
1/Jo being a state function one can calculate its total differential in order to eliminate
~o from the inequality of Clausius Duhem (7.37). By following the same reasoning as in [Eq. (3.57)], one is led, taking account of the strain partitioning rule, to
,i. _ {No .. e o/o - fJc_ e . f
+
{No T fJT
{No.
+ fJm m +
{No 0' fJ0P
P
(No
+ fJVík
Vi k
(7.41)
Intrinsic dissip Indeed, therrnopo pressure and temj tion results from 1
Chapter 7. Thermodynamícs
o( saturated
131
porous media
that is replacing (7.41) in the first Eq. (7.37),
(
-
(J" -
o'if;o )
o§.
--
e
:
.e
é -
+-
(J" :
.P
é -
_ o'if;o
o0P
7.9
+ ( gm -
o'if;o). m - ( So -Bm
el _ o'if;o Vi
Q'if;o) + -oT
T'
>o
OVk k -
(7.42)
.
CASE OF REVERSIBLE BEHAVIOUR LAWS OF THERMOPOROELASTICITY
(7.38) In case of reversible behaviour leads to
(tP = izl = Vk o'if;o gm=--
om
= O) (7.42) So
be comes equality which
= ---o'if;o oT
(7.43)
In the same way as for continuous media (7.43) define the laws of thermoporoelasticity. If 'if;o is a quadratic form, the behaviour becomes linear. Chapter 8 will be largely devoted to this.
(7.39)
P and é_M Vi represents material. OfE;e _
7.10
CASE OF IRREVERSIBLE BEHAVIOUR
In the case of irreversible behaviour, taking account of Eqs (7.42), the inequality of Clausius Duhem becomes
, of a scalar _ We shall
(7.40)
(7.41 )
(7.44) (7.44) defines thermoporoplasticity.
7.11
Chapter 10 will be devoted to this subject.
DIFFUSION LAWS OF THERMOPOROMECHANICS
Intrinsic dissipation describes only partially the behaviour of a porous medium. Indeed, thermoporomechanical coupling prescribes knowledge at every moment of pressure and temperature distribution in the medium. We shall see that this calculation results from two diffusion laws: Darcy's law and Fourier's law.
132
7.11.1
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
First diffusion law: hydraulic or Darcy's law
Chapter
diffusion law
Replacing the
This law expresses that the fluid velocity V through a porous medium is proportional to the interstitial pressure gradient 'Vp. The proportionality coefficient depends on the fluid (by means of its dynamic viscosity f-L) and the rock, by means of a tensor ~ characterizing the medium's percolation quality and known as permeability iensor, that is k v=_:::'.'Vp (7.45 )
M
-
M
= pil,
or after developrnei
p
k
with f{= :::.
-
-
in which 1f is known as the hydraulic diffusion
7.11.2
one obtains
.
= -l(. 'Vp
T'V
The first term o flow, the second, tI local increase in he member characteri irreversibilities or 1
(7.46)
f-L
tensor.
Second diffusion law: heat diffusion law or Fourier's law BIBLIOGRAl
This is similar to the previous one and expresses that the heat flow per unit of surface Q is proportional to the temperature gradient. The proportionality constant, which is also tensorial, characterizes the ability of the medium to diffuse heat, and is known as thermal conductibility tensor x, Fourier's law will be written
Q= 7.11.3
SI
one obtains
f-L
or by introducing the surface flow rate
7. Tbermodyi
Hydraulic
and thermal
(7.4 7)
-!S. 'VT
diffusivity laws
The drawback of the diffusion laws is that they depend on the flow rate M and the heat flow Q. Therefore diffusivity laws, (combining diffusion and conservation laws) are preferred. The hydraulic diffusivity law can be obtained by coupling Darcy's law and the mass conservation that is m=-'V·M (7.48) which Ieads after elimination of
M
to
m-
'V(pIJ. 'Vp) =
o
(7.49)
Similarly, the thermaI diffusivity law can be obtained by coupling Darcy's law and the two principles of thermodynamics [Eqs (7.30) and (7.37)]
úo
+ 'V.
(hmM)
M., 1941, ( 12. - 1972, Variation. chanics of porous 579-597. - 1977, The theor¡ 27,597-620. BIOT,
= q::
4. -
'V.
Q (7.50)
r
CHARLEZ, P., 1981 du Groupe TMP, 1
COUSSY, 0.,1989 du Groupe III du I - 1989, Thermod, J ournal of Mechan - 1989, A general March 1989. - 1988, Personal (
133
Cbapter 7. TbermodynanlÍcs of saturated porous media
Replacing the second of these equations in the first and taking into account that
'lj;o um is proporcient depends s of a tensor bility iensor,
uo - T So - soT (7.51)
m
1
(7.45)
one obtains
(7.52) or after development
(7.53) The first term of (7.53) represents the input of convective entropy due to the fluid flow, the second, the variation in entropy of the material over time and the third, the local in crease in heat due to the therrnal conductivity of the material. The right hand member characterizes the energy dissipated in heat, either mechanically in plastic irreversibilities or by the viscosity forces in the moving fluido
(7.46)
BIBLIOGRAPHY
tlow per unit of ity constant, heat, and is
BIOT,
M., 1941, General theory of ihree dimensional
consolidation,
J. Appl. Phys.,
12. - 1972, Variational Lagrangian thermodynamics of non-isothermal finite strain mechanics of porous solids and thermonuclear diffusion, Int. J. Solids Structures 13, 579-597. - 1977, The theory of finite deformations of porous solids, Indiana Univ. Math. J., 27,597-620.
(7.47)
¡ (7.48)
1
(7.49) Darcy's law and
r
(7.50)
J
CHARLEZ, P., 1989, Thermomécanique des milieux poreux saiurés, rapport de recherche du Groupe TMP, March 1989, unpublished.
COUSSY, 0.,1989, R61e du fluide interstitiel sur le comportement des roches, rapport du Groupe III du GS Mécanique des roches profondes. of saturaied porous solids in finite deformation, European - 1989, Thermodynamics Journal of Mechanics, A/Solids, Vol. 8, No 1. Transport in porous media, - 1989, A general theory of thermoporoelastoplasticity, March 1989. - 1988, Personal Communications, TOTAL CFP, unpublished.
CHAPTER
8
Infinitesimal thermoporoelasticity
In the case ofreversible (i.e. elastic) behaviour, the inequality ofClausius-Duhem becomes an equality which leads to the general equations of thermoporoelasticity! {)1/J s=--
{)T
(8.1)
To obtain a linear theory, it is sufficient to choose a quadratic form for the thermodynamic potential. The most physical approach is to find the thermodynamic potential by integrating the constitutive laws rather than to find the constitutive laws by deriving the thermodynamic potential. It is proposed first of all to determine ![, gm and s.
8.1
HOOKE'S LAW IN THERMOPOROELASTICITY CONCEPT OF ELASTIC EFFECTIVE STRESS
One can rank dry rocks with an equivalent continuous medium the mechanical behaviour of which is identical to that of the actual material. The laws of thermoporoelasticity are built on the following assumptions. First of all, one assumes that the equivalent dry material (i.e. without any fluid in the porous space) is linear, elastic and isotropic with elastic constants EB and v». Secondly one admits that the matrix (solid + unconnected porosity) is continuous isotropic and linearly elastic with elastic constants EM and VM. lln the previous chapter, index zero referred to a Lagrangian quantity. In the case of small perturbations (which is the scope of this chapter), Lagrangian and Eulerian configtirations being ident.ical, the index has been abolished.
136
Part Il, Mechanism
oi material strain
The second hypothesis as we shall see later is not necessary to build a general theory.
8.1.1
-p
•..•..
-
=
where KM EM/3{J Component 11 oí stress field r!: + [p 3D
Decomposition of the state of stress Hooke's law of a porous medium
The previous considerations enable one to determine easily the constitutive law of the equivalent material by decomposing the actual state of stress into two elementary components according to Fig. 8.1: the porous medium is subjected to a state of stress r!: and to a pore pressure P which are decomposed into a purely hydrostatic component 1 and a deviatoric component 1I. We shall mention that stresses are defined with respect to an initial state of stress r!:o different from zero (because of the hypothesis on microcracks closure). The pressure is also defined with respect to a reference value Po·
-
Chapter 8. Infinitesimal
The ~verall straÜI
in which KB = EBI Eq. (8.5) represents I
8.1.2
Biot's co
Let us write
®
~
az
@ Component
Fig. 8.1. Decomposition
with
~ +
1
o Component
of the state
After pooling Eq. ~-
a2+p
In other words, 11 as that of a continuo
II
(a) The stresses e (b) The elastic el EB, VB·
of stress
(cift er Carnet.1976).
Let us now apply Hooke's law to these two elementary states of stress [Eq. (4.30)] that is
~ v = 2G - ElJkk8'J
€'J
(8.2
)
Component 1 corresponds to the hydrostatic loading of the matrix (with pressure
p) and leads to a deformation state
€{J I
€'J
P = -3KM
8
'J
(8.3)
The stresses < O"ij coefficient. It is there the strain of a poron stress is linked to t
Chapter
137
8. Infinitesimal thermoporoelasticity
=
where KM EM /3(1 - 211M) is the bulk modulus of the matrix. Component 11 corresponds to the loading of the dry equivalent material by a stress field q;+ lP and leads to a deformation state c{f II
c~J
titutive law of two elementary a state of stress ic component . are defined with the hypothesis a reference value
.r
1+ IIB
= ---¡¡;;;-((f~J + p8~J)-
IIB
EB ((fa
+ 3p)8~J
(8.4)
The ~verall strain is obtained by adding (8.3) and (8.4) which leads to
(8.5)
=
in which KB EB/3(1 - 211B) is the bulk modulus of the equivalent dry material. Eq. (8.5) represents Hooke's law of poroelastic materials.
8.1.2
Biot's coefficient and elastic effective stress
Let us write with a
= 1- KB
KM
(8.6)
< (fa >= (fa + 3ap After pooling Eq. (8.5) becomes
(8.7) In other words, Hooke's law of a poroelastic medium is written in the same way as that of a continuous material provided one replaces: (a) The stresses (f'J by < (fij >. (b) The elastic characteristics by those of the equivalent continuous dry material
EB,
(8.2)
(8.3)
ve-
The stresses < (fij > (8.6) are known as effective stresses and a is known as Biot's coefficient. It is therefore the effective stresses and not the total stresses that govern the strain of a porous elastic material. We may note that this concept of effective stress is linked to the constitutive law. It is not a static concepto
138
Part II. Mechanism oEmaterial strain
Chapter 8. Infinit.
(8.11) and (1
8.2
VOLUME VARIATIONS ACCOMPANYING THE DEFORMATION OF A SATURATED POROUS MEDIUM Since dO'
8.2.1
Bulk volume variations
The bulk volume variations (matrix + pores) can easily be calculated from Hooke's law (8.5). Indeed, the volume strain f.u is such that f.u
=
6.VB VB
1 (Uu KB 3
=
+P
) -
P KM
Variation in pore volume
It is exclusively the variations in normal components that generate porous volume variations. Let us decompose the normal total stress into a hydrostatic part and a deviatoric part such that with /7
=
By eliminati
(8.8)
in which VB is the bulk volume.
8.2.2
=-
Uu
3
(8.9)
The final ex¡ jected to an ine pressure, is obu the two transfor in which the me remains constan pore pressure v¡ volume de crease increase in the Il dO' referring reciprocity theoi
Let us analyze separately the variations in pore volume due: (a) To the variations in mean stresses and interstitial pressure on the one hand. (b) To the variations in deviatoric stresses on the other.
By replacing
Let us assume that Vp (pore volume) and VB (bulk volume) are state functions of p and /7. One can therefore calculate their total differentials. The relative variations in pore volume will therefore be such that or taking accour dVp Vp
= _1
Vp
(OVp) 8U
p
dO'+ ~ (OVp) Vp op
dp
To eliminate/ (oVpfop)q from (8.10), let us consider the stress path -dp Equations (8.3) and (8.8) lead to dp --dVB = --= VB KM Since dVp
= dVB -
1 f.k/c
= --dVM VM
dO'
(8.10)
77
= -dp
= dO'. (8.11)
The same res pression
dVM taking account of (8.11) one obtains dVp
dp = --(VB KM
- VM)
dp = --,,-Vp AM
2The theory being linear, the partial derivatives are independent
The final exJ
(8.12) of the loading path.
Formula (8.1:
•• material strain
Cbapter 8. Innnitesimal tbermoporoelasticity
139
(8.11) and (8.12) lead to the identity
dVp Vp
dVM -VM
dVB -VB
dp KM
M=-dp
(8.13)
Since M = -dp, Eq. (8.10) will be written by taking account of (8.13)
By eliminating
{}(¡
p -
Vp
ap
(8.14)
7i
(aVp/ap)u between (8.10) and (8.14), one is led to dVp Vp
(8.9)
1 (avp)
1 (avp)
1
KM = Vp
~ (avp) {}(¡ Vp
= __ l_dp+ KM
(M+ dp) p
(8.15)
The final expression of the relative variation in pore volume for a material subjected to an increment M of mean total stress and to a variation dp of interstitial pressure, is obtained by applying Betty's reciprocity theorem (see paragr. 4.10) to the two transformations represented in Fig.8.2: on the one hand the transformation in which the mean total stress varies between 7f and 7f + M whereas the pore pressure remains constant and, on the other, that in which 7f remains constant whereas the pore pressure varies from p to p + dp. In the first case, the increment M induces a volume decrease (M negative when increasing compression) while dp induces a volume increase in the second case. M referring to the external surface (Fig.8.2) and dp to the pore surface, Betty's reciprocity theorem will be written
dVp,
X
dp + dVB
1
X
O = dVP2 X 0+ dVB
2
X
M
By replacing the differentials by their values (Fig. 8.2), one obtains
p (av{}(¡)
functions of ive variations
p
=
(aVB)
o»
(8.16)
u
or taking account of (8.8) (8.10) JIIdh
-dp
= M.
(avp) {}(¡
p
= VB
(
1 1)
(8.17)
KB - KM
The final expression of the relative variation will therefore be written (8.18)
(8.11) The same reasoning with the deviatoric components pression (8.12) path.
dVp Vp
=
1 ( 1 1)
0
KB
-
KM
of Eq, (8.9) leads to the ex-
(dUiAJ - M)
Formula (8.18) remains valid in the general case.
=O
(8.19)
140
Part Il, Mechanism
ol material strain
Chapter 8. Inñni
8.3
av
dV: =( --p) Pl
au
MAS! ACC( OFA
dCT p
The pore
VI
in which p is ti
-p
@
I
T
that is, after l.iJ
The differen (assumed to be
dV:B?=(
~
-aaVBP )-u dp which can also
Fig. 8.2. Applicatian af the variatian
8.2.3
of Betty's thearem
af the paraus
Dividing (8. after linearizati
far calculatian
:=(
valume.
in which m = 1 of per unit of t. 7Y and p, ar. pore pressure p
Relative porosity variation
By differentiating
I
porosity 0= Vp / VB one obtains
r i
8.4 d0 _ dVp._ dVB Vp VB
o -
(8.20)
UNDJ SKElV AND
that is by replacing (8.18) and (8.8) in (8.20) d0
o
(8.21 )
The name " do not induce t
· _material
strain
Chapter 8. InfinitesimaI thermoporoelasticity
8.3 iJvp
_ dO'
--)
iJO'
141
MASS VARIATIONS ACCOMPANYING THE DEFORMATION OF A SATURATED POROUS MEDIUM
P
1
it contains a mass of fluid M equal to
The pore volume being saturated,
M
= pVp
(8.22)
in which pis the fluid density. The differentiation of this expression leads to dM
= pdVp + Vpdp
(8.23)
1
that is, after linearization,
1
The difference in density can be expressed as a function of the fluid compressibility (assumed to be constant in the range of pressures used). Indeed [see Eq. (3.31)].
~M
= Po~Vp + (p -
_1 __ K¡ -
Po)Vp
(8.24)
.L (OVp) Vp
op
T
which can also be written after linearization
te¡ = ~
(8.25)
p- Po
Dividing (8.24) by PoVp and taking into account of (8.18) and (8.25), one obtains after linearization (8.26) in which m = ~M/VB is identical to that defined in Chapter 7 (variation fluid mass of per unit of total initial volume). (j' and p, are defined with respect to a reference state of stress [o and a reference pore pressure Po.
J (8.20)
I
(8.21 )
1
8.4
UNDRAINED BEHAVIOUR SKEMPTON'S COEFFICIENT AND UNDRAINED ELASTIC CONSTANTS
The name "undrained test" is given to a test during which the loading variations do not induce fluid mass variations. By taking m O, Eq. (8.26) becomes
=
p =-B(¡
(8.27)
Part Ir. Mechanism ol material strain
142
Chapter 8. Infiai
Identifying
in which 1
B =
1
J(B ¡{M o [¡~j - ¡}M] + [¡;B - ¡}M] -----
(8.28)
is known as "Skempton's coefficient" . Equation (8.27) shows that under undrained conditions, pressure in creases linearly with mean stress with a slope equal to the Skempton's coefficient (Fig.8.3). Taking account of (8.28) and (8.6), (8.26) is written in the general case
J(Bm = _0"+-
--
expo
p
which leads fin
(8.29)
B
p
which can also
Hooke's la1 elastic constan
B
~
~ •• ~a
or taking aCCO Fig. 8.3. Skempton's
Under undrained of (8.27)
coefficient
(undrained
conditíons).
conditions, Hooke's Eq. (8.5) is then written, by taking account
(8.30) or , by introducing
where
r¡ is a constant
Biot's coefficient ex one is led to (8.31 )
One defines then the undrained elastic constants
Vu
and E¿ such that
that is taking , (8.32)
Chapter 8. Infinitesimal
Identifying
thermoporoelasticity
143
(8.31) and (8.32), one obtains 1 + V« Eu
1 + VB EB
_
------===>
(8.28)
3VB -3v" = __ E"
G _ G
,,-
B
(8.33)
(1- 2vB)aB + 00....-_-=-'--_
EB
EB
which leads finally to the expressions Vu
+ (1 - 2VB )aB = 3VB 3 - (1 - 2vB)aB
(8.29) E¿
=
(8.34)
3EB 3 - (1 - 2vB)aB
K¿
=
(8.35)
/{B
(8.36)
1-aB which can also be written
taking account of the first of the Eqs (8.33) (8.37)
.
Hooke's law can be written in its general form as a function of the undrained elastic constants K¿ and E". By solving with respect to the stresses, (8.5) becomes
l
(8.38) or taking account of (8.36)
(8.39) where (8.40) (8.30)
r¡ is a constant
and depends on
/{u,
B and a. Indeed by combining (8.29) and (8.41)
(8.31 )
one is led to
--/{Bm = poa
rr
1\B€kk
+
(1-
aB) B
P
(8.42)
that is taking account of (8.36) (8.32)
(8.43)
144
Part II. Mechanism
of material stl'ain
Chapter 8. ImiII
(8.44)
The consti constants by i then written
By eliminating p between (8.40) and (8.43) one obtains r¡=--
BKu O'
Taking account of (8.44), Eq. (8.40) is finally rewritten p
= r¡ ( -O'éa + :)
(8.45)
Equation (8.45) enables one to interpret physically constant r¡: T}/ Po evaluates the excess of pressure that needs to be exerted with respect to a reference configuration to in crease the fluid content by a unit of mass per unit of total volume for an isochoric (éa O) and isothermal stress path since thermal phenomena have not been taken into account.
=
8.5
The last te
(p = Po), non-
taking accoun from an incres
THERMAL EFFECTS
In the gen
The constitutive Eqs (8.38), (8.39) and (8.45) established in the preceding paragraph consider implicitly that the temperature of the medium remains constant during the transformation. The main temperature effect on a medium (solid, liquid or gas) is to cause an in crease (or a diminution) in volume: this is the phenomenon of thermal expansion. The increase in incremental volume resulting from an increment in temperature dT is such that dV - = O'fdT (8.46)
8.6
ENT ATl
Vo
where O' J is the thermal expansion coefficient of the material. If one wishes to maintain the volume of material constant during transformation, one has thus to apply to this latter a compressive mean stress such that
(8.4 7) Let us now consider the case of a saturated porous medium and let us carry out an isochoric (ea O), undrained (m O) test with temperature variations. This causes the appearance of a thermal stress of the type (8.47) with K¿ (undrained bulk modulus) and O'u (volumic thermal expansion coefficient of the medium under undrained conditions) as parameters. In the general case, after linearization of Eq. (8.47) the constitutive equation will be therefore''
=
=
(Ku - 2~u ) éa5¡]
+ 2Gue.]
Entropy .cí obvious reaso and T rather After differen1
d
or dividing b3 d
(8.48) (ni (:)
To compm
S and the fre
Y
5,] - O'uJ(u(T - To)5,]
3We write now the equations taking into account the initial state.
Each part tests.
_ material strain
(8.44)
Chapter
8. InfinÍtesÍmal
145
thermoporoelastÍcity
The constitutive equation can also be expressed as a function of the drained elastic constants by introducing the drained thermal expansion coefficient «e- Eq. (8.38) is then written 2GB) ( J(B - -3-
+ 2GBC
1)
(8.49)
a(p - Po)8,) - O:BJ(B(T - To)8'J
(8.45) ", evaluates the configuration b an isochoric aot been taken
Ckk81)
The last term of (8.49) is therefore, characteristic of an isochoric (ckA: = O), drained (p = po), non-isothermal (T#To) transformation. By comparing (8.48) and (8.49) and Gu, one obtains the pressure variation resulting taking account of the fact that G B from an in crease in temperature in an isochoric undrained transformation, that is
=
p-
aBJ(B (T
_ auJ(u -
Po -
a
'T')
(8.50)
-.Lo
In the general case, Eq. (8.45) will be written
p - Po
8.6
= r¡ [m] -aCkk
+-
Po
+
«;«; - aBJ(B (T - To) o:
(8.51 )
ENTROPY VARIATION ACCOMPANYING A TRANSFORMATION
(8.46) To compute the thermodynamic
(8.47) carry out an _ This causes bulk mod_der undrained _ Eq. (8.47) the lIS
potential
1/J, one has to write the global entropy
S and the free enthalpy of the Huid gm. Entropy S being a state function, one can calculate its total differential. For obvious reasons, we will choose as state variables VE (bulk volume), M (total mass) and T rather than Ckk, m and T, the first two already being incremental After differentiation, one obtains
dS = ( oS ) aVB
dVB
+
M ,T
(OS) aT
vB,M
ar ; (
OS) aM
vB,T
quantities.
dM
(8.52)
or dividing by VB OS) ( aVB
(8.48) Each partial tests.
m,T
Ckk
+
1 VB dT
(OS) aT Ekk,m
+
(
os )
aM
m
.
(8.53)
Ekk,T
derivative can be expressed explicitly by assuming three different
146
8.6.1
Part II. Mechanism oE material strain
(m = O) isothermal
Undrained
(T
= To)
test
where s~ is ti one increases fluid, one has that is
In this case one has
(a~~k) 3
m,T
(::r)
(8.54) m,T
Now, it has been shown in [Eqs (3.31) and (3.37)] that
(a~:') 3
(avaT ) B
m,T
zs»: m,
where L is the therefore the _ the temperail latter transfos
= ll'uVB
3
The total, (8.55)
aO';k)
(
Chapter 8. lD&
aVB m,T
that is
Replacing (8.55) in (8.54), one obtains
(8.56)
8.6.2
Undrained
(m
= O) isochoric
Replacing of reference ".
(ckk = O) test
or, after lineal In this case, one has to introduce isochoric specific heat in paragraph 3.9.1 for Cv. The incremental increase in temperature dT (at m and supply of heat dQ to the system
C€kk
in the same way as
€kk constant)
induces a
(8.57) where Mo and To are the initial mass (invariable since the test is undrained) reference temperature. The second partial derivative is such that
and the
8.7
VAR
DUR
The free el (8.58)
By differes
8.6.3
Isochoric
(ckk = O) isothermal
(T = To) test
By introducing an additional mass offluid into the porous medium, one introduces an additional quantity of entropy such that (8.59)
where Vi is ti! medium is sat
ot material strain
Chapter 8. Infinitesimal thermoporoelasticity
147
where s~ is the specific entropy of the Huid at temperature To. But by injecting Huid, one in creases its pressure. Since compression tends to in crease the temperature of the Huid, one has to extract heat from the system to maintain its temperature constant that is dQ= -LdM (8.60) (8.54)
where Lis the latent heat per unit ofmass of fluid supplied. The latent heat represents therefore the quantity of heat to be removed per unit of mass of Huid for maintaining the temperature constant in an isochoric, isothermal test. There results from this latter transformation a decrease of entropy
dS2
=-
dQ To
= -~dM
(8.61)
To
The total entropy variation during the test is therefore (8.55)
dS
L
= dS + dS = s~dM 1
- -dM To
2
(8.62)
that is
(:!) (8.56)
€kk,T
= s~
- ~
(8.63)
Replacing (8.56), (8.58) and (8.63) in (8.53), and introducing of reference volume VB, one obtains finally
entropy s per unit
(8.64) or, after linearization, (8.65)
(8.57)
8.7
VARIATION IN FLUID FREE ENTHALPY DURING A TRANSFORMATION
ed) and the The free enthalpy of the Huid is such that (8.58) By differentiating
(8.59)
- TS,
(8.66)
(8.66) one is led to (see Chapter 3) dG,
one introduces
= H,
G,
= V,dp -
S,dT
(8.67)
where V¡ is the Huid volume contained in the porous medium (equal to Vp since the medium is saturated)
(OG,) op
= T
V '
(OG,) oT
= p
-S,
(8.68)
148
Part Il. Mechanism al material strain
V¡ and S¡ being state functions,
one can calculate (av¡) ap
dV¡
dS¡
+
dp T
(as¡) ap
+
dp T
their total differentials
(av¡) aT
dT p
gm
(as¡) aT
- 1 [l+a¡(T-To)--.,~
P
o
dT p
p - po] A¡
T-To
+ Cp--
Sm
where a¡ and K¡ are respectively
(8.70)
a¡
the thermal
Po
expansion
coefficient
static bulk modulus of the fluid, and Cp its specific heat at constant Replacing
(8.70) in (8.68) and after integration, _
gm -
o
(
9m
-
o T - To)sm
a¡ +-(T Po
8.8
p + --
- To)(p - Po) -
THERMODYNAMIC
and the hydropressure.
one obtains
Po
Po
-
Cp
2T,
o
(p - PO)2
(8.71)
one obtains afl
., 2poA.¡
POTENTIAL
tensor AV. such that
(b) The porous tensor (c) The thermaI tensor The constitutive
= (Kv. -
17
2A22 =-
+ G•.•(b'kbJl + b,ebJk)
E = a1J[.
-6 = a•.•Kv.1.
equations
-
2~ •.•) b'Jbkl
one obtains aft
The last co Now in a Ji¡
'" A~kl
The coeffici and by identifj
(T - To)2
The constitutive Eqs (8.48), (8.51), (8.65) and (8.71) define the thermomechanical behaviour of a poroelastic material. These equations can be written in a matricial form by introducing: (a) The elastic undrained
Contrary ti in T - To and is a quadratic while the term In these ea
-(p - Po)
-
To
= 9~-
(8.69)
which can also be written by taking account ofEqs (3.31) and (3.41), after linearization and division by mass (the index m indicates specific quantities) 1
Chapter 8. InfinI
= - + A'"'" 0 17
p = Po - R: €
-
or, taking acco
can be written,
~
:
e - (m) -
m
R -
+ 1J+ Po
Po
_
o
9m -gm
A (T - To) -
a •.•K •.•- aBKB (T - To) a
(8.72) Deriving (8 (8.73)
Chapter 8. Innnitesimal
149
thermoporoelasticity
mo(T - To) O To +Smm-
S=SO+{l.:f+GEkk gm
O
= gm -
O
(T - TO)sm
P-PO
+ --
(8.69)
PO
-
Gp
(T-To)2 2
Lm To
a¡
+ -(T
T.
- To)(p - PO)
Po
O
(8.74)
(8.75)
(p - PO)2 2pOK¡ linearization
Contrary to (8.72), (8.73) and (8.74), (8.75) is not linear but of the second order in T - To and P - Po. In a linear theory (i.e. for which the thermodynamic potential is a quadratic form), only the three first terms of (8.75) are taken into consideration while the terms of the second order are neglected. In these conditions, the thermodynamic potential can be written
(8.70) '1/;
A2(T
=
+ f : 411 : f + A22(T - TO)2 + A33m2 +;:h : f +
'1/;0
- To)
+ A3m +;:h2 : f (T - To) +;:h3 : f m + A23(T - To)m
(8.76)
The coefficients can be estimated by taking account ofthe partial derivatives (8-1) and by identifying subsequently with (8.72,8.73,8.74,8.75). Thus by calculating 0'1/; u=-
-
of
(8.71) one obtains
after identification
with (8.72) dt3
= -~
R
(8.77)
0'1/;
s=-one obtains
after identification
with (8.74)
mo
= -G
2An
oT
Ekk-
(8.78)
To
The last coefficients can be calculated Now in a linear theory gm is written O gm = gm - (T -
using the second partial
rro) .1. o
o
Sm
deri vati ve (8 - 1).
P+ --
Po Po
(8.79)
or, taking account of (8.73), gm
= gmo -
1J
: f Po
+
TI
2" m
Po
+ (T - To)
[ -Smo
a" te; - o s + -----poa
KB]
(8.80)
(8.72) Deriving
(8.76) with respect
to m, one obtains
0'1/;
(8.73)
gm = om = 2A33m
+ A3 + dt3
: f
+ A23
(T - To)
(8.81 )
150
Part
Ir.
Mechanism
ol material strain
Chapter 8. InñDi&
which leads after identification with (8.80) to
= -2r¡Po
O
A3
= gm
The expression of _ V; - V;o +[0: §, -
V;
+
A
2
A33
O
23
= -Sm +
Q'u
Ku - Q'B KB poQ'
(8.82) Substituting one finally obta
is therefore such that e :
mO
~u : é
so(T - To) + g!m o
-Smm
2
- C~kk 2To (T - To)
2
(
(,6 : §,)(T Lm
T - To)-+ -(T To
r¡
+ 2P6m
- To) -
2
3 : §,
(8.83)
(:)
8.10
- To)
Finally, identification of A23 in (8.78) and (8.82) leads to a relation between latent heat and thermal expansion coefficients L= To [Q'uKu -Q'BKB] Q' Po
8.9
(8.84)
RELATION BETWEEN THERMAL EXPANSION COEFFICIENTS
I~Vfl
= ~VÍ
= sv¡ -
(8.86)
~VB
I~Vfl = VfCtf(T - To) - VBCtB(T
Extracting I time, one obtaa
(8.85)
- ~Vp
+ ~VM - To) + VMCtM(T
Up to now Fourrier's law ti into the constin law is written ~
Mass conser
During a temperature variation, in drained conditions and at constant mean stress, fluid is expelled from the porous medium to maintain a constant pressure. In fact, the volume of fluid really expelled during the process is such that I~Vfl
EQU
Replacing (1
(8.87)
- To)
where Ctf and CtM are respectively the fluid and matrix expansion coefficients. IntroVf), one ducing the porosity and taking account that the medium is saturated (Vp is led to
=
I~Vfl
= [0oCtf
- CtB + (1- 00)Q'M]VB(T - To)
(8.88)
8.11
PAR:
(8.89)
Let us consa and (8.96) are 1
or again dividing the two members by VB m
- = -[00Ctf - CtB + (1- 00)CtM](T - To) Po
the minus sign indicating that the fluid is expelled from the porous space. On the other hand, in drained conditions (that is at constant pore pressure) and at constant mean stress, Eqs (8.49) and (8.51) are written
(8.90)
Gl material strain
Chapter 8. Infinitesimal
151
thermoporoelasticity
(8.91)
(8.82) Substituting (8.89) and (8.90) in (8.91) and taking account one finally obtains
of (8.36) and (8.44),
(8.92) (8.83)
8.10 between latent
(8.84)
EQUATION
OF HYDRAULIC
DIFFUSIVITY
Up to now we have not used the diffusion equations (Darcy's law for flow and Fourrier's law for heat) defined in the previous chapter. They have to be introduced into the constitutive laws in order to complete the formalismo As regards flow, Darcy's law is written [Chapter 7, Eq. (7.46)] (l{ is supposed to be a scalar)
!Vi
-
= -l{V'p
with l{
Po Mass conservation
= -/-tk
(8.93)
implies [Eq. (7.10)]
m=-V'·!Vi
(8.85) (8.86)
(8.94)
Extracting m from (8.73), taking account of (8.84) and deriving time, one obtains . Po {)p PoB ()€ P5L {)T m =- - + : - - 1]
Replacing
(8.87)
{)t
{)t
1]
1]To
with respect
{)t
to
(8.95)
(8.95) in (8.94) and taking into account of (8.93), one is led to
!{)p + a O.::kk_
Lpo {)T
1] {)t
T01]
PARTICULAR
{)t
(8.88)
8.11
(8.89)
Let us consider first an isothermal and (8.96) are written
= ~V'2p
{)t
/-t
(8.96)
CASES test at constant
mean stress.
In that case, (8.8)
(8.97)
(8.90)
(8.98)
oi materíal straín
Chapter 8. Infiair¡¡
By replacing (8.97) in (8.98) and by taking account of (8.36) and (8.44) one is led
Taking a.caJI
Part II. Mechanísm
152
to ~
= ~J1\12p
8p
Bl\.B 8t
(8.99)
or taking account of (8.28)
mass conservati 8p
(8.100)
8t
Eq. (8.95) and] 1
e¡
where
K¡
~[_l __1] __1 00
KB
KM
(8.101)
KM
are respectively the fluid and the pore volume compressibilities [see Eq. (8.18)] at constant mean stress. (8.100) is the classic equation used in reservoir engineering. Another interesting case is that of a rock with an incompressible matrix (KM -+ 00, O:M -+ O). For such a material, the thermoporoelastic coefficients become [see Eqs (8.6), (8.28), (8.36), (8.44), (8.84) and (8.92)]
=
Kf
K¡
(8.103)
+ 00KB K¡
00
To = -af1\¡
In Eq. (8.11 fluid flow is of theory. Taking
PoL
(8.104)
7]=-
L
since in a lineal
(8.102)
a=l
B
(8.108) can :
T.7
(8.105)
11
(8.113) is ti
Po
By replacing (8.102), (8.103), (8.104) and (8.105) in (8.96), the hydraulic diffusivity equation becomes _1_ 8p J{¡
8t
+ ~
fJckk
_ O:¡ 8T
00 8t
at
= .s: \12p 00J1
(8.106)
8.13
RES~
BOU
ANI:
which only depends on the fluid properties (that is J{¡ and a¡) and the porosity.
A general tl
8.12
EQUATION
OF THERMAL
DIFFUSIVITY
This derives directly from Eq, (7.53), assuming on the one hand 1>1 = O (no mechanical dissipation in an elastic material) and ignoring, on the other, the viscous dissipation in the fluido In this case, around the reference temperature To, one obtains (8.107)
(a) The tot (b) The su (c) The dis (d) The int (e) The teJ In the sam equations and form: the Belti
Chapter 8. Innnitesimal
153
thermoporoelasticity
Taking account respectively of Eq. (8.74)
as
(8.99)
0<;'
mo
aT
Lm
o.
at =-6 : 8i+CCkkTo 7it+smm-
(8.108)
To
mass conservation (8.109)
(8.100) Eq. (8.95) and Fourier's law
Q=
-/\,VT
(8.108) can be written (replacing matrices
(8.101)
r
(a,J'uTo
- LpQa)
(8.110)
-6
and
E
by their values)
aekk ( P6L2) er Tt + CCkkmO + r¡To 7it (8.111) _poL ap r¡
at
+ T.oMVs m
= /\,V2T
since in a linearized theory [Eqs (8.68) and (8.71)]
agm
Sm
= - aT =
o
(8.112)
sm
(8.102) In Eq. (8.111), the convective term ToMVsm representing the heat supply due to fluid fiow is of the second order and consequently can be neglected in a linearized theory. Taking account of (8.84), one obtains
(8.103)
PoL ap - ry at
(8.104)
+
( CEkkmO
+
P6L2) r¡To
er
.r
aekk
7it + aBJ'BT0Tt
=
2 /\'V
(8.113) is the linearized diffusivity equation of thermoporoelastic
(8.105)
(8.113)
T materials.
IIItkallllic diffusi-
8.13 (8.106)
RESOLUTION OF A THERMOPOROELASTIC BOUNDARY PROBLEM. BELTRAMI-MITCHELL AND CONSOLIDATION EQUATIONS
L
A general thermoporoelastic (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
(8.107)
The The The The The
problem contents 17 unknowns that is:
total state of stress that is six unknowns. state of strain that is six unknowns. displacement field that is three unknowns. interstitial pressure. temperature.
In the same way as for elastic media, the Hooke's equations, the compatibility equations and the equilibrium equations can be expressed together into a differential form: the Beltrami-Mitchell equations.
Chapter 8. InlUútc
Part Il. Mechanism ol material strain
154
For this purpose, let us express the Hooke's equations in drained conditions with respect to the deformations. Taking account of Eq. (8.37) this is written [see Eq. (8.5)]
=
2GBt:'J
(O"J - O'?J) - -1 /lB + /lB (O'kk - O'Zk) Ó'J
3(/1" - /lB) + B(1 + /1,,)(1 + /lB) (p - PO)Ó'J
+ fJ2t:zz
Writing (3
=
= 2 {Pt:yz
oy2
Two further After summing
4
(T - To)ó'J
Consider now one of the compatibility equations, for instance [see Eq. (1.82)] {Pt:yy oz2
j
(8.114)
O:BEB
+ 3(1 + ve)
or by replacing
(8.115)
oyÓ Z
3(/1" - /lB) B(l + /1,,)(1 + /lB)
which is the Bell the hydraulic di the consolidatia
(8.116)
(8.114) in (8.115)
one obtains after substituting 020'yy
v»
020'kk
-----¡¡;2 - 1 + /lB -----¡¡;2 +
(302p OZ2
+
"Y
o2T Oz2
Taking into substituting in ~
(8.117)
where The equilibrium equations on the other hand are Adding Eqs 00' xx
00' xy
00' x z
00' yx
00' yy
00' yz
O
---¡¡;-+Ty+Tz
OO'zy
(8.118)
O
---¡¡;-+Ty+Tz OO'zx
e
2Jj
OO'zz
---¡¡;-+Ty+Tz
=
+-
O
Let us derive these equations respectively with respect to x, y and z. After summation of the two last and subtraction of the first, one is led to 02 2~=-~-~+ oyoz
that is, after substitution
1 ---
1 + v»
02
02 oy2
02
O'xx ox2
oz2
(8.119)
••
where CT is cal] Writing
allows one to ea
of (8.119) in (8.117) [020'kk 020'kk] ---+-oy2 oz2
+r
['V2T
"2-
v
O'
_ 02T] ox2
x
x+ (3
=O
["2 v
p
p--022 ]
ox
Equation (8.
(8.120)
of material strain
-
155
Chapter 8. Innnitesimal thermoporoelasticity
conditions with [see Eq. (8.5)]
f3 and
or by replacing
'V
2 [U
xx(1
+
i by their values
VB) - ukkl
(8.114)
_ aBEB 3
[PUkk
3(vu B(l
+ ---¡¡;;2 ('V2T
-
+
VB) V ) u
(2'V p -
[Pp) OX2
(8.121 )
=O
_ 02T)
Ox2
Two further expressions (with respect to y and z) can be derived in the same way. After summing of the three equations, one finally obtains 2 [
(8.115)
'V
Ukk + B(l
6(vu - VB) + v•.)(l _ VB/
2aBEB] VB) T
+ 3(1 _
=O
(8.122)
which is the Beltrami Mitchell equation of a thermoporoelastic medium. By combining the hydraulic diffusivity equation with the Beltrami Mitchell equation, one obtains the consolidation equation. Consider the diffusivity equation
(8.116)
2-
om at
Po
= K'V2p
(8.'i23)
Taking into account (8.37) and (8.48), deriving (8.51) with respect to time and substituting in (8.123), one obtains
(8.117)
2KGBB(1+vB)(1+vu)'V2 3(V,,-VB) \
where
1
C
P-
-!.- [ ot
(]H+
~P
~T]
B +
C
KB
= Ba
(8.124)
(8.125)
(aB - au)
Adding Eqs (8.122) and (8.124), one obtains 2 [
CT'V
(8.118)
6(vu
2KGBB(1 + vB)(l + 3CT(Vu-VB)
-.dz.
After sum-
~ (8.119)
VB)
vu)
] _
2aBEB 3(1-vB)T
+
!.- [
l
(8.126) lT]
P-atUkk+BP+C
where CT is called "isothermal consolidation coefficient" . Writing 6(vu - VB) 2KGBB(1 + vB)(l + vu) + B(l + vu)(l - VB) 3CT(Vu - VB)
3
=-B
(8.127)
allows one to compute CT, that is CT
.,]
-
0'1:.1:+B(l+vu)(l-vB)P+
=
2KGBB2(1 + vu)2(1- VB) 9(vu - VB )(1 - vu)
(8.128)
Equation (8.126) can then be written
(8.120) (8.129)
156
Part
Ir.
Mechanism
oE material strain
Chapter 8. InnnitesúJI
or by writing
- 1989, A general March 1989.
(8.130)
GEERTSMA, J.A., elasticity o/ satur.l - 1957, The effect Petroleum transact
(8.131) called "general consolidation equation". Coupled with the diffusivity Eqs (8.96) and (8.113) it allows one to calculate (TU, p and T. In the particulate case of an isothermal transformation, one obtains
CT'12 called isothermal
consolidation
[(TU +
!p]
=
%t [(TU +
!p]
NUR, A., and By¡ mation o/ rocks tf1Íj MACTIGUE, D.F., 9533-9542.
(8.132)
e
RICE, J.R., and saturaied elastic 1M No2.
equation.
SCHEIDEGGER, A.: New York.
8.14
CONCLUSION
The constitutive such as
equations ofthermoporoelasticity
encloses independent
constants
(8.133) These constants do not necessitate taking into account the hypothesis of homogeneity and isotropy of the matrix. This hypothesis is then not necessary to the establishment of the constitutive laws. The equations deriving from this hypothesis [expression of the Biot's coefficient (8.6), of the Skempton's coefficient (8.28) and relation (8.92)] have to be used carefully. It is better to measure directly fundamental constants like, J(u, a and B and to verify subsequently this hypothesis.
BIBLIOGRAPHY BEREST, P., 1988, Phénoménes canique des roches", BRGM.
thermiques
en géotechnique,
BOURBIE, T., COUSSY, O., and ZINNER, B., 1987, Acoustics nip, Paris. CORNET, F.R., 1976, Etude du comportement par un liquide, Annales du CF11R.
in "La Thermoméo/ porous media, Tech-
élastique et [raqile des Taches saturées
CORNET, F.R., and FAIRHURST, C., 1974, lnfiuence o/ pore pressure on the dejormation behaviour o/ saturaied rocks, in Proceeding of the 3rd Congress of ISRM, Vol. 1, part B, pp. 638-644, National Academy of Sciences, Washington. COUSSY, O., 1988, Thermoporoelastic
response o/ a Borehole, unpublished.
)-
Chapter 8. Innnitesimal
(8.130) (8.131)
(8.132)
thermoporoelasticity
157
- 1989, A general theory of thermoporoelastoplasticity, Transport in porous media, March 1989. GEERTSMA, J .A., 1957, Remarks on the analogy between thermoelasticity and the elasiicity of saturated porous media, J. Mech. Phys. Solids, 13-16 - 1957, The effeci of fluid pressure decline on volumetric changes of porous rocks, Petroleum transaction AIME, Vol. 210. NUR, A., and BVERLEE, J .D., 1971, An exact eJjective stress law [or elastic deformation of rocks with fluíd, JGR 76, 6414-6419. MAcTIGUE, D.F., 1986, Thermoelastíc response of a fluíd saturated porous rack, JGR 9533-9542. RICE, J .R., and CLEARV, M.P., 1976, Some basic stress diJjusíon solutíons [or fluíd saturated elastic porous media, Review of Geophysics and Space Physics, Vol. 14, No2. SCHEIDEGGER, A.E., 1960, The physícs New York.
(8.133)
media, Tech-
on the defor-
oí ISRM, Vol.
of flow through porous media, Mac Millan,
CHAPTER
9
The triaxial test and the measurement of thermoporoelastic properties
The triaxial cell is the most suitable tool for determining the thermoporoelastic properties of a geomaterial. This test derives in fact from soil mechanics where it has long been used (since the 1930s), except for its adaptation to high-pressure conditions. For a more detailed study therefore, readers are referred to the work of Bishop and Henkel which contains complete information on the subject.
9.1
DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST AND OF THE EXPERIMENTAL SYSTEM
In a triaxial test one applies to a cylindrical sample a vertical load ov and a radial confining pressure Pc. In a radial plane, the stress field is therefore isotropic (and equal to Pc). Furthermore, an interstitial pressure p is imposed in the interconnected porosity via a third pressurization circuit. The latter can moreover function (Fig.9.1) under drained (valve V1 open) or undrained conditions, (valve V1 closed). The Total Compagnie Francoise des Peiroles (Total CFP) experimental system is of entirely new design. It is schematized in Fig.9.2. Its originality lies in the fact that instead of conventionally regulating a vertical load and a confining pressure, one directly imposes a hydrostatic stress and a deviator. This is accomplished thanks to direct communication (through conduit AB) between the confining pressure and the chamber above the piston (chamber C).
160
Part II. l\1echanism of material strain
Chapter
9. The tria
In this way, tI The deviator is a load O"y is (Fig. 9 fluid inlet
VI
~
__
~I"""
-~
Fig. 9.1. Schematic
description
of the triaxial
test.
clcvia t.oric s trc ss ...., :;:; '"
g
.
~
Pv is the pre of the piston (eq
?'
'" ~
3
'Fl
:..
:..
in
~ ?'
0~
'Fl
'"
'" c, ?'
0c,
9.2
Fig. 9.2. TOTAL-CFP triaxial (Nicolas
patent).
cell
DRAll
The interstiti recovered) volun ment of the piS (Fig. 9.4). A set of two 1 in the table belo
161
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
of material strain
In this way, the confining pressure is in fact equivalent to a hydrostatic pressure u. The deviator is applied via a second circuit (chamber D) so that the actual vertical load o'V is (Fig. 9.3) "
..
(9.1)
a
,,..
a 2r
2R
Fig. 9.3. Delail
st.ress
.'
view or the piston.
Po is the pressure in chamber D, Rand r respectively of the piston (equal to the sample radius) (Fig.9.3).
9.2
the large and small radii
DRAINAGE CIRCUITS
The interstitial pressure is imposed via a servo-controlled jack. The injected (or recovered) volume can be evaluated with maximum precision by measuring the movement of the piston with the help of a displacement transducer linked to the rod (Fig. 9.4). A set of two valves (1 and 2) enables one to establish three types of drainage listed in the table below
162
Part II. Mechanism
Regime Undrained Drained at 2 ends Drained at 1 end
Vl
V2
Closed
Closed or open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
injection
VI
of material strain
j ac k
fluid inlet
Chapter
9. The trial
The displacement to the strain of tI cell base, in othes unwelcome strain The strain gal strain of the cell a (i.e. horizontal ta of the sample (sa; is not integrated reliable results tl dependent on the displacement trar to regulation exo
C2 regulation Cl }-
loop
....J
9.4
FRICTJ
Friction probl of two orders.
V2
9.4.1
Fig. 9.4. Diagram
,
of the circuit.
If Vl is closed, one is working under undrained conditions and one can no longer control the interstitial pressure since the sample is isolated from the injection jack. It is therefore essential for obvious reasons of regulation to schedule two measurements of pressure (transducers Cl and C2) so that the transducer on which the cylinder is regulated (C1 in our case) is not isolated from the jack. Under drained conditions, on the other hand, a single transducer would be sufficient (Cl and C2 do in fact provide an identical measurement). Valve V2 makes it possible to carry out drainage at both ends if it is open, at one end only if it is closed. Drainage at both ends speeds up the test quite notably, which is extremely useful when the sample has a low permeability.
! .
9.3
STRAINS MEASUREMENT
The measurement of strains is conventionally made either using displacement transducers (external or internal) or with strain gauges stuck to the sample via a layer of resin to prevent direct contact between the glue and the interstitial fluid.
Frictil
This relates tA ment of the plane manner the latteJ of limiting this E teflon, on the oth be homogeneous. correct.
of material strain
jack
lion loop
163
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
The displacement transducer can be placed outside the cell. In that case, in addition to the strain of the rock, one measures that of the cell. It can also be placed on the cell base, in other words in the confining chamber. In this case, one eliminates the unwelcome strain of the central block of the cell. The strain gauges have the advantage, on the one hand, of not integrating any strain of the cell and on the other of allowing possible measurement of the radial strain (i.e. horizontal tangential strain). However, their use requires meticulous preparation of the sample (sticking, wiring) and the measurement remains localized (the strain is not integrated over the whole sample). Generally, strain gauges give much more reliable results than displacement transducers the measurements of which are very dependent on the quality of sample faces parallelism. The author recommends that displacement transducers should not be used for strain measurements but restricted to regulation except when the material is highly deformable.
9.4
FRICTION PROBLEMS
Friction problems are the most crucial in experimental rock mechanics. They are of two orders.
9.4.1
Friction of the piston
This relates to the friction between rock and piston which prevents free displacement of the plane faces of the sample. Instead of becoming strained in a homogeneous manner the latter tends to assume the form of a barrel (Fig.9.5). There are two ways of limiting this edge effect: on the one hand friction can be limited by grease or teflon, on the other, one can increase the length of the sample for the central zone to be homogeneous. Ratio 2 between length L and diameter is generally admitted to be correct.
would be sufe V2 makes it if it is closed. cnremely useful .c
o .c
displacement sample via a . iderstitial fluid.
Fig. 9.5. Fric ti on effect (b orrcl
shape).
on the strain
of the sample
164
9.4.2
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
Friction of moving piston
Friction of the moving piston is very troublesome when one inverses loading. thermore this friction generally increases very sharply with confining pressure, the loading-unloading loop increases (Fig.9.6). A very effective technical trick enables one to avoid this by making the piston slide over a teflon ring (Fig.9.7). o-ring located behind the ring ensures the tightness of the system. Thanks to method, it is possible to minimize to a large extent these disturbing effects.
Furand over An this
displacement Fig. 9.6. Typical stress strain curve with hysteresis due to friction during
9.5
unloading.
PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION OF THE SAMPLE
Chapter
9. The trial
damage minerals I However, it is espt a problem, much
After cleaning avoid such unwelc better to use a no distilled water is Once it has be porous plates an ensure better dist
9.6
COMP]
After 48 houn To be convinced hydrostatic stress connected porosit in the hydrostati increases slightly An undrained tion. Contrary tc
I
A classical dimension of the samples is 4 em diameter by 8 ern height. So as not to increase the heterogeneity of the stress field (already disturbed by friction problems), it is advised that one accurately monitors the parallelism of the faces and their perpendicularity to the symmetry axis of the core. A second essential point concerns saturation. Very often, the cores have not been protected and they require cleaning with solvents (alcohol, trichloroethylene, benzene ... ). These cleaning procedures are often disputed. Indeed the fluids used can
165
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
loading. Furpressure, and .cal trick over (Fig. 9.7). An Thanks to this 'effects.
damage minerals contained in the interconnected porosity (particularly clay minerals). However, it is especially at the physico-chemical level (wettability) that they may pose a problem, much more than at the purely mechanical level.
/
teflon
ring
\ o-ring
I piston
Fig. 9.7. Anlifriclion a tenon
ring
system
with
(Nicolas Patent).
After cleaning, the samples are presaturated in a vacuum system for 48 hours. To avoid such unwelcome phenomena as clay swelling (frequent in sandstones) it is often better to use a non-polar fluid such as a low-viscosity refined oil. Among polar fluids, distilled water is to be avoided. Once it has been presaturated the sample is introduced into a rubber sleeve. Two porous plates are placed between the pistons and the faces of the sample. These ensure better distribution of the fluid into the sample. .
9.6
COMPLETE
SATURATION
OF THE SAMPLE
After 48 hours in a vacuum system, the sample is generally very poorly saturated. To be convinced of this fact, it is sufficient to close the drainage and to increase the hydrostatic stress (f. If the sample is poorly saturated (presence of air in the interconnected porosity), the interstitial pressure will respond poorly to any incrementing in the hydrostatic load (f: either the interstitial pressure remains unchanged or it increases slightly with respect to (f and above all with a certain delay (Fig. 9.8). An undrained test is therefore a very reliable way of checking the sample saturation. Contrary to what is generally admitted, it is not a flow but a consolidation
166
Chapter 9. The tria:
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
that will permit the drainage and lower than the tc volume injected iJ The consolidatioi (time), the inject tion time, t100) i uniform interstiti
I
undrained
pressure
Ir
CALCl
9.7 saturated (instantaneous
sample
THEe
response)
unsaturated
Aside from 1>4 rect method of D For this puq initial and bourn transformation, ; isothermal conso
sample time
Fig. 9.8. Interstitial during
pressure
an undrained
response
test.
with
volume )
The boundar
• log(time)
Fig. 9.9. Consolidation evaluation
of 'tOO'
curve
with
where Pi is the conditions (9.4), Carslaw pp. 99-1
p(z in which Tv is a
almaterialstrain
167
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
'
•
that will permit complete saturation of the specimen. For this purpose, one opens the drainage and one imposes a certain pressure Pc in the injection jack (naturally lower than the total stress u reached in the previous phase). One then follows the volume injected into the interconnected porosity by maintaining the loading constant. The consolidation curve has the appearance given in Fig. 9.9: as a function of the log (time), the injected volume increases, then after a certain time (known as consolidation time, tl00) it stabilizes. At this stage, one may assume that the sample has a uniform interstitial pressure and that consequently it is saturated.
9.7
.', (
CALCULATION OF PERMEABILITY THE CONSOLIDATION TIME
FROM
Aside from being a very effective saturation process, consolidation is also an indirect method of measuring permeability via the isothermal consolidation coefficient. For this purpose one has to solve the consolidation equation for the imposed initial and boundary conditions imposed [Eq. (8.131)]. In the case of an isothermal transformation, a constant load and a linear flow (according to axis x of the core) the isothermal consolidation equation is written (9.2)
•
with
CT = 2kGBB2(1
•
9J1.(vu
-
+ vu)2(1
- VB)
vB)(l
Vu)
-
(9.3)
The boundary conditions (in the case of drainage at both ends) are such that
• ~ ••
p(x, t = 0) = 0
= -h, t) p(x = h, t)
p(x
Vx (9.4)
Pi } Vt Pi
where Pi is the consolidation pressure and h the half-length of the sample. With conditions (9.4), (9.2) admits the well-known solution (see for example Jaeger and Carslaw pp. 99-100)
P()z , t
= Pi -
4Pi ~
(_l)n
-;- L.J (2n
+ 1) e
(2n
_(2n+1)2,,2T. 4
cos
+ 1)1I'x 2h
(9.5)
n=O
~'
in which Tv is a dimensionless variable such that (9.6)
168
Part II. Mechanism
To evaluate the consolidation time, one introduces known as "degree of consolidation" such that
U
=
of material strain
a dimensionless
9. The triaJI
variable U, p(bar) 50
f~hP(x,t)dx
(9.7)
2hpi substituting
Chapter
(9.5) in (9.7), one obtains after integration, 8
U=l--
2:
00
11"2n=O
1
(2n
+ 1)2
e
_ (2n+l)'".'Tv 4
(9.8) 30
It will easily be verified that for
Tv=O
U=O
Tv=oo
U=l
t
20
,
The sample is therefore consolidated after an infinite time. It is possible to calculate the consolidation time from approximate expressions. That of Terzaghi for example provides a very accurate approximation up to a 90 % degree of consolidation
10
o
(9.9) In a first approximation, if one admits this equation valid up to 100 % of consolidation, one can easily evaluate the consolidation coefficient as a function of consolidation time tlOO that is
50
100
1I"h2
CT
= -4tlOO
(9.10)
Substituting (9.10) in (9.3), one obtains a relationship between the permeability and the poroelastic properties. Consolidation is therefore an indirect permeability evaluation.
300
200
9.8
UNDRAINED HYDROSTATIC MEASUREMENT OF BAND
COMPRESSION
x;
100
The second phase of the test consists in gradually increasing 0', in undrained conditions, up to the mean total in situ stress O'g. If complete saturation has been reached (it is generally the case) after the first consolidation, an increment of hydrostatic stress /:).0', induces an instantaneous interstitial pressure increase /:).p /:).p = -B/:).O'
(9.11)
where B is the Skempton's coefficient. However, the response is not always ideal as is shown by a few typical cases in Fig. 9.10: total destruction of the interconnected
o
20
40
of material strain
169
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
ess variable U, p(bar )
p(bar) 50
25
(9.7) 20 _1 -.,' •••.
(9.8)
.-:,,:, 30
~~-':....--•••.•..•••••..•.•• -""''''''''!'''
15
t
20
a
.
b
10
i
is possible to calof Terzaghi for of consolidation
10
5
1000(bar) o
(9.9)
50
100
150
200
250
o
300
50
100
150
200
250
p(bar) 150
(9.10) the permeability _.rect permeability
/
i
.'
:
/
300
./
100
i
i
.!
1~:
/
200
ION
..
'
.'
.'
/ d
c
50
100
•• undrained condihas been reached t of hydrostatic Lip
lal(bar)
Ev (*10000)
o
20
60
80
o
100
Fig. 9.10. Typical behaviour a-total
(9.11) •• always ideal as lite interconnected
destruction
b-unsaturated
of porous
under
100 undrained
space
sample
c-influence
of fissuring
on stress
strain
d-influence
of fissuring
on stress
pressure
(after
Charlez.1987)
curve curve
200
300
conditions
170
Part II. Mechanism of material
strain
Chapter 9. The trY
porosity (a) (at the end of the test, the porosity is no longer in communication with the pressure transducer) or quite simply (b) poor initial saturation. Contrary to what is generally accepted in soil mechanics, Skempton's coefficient is often much less than 1. Type of rock
Ruler sandstone* Tennessee marble* Charcoal granite* Berea sandstone* Westerly granite* Vosges sandstone Weher sandstone* Venezuela sandstone
B
0
0.88 0.51 0.55 0.62 0.85 0.41 0.73 0.30
0.02 0.02 0.02 0.19 0.01 0.18 0.15 0.05
* According to Rice and Cleary (1976). Under undrained conditions, the loading rate should have no effect on the response of the material which in poroelasticity is necessarily instantaneous. However, the rate of the test plays a very important part for two main reasons.
9.8.1
The measuring circuit of pore pressure
The pressure transducer measuring the interstitial pressure is connected to the porous medium by a steel tube via a porous stone (Fig. 9.11). Therefore, the various links in the measuring chain (rock - porous stone - steel tube) will not react in the same way to the variations in total stress and in pore pressure. Bishop (1962) analyzes the effect of the measurement circuit by introducing two additional parameters ml and m2. If ml is the compressibility of the porous disc, during a total stress increment .D.7f and a pore pressure increment Llp, the volume rejected LlVl will be (9.12) On the other hand, the tubing (whose compressibility is m2) is only sensitive to pore pressure variation .D.p. Its volume variation will be (9.13) If loading is applied quickly, these volumes must equalize and, consequently, the change in interstitial pressure PI observed immediately after an increment Ll7f will be Llp
1 Ll7f = -kLl7f _m_2-1
= PI = -=--mi
(9.14)
The instanta that of the mat coefficient). The rock not can take a certa that is Pt, can b the expression (4
where
an is the roo Po is the initi PI is the initi Pt is the pres poo is the eqt J1.
=
(7r /2) [h.
inverse of the oe
171
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
nnication with . Contrary to is often much less
porous
stone
(compressibility factor m L)
tube for pressure (compressibility Fig. 9.11. Pore pressure
I
me asurerne nt factor
m2)
measurement
system
(after Bishop and Henkel. 1962)
on the response :Dowever, the rate
The instantaneous response is therefore that of the measuring circuit Pl and not that of the material Po (which is equal to -Bl:!."ff in which B is the Skempton's coefficient) . The rock not being necessarily very permeable, equalization between Pl and Po can take a certain time. The pressure evolution in the measuring circuit at time t, that is Pt, can be evaluated by integrating the consolidation equation. One is led to the expression (Gibson, 1954) 1-~ Poo
(9.12)
(9.13)
(9.15)
where 0, an is the root of the equation an cot an Po is the initial pressure in the sample, Pl is the initial pressure in the measuring system, Pt is the pressure measured at instant t, Poo is the equilibrium pressure, f1 (7r/2)[hD2mv/(ml + m2)] in which D is the sample diameter and mv the inverse of the oedometric modulus
=
=
(9.14)
m,,=
1- v - 2v2 E(I-v)
172
Part II. Mechanism
In (9.15), Poo is the equilibrium pore pressure (theoretically infinite time, i.e. for Tv -+ 00) such that
of material strain
obtained
after an
1- PI } Poo
= Po { 1-
1 +~
(9.16)
When equalization is reached between the sample and the measuring system, one evaluates an apparent Skempton coefficient Bmes such that
= -BmesL:l.7i
Poo
(9.17)
The measured value ofSkempton's coefficient must be corrected; one easily obtains by replacing (9.14) and (9.17) in (9.16)
B
= Bmes
(1
+ ~) -
t
(9.18)
Generally, especially for high pressure systems, the tubing is much more compressible than the porous disc (ml > m2) so that k is closer to 1. As J1. is always greater than 100 (except for very incompressible samples), this correction modifies very slighty the results. An example of measurement of Skempton's coefficient is presented in Fig.9.12. 40 30
Chapter
9.8.2
9. The tI
The
The heterog consequence is become uniforn of the interstiti unwelcome phe
Aside from makes it possil phase of (Fig.! linearity in the observed whose ticularly specta instantaneouslj
9.9
snco
When the h; pressure (whid actual value ~ a final consolid permeability hi consolidation is the loading rate geostatic stress
36
•.. oj
.D
34 32
~ :..
30
;::l
25
OJ OJ
~ •.. c,
9.10
PAR
26 24
"@
~ ...,
22
OJ
20
...,~
.S
MEA
15 16 14 12 10 100
120
140
160
mean Fig. 9. 1.2-~lcasurement on Lavoux limestone.
stress
150
200
(bar)
of Skempton's
coefficient
220
A test unde carried out in s throughout the too fast the loe modulus will 1>4 The ideal sc: but this proced coefficient to ei excessive local] Let us imag this test is earn will be equal to
of material s~rain
obtained
after an
(9.16)
._ri·ng system, one
(9.17) 0Ile
easily obtains
(9.18) lIluch more com-
L As jJ is always tion modifies 's coefficient is
173
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
9.8.2
The heterogeneity of the stress field
The heterogeneity of the stress field within the sample is due to end effects. The consequence is a heterogeneity of the instantaneous pore pressure which tends to become uniform in the same way as during the previous process. The distribution of the interstitial pressure prior to the equilibrium is difficult to evaluate, and this unwelcome phenomenon often remains difficult to quantify. Aside from Skempton's coefficient, the undrained hydrostatic compressibility test makes it possible to obtain the undrained bulk modulus. In fact there is firstly a phase of (Fig.9.10-c) microcracks closure which is reflected in a very marked nonlinearity in the stress strain curve. During this phase, microruptures are occasionally observed whose effect is to increase the connected porosity; this phenomenon is particularly spectacular on the curves in Fig. 9.l0-d in which the interstitial pressure falls instantaneously by nearly 100 bars. This effect will be studied in the third part.
9.9
SECOND PHASE OF CONSOLIDATION
When the hydrostatic pressure (j reaches the mean geostatic stress, the interstitial pressure (which was not monitored during the previous phase) is readjusted to its actual value PR (corresponding generally to that of the reservoir) by carrying out a final consolidation. Generally speaking, during the preceding hydrostatic phase, permeability has decreased so that the consolidation time corresponding to this final consolidation is greater than the previous one. Measuring it enables one to readjust the loading rate of the subsequent phases which will always take place above the mean geostatic stress.
9.10
MEASUREMENT OF DRAINED ELASTIC PARAMETERS
A test under drained conditions, on a previously consolidated sample, must be carried out in such a way that the interstitial pressure remains constant and uniform throughout the sample. The loading rate plays therefore an essential part: if it is too fast the local excess pore pressure does not have time to dissipate, and Young's modulus will be closed to that observed in undrained conditions (i.e. Eu). The ideal solution would be to consolidate the sample at each loading increment but this procedure would be too long. Therefore, it is better to use the consolidation coefficient to evaluate a sufficiently slow loading rate that will allow dissipation of excessive local pore pressure. Let us imagine an increase in the total deviatoric stress (0"1 - 0"2) till rupture. If this test is carried out under undrained conditions the interstitial pressure at rupture will be equal to
_ P
Pu -
R-
B0"1-
3
0"2
(9.19)
174
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
On the contrary, if drainage had have changed during the deviatoric Under imperfect drainage conditions, of rupture) is equal (on average) to D such that D
Chapter
9. The
u
been perfect, the interstitial pressure would not phase, and would have remained equal to PR. the pressure dissipates slowly and, at tf (instant Pf(> PR). One defines the degree of dissipation P 1- Pf - R (9.20) Pu -PR
=
It varies between the two limits Pf
= PR
=1
perfectly drained test ==> D
(9.21)
Pi = Pu undrained test ==> D = 0 Once again, the dissipation degree can be evaluated by integrating the consolidation equation. However, Gibson and Henkel (1954) have found an empirical formula similar to that of Terzaghi and such that D
= 1-
h2 --
(9.22)
nCTtf
in which n is a constant depending on drainage conditions: it is equal to 3 for a sample drained at both ends, 0.75 for a sample drained at one end. If one supposes that a dissipation degree of 95 % is sufficient (order of magnitude verified by experimentation), the time t i required to reach rupture will be such that (in the case n 3)
=
20hZ tf =
3CT
(9.23)
and will ensure proper drainage of the sample. If R; represents the compression strength of the material under the considered confining pressure, a loading rate such that Rc (9.24) Ve=tf
will therefore ensure proper drainage of the sample. Once of the drained properties is easy (Fig.9.13):
Vc
is known measurement
(a) By increasing the deviatoric stress and maintaining the hydrostatic stant one measures EB. (b) By increasing the hydrostatic load and maintaining the deviatoric stant, one measures J{B. (c) By increasing the deviatoric load and maintaining the hydrostatic stant, one also has access to liB (provided EB is known).
9.11
MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES
OF UNDRAINED
load conload con-
9.12
MEA AND
load conLet us take; case of a hydro
ELASTIC
Measurement of undrained elastic properties (Ku, lIu, Eu) is carried out using the same loading paths, but the loading rate can be higher.
Two cases c
1. If one aI the hydJ
of material strain
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
would not equal to PRo d, at tf (instant of dissipation
250
(9.20)
230
175
.l!Ssure
240
220 210
(9.21)
200
the consolida~irical formula
(9.22)
~ .D
190
';:;'
t
0 ..,
180
'I
';: <1>
'"
170 160
'
..
equal to 3 for a H one supposes . ed by experithe case n 3)
150
I
140 130
=
120
(9.23)
110 -2
0
2 deformation
Fig. 9.13. Measurement
(9.24)
4
6
(10--4)
of elastic
properties
on Lavoux limestone.
tic load conric load con-
9.12
MEASUREMENT OF BlOT'S COEFFICIENT AND MATRIX BULK MODULUS
tic load conLet us take again the expression of the variation in total volume [Eq. (8.8)]; in the case of a hydrostatic loading 7f, it is written 1:!.£kk
1 = -}.' (6.7f + a6.p) '\..B
(9.25)
Two cases can be envisaged:
=
•• ......,;0.0. out using the
1. If one assumes an isochoric test (6.€kk 0) by regulating the jack acting on the hydrostatic pressure, one measures directly Biot's coefficient since 6.7f
= -a6.p
(9.26)
Part II. Mechanism
176 2. If the interstitial increment (~O' (9.25) becomes
of material strain
pressure increment remains equal to the hydrostatic pressure one measures directly the matrix bulk modulus since
~Ekk
= -}'iM
(9.27)
An example is presented in Fig. 9.14 for Lavoux limestone.
210
t*
l
190 180 170
(fJ
~ '".. '"~
....,
160
ro
150
~
s
:j:++'
140
t* t*
110
Th4
l
l
When the ts form
Generally tl perature. In th such that
where ar is the The volume tion will be sue
+1
/
/ l
++
t
or again
However, tl the order of 10' therefore relati
l
t
130 120
9.13.1
(-If
200
8
9. The CI
= -~p),
~(f
e
Chapter
/
/
+* +*
0.1 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 axial def'orm ati on (10--4) Fig. 9.14. Meastli'ement
of grains
bulk modulus
of Lavoux limestone.
9.13
MEASUREMENT OF THE COEFFICIENTS OF THERMAL EXPANSION
The thermal expansion coefficients are probably the most difficult therrnoporoelastic constants to measure. In fact, there are four different coefficients (au, oe, au and aj), but only two of them are independent.
9.13.2
M.
In theory, I sample in a tri associated stra The heatin
1. Either· rock. 2. Or by c
In the first rogeneous due the confining ( of the rock an4
177
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
atic pressure modulus since
(9.27)
9.13.1
Thermal expansion coefficient of the fluid
When the temperature form
variations remain moderate, fluid obeys an equation of the (9.28)
Generally the fluid is in a solid receptacle which also undergoes changes of temperature. In this way, the receptacle which initially occupied the volume Vo expands such that (9.29) Vr Vo [1 + O'r(T - To)]
=
where O'r is the thermal expansion coefficient of the receptacle. The volume variation of fluid Va is therefore only apparent, and the actual variation will be such that (9.30) or again (9.31) However, the values of the thermal expansion coefficient of fluids are generally of the order of 10-3 while those of solids are rather 10-6 The correction remains therefore relatively small. 0'/ =O'a+O'r
rC
rC.
Thermal expansion coefficient of some common fluids at atmospheric pressure Fluid
0'/(10-3;oC)
Acetone ....... Benzene ....... Oil ............ Water ......... Mercury ......
1.32 1.16
0.9 0.5 0.18 .'
9.13.2
Measurement
of au and o»
In theory, their determination seems to be easy since it is sufficient to heat the sample in a triaxial cell under drained or undrained conditions and to evaluate the associated strains (or displacements). The heating can be carried out in two separate ways: 1. Either using an electric resistance placed between the rubber sleeve and the rock. 2. Or by directly heating the confining oil. thermoporoe-
ts (au, O'B, aM
In the first case, only the rock is heated, but the temperature distribution is heterogeneous due to heat losses by conduction in the piston steel and by convection in the confining oil. The temperature field depends greatly on the thermal conductivity of the rock and on the thermal convection coefficient in the oil.
178
of material strain
Chapter 9. Tbe CI
Rather than heat just the rock, it is better in order to obtain a homogeneous temperature field, to heat the whole of the cell via the confining oil and to measure the thermal strain with the aid of a strain gauge stuck on the sample so as to avoid the expansion of the various parts of the cell (or of the transducer itself if it is situated inside the cell). The disadvantage of this technique is that it restricts measurement to temperature fields below 1300 (problem of thermal instability of the gauge at high temperature). An example is presented in Fig. 9.15 for Lavoux limestone (undrained test ).
In SI units I The thermal but it remains 4
Part II. Mechanism
..•.
~
I
u
(
vert
'"
~-1
;..
...,;:J
\
•
~ c,
1-2 \
a
..., 40 (J)
hor
.,'
"t;j
35
-3
30 -4 vol
25
e
-5~~ 20
1 lime
3 (thousands
__ -L__~ __L-~ __-L
"~
o time
of s)
Fig. 9.15. Measurement
of thermal
expansion
(thousands
of s)
coefficient
on Lavoux Limestone.
9.14
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
Thermal conductivity measures the ability of the medium to let heat flow through it. This is expressed by Fourier's law which relates the heat flow Q to the temperature gradient Q -K'VT (9.32)
=
of material strain
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
a homogeneous and to measure so as to avoid if it is situated measurement the gauge at high ne (undrained
179
In SI units K. is expressed in Wjm.oC. The thermal conductivity of rocks is generally greater than that of gases and water, but it remains considerably less than that of metals (by approximately a factor 100). Thermal conductivity of different materials Materials
K.
Gas at 1 atm . ......... . Coal Wood Rocks and soils Building materials ...... Insulating materials ..... Non-metallic liquids ..... Metallic liquids ......... Pure metals ............. •••••••••••
00
••••••••••••
k
i \.
t:
0.006-0.180 0.167-0.377 0.100-0.400 0.100-8 0.628-2.930 0.025-0.25 0.1-1 8.5 20-400
•••••••
0.0
••
••••
0.0
•••
in W j m.oC
0
vert f
•
TABlE 1 Thcrmal
hor
o
conductivities
of common
2.5
rocks
at 20 C
5
7.5 --..
sedimentary
rocks
quartzite dolomite sandstone
•
vol
limestone
o
wet clay shales argillaceous
sand salt
anhydrite metamorphic
rocks gneiss
marble volcanic
rocks basalt g abbro
---
diabase granite
(9.32)
K(w/m.·C)
180
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Chapter 9. The tr
Contrary to electrical conductivity or magnetic susceptibility, thermal conductivity changes are relatively small from one rock to another. Low for clays, medium for carbonates, it is relatively high for rock-salt.
The measur fluid at a given being known ill temperature of specific heat of
TABLE 2 of common
Specific heat 600
BOO
700
900
rocks
1000
at 20 C
1100
1200
1300
BIBLIOGB dolomite ---------
sandstone
-----------
BISHOP,
limestone
--
CHARLEZ,
argillaceous ----salt -----
-----
Ph., abilite d 'une fIl - 1987, The tr. mation, Augus
shales
metamorphic
A.W.
triaxial test, Ec
wet clay sand
anhydrite rocks
COSTE,
J.,
gneiss marble
GIBSON,
R.E.
rate of strain,
volcanic rocks
JAEGER, basalt
J
.C.:
Oxford.
--gabbro
REUSCHLE,
diabase
f--------------------
am
: "Plasticite et
T.
un calcaire, un
granitc
SKEMPTON,
A
pore pressure, TERZAGHI,
K.
- 1948, Soil AI
9.15
V Vol. I & II, 'I'I VUTUKURI,
SPECIFIC HEAT
WEAHLS,
For solids and fluids, it is not useful to distinguish specific heat at constant pressure and volume. One merely defines it at constant strain, that is C'kk. Specific heat was defined in Chapter 3. It represents the capacity of the material to store heat. It is defined by the quantity of heat required to increase by one degree the temperature of one gramme of material, that is (9.33)
Cekk is expressed as J /(kg. DC). Specific heat varies very little from one rock to Its order of magnitude is 800 J /kg.oC.
another.
H.}
the soil mecha
., material strain
181
Chapter 9. The triaxial test
The measurement of specific heat can be carried out in a calorimeter filled with fluid at a given temperature (water for example). The specific heat of this fluid being known as well as the masses of fluid m f and of rock mr, if T; is the initial temperature of the rock and TF the final equilibrium temperature of the mixture, the specific heat of the rock will be written
T!
c
-
C
mf T/ -TF f mr TF- Tl' i
(9.34)
BIBLIOGRAPHY I
i I
I ~
l (
BISHOP, A.W., and HENKEL, D.J., 1962, The measurement triaxial test, Edward Arnold Publisher.
of soil properties
in the
CHARLEZ, Ph., 1981, Etude critique des differentes methodes de mesure de la permeabilite d 'une roche au laboratoire, in French, unpublished. - 1987, The triaxial test. Its application to petroleum engineering, Petroleum Information, August. COSTE, J., and SANGLERAT, G., 1975, Cours pratique de mecanique : "Plasticite et calcul des tassernents", Dunod Technique.
des sols, Vol. I
GIBSON, R.E., and HENKEL, D.J., 1954, Influence of duration of tests at constant rate of strain on measured drained strength, Geotechnique 4: 6-15. JAEGER, J.C., Oxford.
and CARLSAW, 1959, Conduction
of heat in solids, Clarendon
REUSCHLE, T., and HEUGAS, 0., 1989, Mesures ihermoporoelasiiques un calcaire, unpublished (in French).
Press,
sur un gres et
SKEMPTON, A.W., 1960, Effective stress in soils, concrete and rocks, Proc. Conf. on pore pressure and suction in soils, 4-16, London, Butterworth. TERZAGHI, K., 1943, Theoretical Soil Mechanics, John Wiley. - 1948, Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, John Wiley. VUTUKURI, V.S., LAMA, R.D., and SALUJA, S.S., Mechanical Vol. I & II, Trans Tech Publications. WEAHLS, H.E., 1962, Analysis of primary the soil mechanics division ASCE, Dec.
(9.33)
tiom one rock to
f t
t
and secondary
properties
consolidation,
of rocks, Journal
of
CHAPTER
"':-'.-
10
Thermoporoelastoplasticity General theory and application
In the case of irreversible behaviour, it is necessary to introduce into the formalism the concepts of plastic strain f.P, plastic porosity 0P and hardening variable. These additional parameters will clarify the concept of "effective stress".
A.GENERALCONCEPTS 10.1
CONSTITUTIVE LAWS IN IDEAL THERMOPOROELASTOPLASTICITY
Let us consider the simplest case of ideal plasticity, ignoring therefore any hardening phenomenon. We propose in this scope to write the constitutive laws.
10.1.1
Variations in pressure associated transformation
=
with a TPEP
=
Let us imagine an isothermal (T To) and isochoric (ckk 0) transformation. Let us gradually inject a mass of fluid m from the reference pressure Po (Fig. 10.1). As long as p is less than a limit value v', in conformity with Eq. (8.73), the pressure p increases linearly, with a slope TJ/ Po. When the ideal plasticity threshold is reached, although
184
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
=
fluid continues to be injected, the pressure remains constant (p pe). Finally, during a possible unloading, only the mass of fluid me will be recovered. The mass mP is the irreversible increase in fluid content that is
Chapter 10. Tben
or
(10.1)
10.1.3
Var trm
p
Let us imag of fluid minto j plasticity thresl variation is eqw
e P
'YJ
Po Po
~m me
~
P
111
Fig. J 0.1. Pressure
vari at.ions for an
tsot.hcrm al isoehorie
t ransrorm
at ion.
where 0P is the plastic porosity (irreversible variation or porosity when the material is unloaded). During the transformation, since only the increment of elastic mass me can generate an increase in pressure the constitutive equation of ideal plasticity for pressure is therefore such that p
= Po + !L(m -
p00P)
(10.2)
Po
The same reasoning for an undrained-isothermal tion p
= Po
-G:TJ(ckk
-
transformation
leads to the equa-
c1k)
(10.3)
in which cu and c1k are respectively total strain and plastic strain. For a general transformation, the overall variation in pressure will therefore be written (10.4)
10.1.2
Constitutive
law in TPEP
By the same reasoning one is led to
2 = 20 + 1;:B: (fo - foP) - al(p - Po) - G:B/{Bl(T - To)
(10.5)
The final te extracted from phase, one folka the material be yond point A d extract heat fro Entropy ine to AB' as woul point A. In this
.EmaUrial
strain
Finally, during mass mP is the
185
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
or (7'
--
=
(7'0
+ AU
""
:
(€ --
€P)
R
-
(m -
-Po
0P)
-
A (T - To) -
(10.6)
(10.1)
10.1.3
Variation in entropy associated with a TPEP transformation
Let us imagine an isochoric isothermal transformation and let us inject a mass of fluid m into the connected porosity (Fig. 10.2). As long as one remains below the plasticity threshold (m < me), the behaviour being thermoporoelastic, the entropy variation is equal to [Eq. (8.74)] s=s
o
m---
m
Lm To
(10.7)
s
M
B
O=-~"-----'---L----
(10.2)
Fig. 10.2. Entropy variations an isochoric
isothermal
~
associated
m
with
transformation.
(10.3)
(lOA)
(10.5)
The final term of the right-hand member represents the quantity of heat to be extracted from the system to maintain the temperature constant. During this first phase, one follows path OA of Fig. 10.2. When the ideal plasticity threshold is reached, the material becomes strained at constant pressure. The additional fluid supply beyond point A does not create any increase in pressure; it is no longer necessary to extract heat from the system to maintain its temperature constant. Entropy increases therefore according to AB (parallel to OM) and not according to AB' as would have been the case if the elasticity limit had not been reached at point A. In this way, the variation in entropy is therefore such that s = s~m - ~ (m - P00P)
(10.8)
186
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
By repeating the same reasoning for an undrained obtains therefore for any transformation
isothermal transformation
Chapter 10. Thermo
one
(10.9)
-so(T - To)-
10.1.4
,
Variation in fluid free enthalpy
-(T-To
According to Eq. (8.71) the free enthalpy of the fluid in a linearized theory is such that (10.10)
10.2 or by taking into account that g! = 1,b!
INEQl
CONe
+ pol Po (10.11)
In the case of i is reduced to
that is by taking account of (10.4)
gm
1,b!+ -s!(T
10.1.5
in which Vk are tJ Taking accoun
:0 [PO+17[-o:(c;kk-c;~k)+(:-0P)]+P;~(T-To)] - To)
Thermodynamic
(10.12) The pore pres that the dissipatk
potential in TPEP
The thermodynamic potential can be obtained by integrating the constitutive via the equations of thermoporoelasticity
a1,b s=-aT
laws
(10.13)
However one must take care when integrating on variable m since (10.12) combines energy flows (1,b! and s!) and a pressure term. By the same reasoning as in the previous paragraph, it is clear that the integration of gm leads to (10.14)
since once plasticity appears the pressure remains constant. Taking account of (10.4) and of the two other partial derivatives of (10.11) one is led after integration to
where
is the thermodyni If one consides
(10.18) is writ
In the case of ciated with fP is ~ This effective stre As already menta It depends on the
Chapter
187
10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
ormation one 'I/J= 'l/Jo+ 2:0 : (f. - f.P)
- 0P)
+ 'I/J~m + Po (:
(10.9) -so(T-To)+
,
-(T
[Cf.-f.p) :~u:
(f. - ~P)- s~m(T
- ToM:
+~
theory is such
(f.-f.p)]
- To)
[m _ 0
-0P)
/2- (: + L(m
8: (f.-e) T-To
(10.15)
- p00P)----r;;-
C€kkmO (T _ TO)2 2To
P] 2 _
2 Po
(10.10)
10.2
(10.11)
INEQUALITY OF CLAUSIUS-DUHEM AND CONCEPT OF PLASTIC EFFECTIVE STRESSES
In the case of irreversible behaviour [Eq. (7044)], the inequality of Clausius-Duhem is reduced to a : iP - 8'I/J 6P _ 8'I/J irk > 0
(T - To)]
-
80P
8Vk
(10.16)
-
in which Vk are the hardening variables. Taking account of (10.15) and (lOA), one obtains 8'I/J
(10.12)
p
(10.17)
= - 80P
The pore pressure is therefore the thermodynamic that the dissipation function can be written
force associated
with 0P so
(10.18) where
(10.13)
Ak = _ 8'I/J 8Vk force associated with Vk.
(10.19)
is the thermodynamic If one considers a plastically incompressible matrix that is
(10.20) (lD.18) is written (10.21) (10.14)
In the case of a plastically incompressible matrix, the thermodynamic force associated with P is £"+ [p, the effective stress conventionally used in soil mechanics. This effective stress is different from that defined in poroelasticity (equal to £"+alp). As already mentioned, the effective stress cannot be considered as a static concept. It depends on the constitutive law; it is a rheological concept.
t
i=
188
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Chapter 10. Thermop
Secondly, we have seen (paragr. 3.19) that in the case of dissipative phenomena the normality concept was not necessarily verified and one has in the general case to differentiate the yield locus from the plastic potential F. Under the hypothesis of matrix incompressibility, the plastic How rules will be written (10.22) where). is the plastic multiplier. (10.22) clearly shows that the idea of plastic effective stress is connected to the concept of plastic flow and not to the concept of yield locus (Coussy, 1989). In the general case, even under the hypothesis of plastically incompressible matrix, one has
f(q;,p)#f(rz+l
p)
(10.23)
The concept of effective plastic stress on the contrary is very interesting for an associated plastic flow rule for which f == F. In that case, the poroplastic problem can be considered as a continuous plastic problem provided that one replaces total stress q;by effective plastic stress in the plastic formalism, exclusively. On the other hand, it makes no sense to write static conditions with effective (elastic or plastic) stresses. For example boundary conditions have always to be written in terms of total stress and pore pressure separately.
t
10.3
PHYSICAL CONCEPT OF HARDENING CALCULATION OF HARDENING MODULUS AND OF PLASTIC MULTIPLIER
At the end of Chapter 3, we have introduced without any supplementary tions the hardening modulus H such that [Eqs (3.90) and (3.91)]
~= ~
H
(0-:- Of) orz
First of all, let us observe that the sign of H is that of 0- : or nil so that (Fig. 10.3) H H
>0 ====?
hardening
<0 ====?
softening
====?
. of
u:7J> -
====?
loading
0
====?
unloading
(J'
. of
u:7J< -
informa-
of / 8q; since ~ is positive
====?
The plastic HOl
As for the elasti
the incremental ela
(10.24)
0
I
(J'
The physical meaning of H can be easily understood if one considers the simple a. case of an uniaxial stress path and an associated constitutive law such that, f
=
The hardening I and in this simple local stiffness). The hardening pends on several he In the stress 51 "deform" the yield The hardening time. They are the The evolution (] both in size (isotro across the stress sp scalar, tensorial or This is so for e hardening consists dening consists in a variable).
189
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
a hardening
(10.22) softening
(10.23) !!jIIIftSLin,g for an •••• ti",c problem
replaces total _ On the other - or plastic) . _ tenus of total
OL--L------
~~
E Fig. 10.3. Physical concept
of hardening
modulus .
The plastic flow rule (10.24) is then written 'p
1. =-rr H
'e
1. = ~rr E
€
As for the elastic part, one has €
the incremental elastoplastic law is written
"'_uy informa(10.24)
The hardening modulus has then in plasticity (from an incremental point of view and in this simple case) the same meaning as Young's modulus in elasticity (i.e. a local stiffness). The hardening modulus describes the memory of the material and generally depends on several hardening variables. In the stress space these hardening variables appear as parameters which can "deform" the yield locus. The hardening variables describe therefore the evolution of the yield locus over time. They are the image of the past. The evolution of the yield locus can take several forms (Fig. 1004): it can change both in size (isotropic hardening), in shape (anisotropic hardening) or simply move across the stress space (kinematic hardening). The hardening variables can thus be scalar, tensorial or both. This is so for example in Fig. IDA in which the yield locus is a circle: isotropic hardening consists in an increase of radius R (scalar variable) while kinematic hardening consists in a displacement of the circle whose radius remains constant (tensorial variable).
190
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
Chapter
10. Therm
the consistency e c
and the plastic fI
1_--+-4 __
~
By replacing
Fig. 10.4. Different
types
of hardening.
a-isotropic b-anisotropic c-kinematic
'-r ,
Given f-L and a respectively the scalar and tensorial hardening modynamic potential 'Ij;can be written!
The hardening variables are associated with the thermodynamic such that [see Eq. (3.65)]
variable, the ther-
forces Rand
Similarly, the by identifying (1
JS
INCH OF Aj
lOA (10.25)
If one supposes for 'Ij;a decoupling rule such that
If one asSUID dition will be WI and if one derives (10.25), with respect to time, one obtains (10.26)
The partitios
In the general case (no partitioning rule between 9" and f-L), one has to introduce crossed terms in the expression of'lj; (see Lemaitre and Chaboche, 1988, p.198). Writing {)2'1j; I< = {)2'1j; and L=-
with
(10.26) becomes
where A is the eI
{)f-L2
R=I
-
and
K
and
{)!J2
=f
.9"
(10.27)
==
As by definil
The yield locus being such that
I1j; is a volumic quantity.
2 One will write suppose furtheJ'IDIII
191
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
the consistency condition
f
= 0 is written (10.28)
and the plastic flow rule with respect to the hardening variables [Eq. (3.95)] (10.29) By replacing (10.26) and (10.29) in (10.28) one finally obtains
of
.
~:
0"
uO"
-
(10.30)
Similarly, the hardening modulus H can be calculated from the plastic multiplier, by identifying (10.24) and (10.30) -
le, the therH=
10.4
of
(10.31)
o~
INCREMENTAL LAW IN THE CASE OF AN ASSOCIATED PLASTIC FLOW RULE
(10.25)
If one assumes that J1 is the only scalar hardening variable, the consistency condition will be written '
of . (/
00-' - .(10.26)
The partition
of. - 0
(10.32)
+ 0 p. J1-
rule is written (10.33)
with
i/=A:i:e
- ~-and (10.34) where A is the elastic tensor. (10.27)
=:
As by definition
e'
20ne will write the equations with respect to the plastic effective stress = £ +lp. One will suppose furthermore c<= 1 (elastic effective stress identical to plastic effective stress).
192
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
or
.x = -~ of it
(10.35)
n o;
Taking account of (10.33) (10.34) and (10.35), (10.32) will be written
(€- -.x 8q;'8f)
of : A:
8q!
'"
- tt»
=0
(10.36)
~f : A: €
.
da'
8f
A= H
'" -
+ 8q! : 4:
of
(10.37)
8q;'
Taking account of (10.33) and (10.34), the incremental law can be written
8f)
U'=A:€-.x(A:
or by introducing
the elastoplastic
'" -
matrix
10. TherIlMlt
(b) If the stres contrary
The hyperplao of the incremental one side and pure! We shall thus 4 the incremental e independent of tit In a tensorial two tensorial ZOnE an arbitrary choic multiplier X and tl
(10.38)
'" oq;'
4ep
Chapter
10.6 and taking account of (10.37)
LAWS ZONE!
(10.39) with (10.40)
Identically one easily shows €
-
10.5
= (AeP)-l '"
: ;,
(10.41)
-
GENERALIZATION OF ELASTOPLASTICITY: CONCEPT OF TENSORIAL ZONE
To define the plastic flow rule (Chapter 3, paragr. 3.19), one assumes the existence of a constitutive matrix varying with the incremental stress direction: (a) If the increment dq; points outside the yield locus tutive relationship is such that
(8 f / 8q; : £' > 0) the consti-
In the case of the entire increme the elastic tensor] loading zone and; than two tensorial increment, sever~ law (four tensoria raise serious proh However, mod ample) is facilitat model, paragr. U
10.7
LAWS TENS4
If the numbs corresponds to a no longer disconl very difficult expe dissipative mecha
of material strain
(10.35)
(10.36)
(10.37)
lie written
193
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
(b) If the stress increment contrary
i!
points inside the yield locus (8 f / 8![ : i!
< 0) on the
The hyperplan of equation 8 f / 8![ : f! is therefore a boundary between two regions of the incremental stress space for which the constitutive law is different, plastic on one side and purely elastic on the other. We shall thus call tensorial zone any domain of incremental stress space for which the incremental equation is linear, i.e. for which the behaviour of the material is independent of the stress increment. In a tensorial zone, the constitutive matrix is a constant. On the boundary of two tensorial zones, there must be continuity of the strain increment. This prohibits an arbitrary choice of constitutive matrix and leads to the introduction of the plastic multiplier X and the plastic potential F.
(10.38)
10.6
"'(10.37)
LAWS WITH MORE THAN TWO TENSORIAL ZONES: THEORY OF MULTIMECHANISMS
(10.39)
(10AO)
(lOA 1)
In the case of (linear or non-linear) elasticity a single tensorial zone exists: in the entire incremental stress space, the constitutive matrix is constant (and equal to the elastic tensor). Classical elastoplasticity possesses two tensorial zones: a plastic loading zone and an elastic unloading zone. When the constitutive law contains more than two tensorial zones, one speaks about multimechanisms: according to the loading increment, several types of plasticity can exist. It is the case of the octolinear Darve's law (four tensorial zones, Fig. 10.5). These extremely complex models occasionally raise serious problems of continuity for the transitions between tensorial zones. However, modelling of certain geomaterials of complex behaviour (chalk, for example) is facilitated by the introduction of multiple sources of plasticity (see Lade's model, paragr. 10.30).
10.7
LAWS WITH AN INFINITY OF TENSORIAL ZONES
If the number of tensorial zones becomes infinite, (each loading increment corresponds to a different constitutive matrix) the matrix varies continuously and no longer discontinuously as in the case of the multimechanisms, for it is always very difficult experimentally speaking to define the "boundaries between the different dissipative mechanisms" .
194
Part II. Mechanism
Chapter 10. Thermop
of material strain
transformation
will
where )
At least, instead void ratio which is
Fig 10.5. Octolinear
incremental
in the space of incremental The four tensorial
zones
law with four tensorial
zones
sollicitations.
are defined
by the dashed
in which 0 is the II One can dedua differentiating (10.'
lines.
(after Darve.1987)
if one neglects the (dVB == dVp). Fim
B. THE CAMBRIDGE
MODEL
Generally in books on rock mechanics, few pages are devoted to clay materials. Indeed, clays are very often solely listed under the word "soil", relating to un compacted materials existing at shallow depth. In fact, numerous oil drillings show compact rocks with a very high clay content at great depth. For this reason we describe in the following paragraph the classical Cam-Clay model recently generalized to thermoporous materials by Coussy (1989, 1991).
10.8
SPACE OF PARAMETERS
Let us consider a volume element submitted to a state of stress £" a pore pressure p and undergoing a total strain increment df. The strain energy associated with this
10.9
PHEN(
NORM HYDW Elastoplasticity memory of the grt:A The consolidati applying to a SaIIlJl Consolidation take Let us consider a completely unload!
195
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
transformation
will be such that
+ pdv §.: d£ + Pdv
dW
![: df.
(10.42)
rdc+ Pdv where s = a-
-
-
P =
r
=
1 -fT""I
3
1
-
+P
-fTkk
3
(10.43)
J~(~:~)
At least, instead of porosity, as regards clay materials it is preferable to talk about. void rat.io which is t.he ratio between porous and solid volumes that is e
=
Vp Vs ==> e
=
in which 0 is the porosity. One can deduce an important relationship differentiating (10.44) one is led to de = dVp Vs
-2 dVs
Vs if one neglects the compressibility (dV8 ~ dVp). Finally one obtains
clay content the classical Coussy (1989,
(10.44)
from (10.43) and (10.44); indeed, by
Vp ~ dVp Vs
(10.45)
of the matrix with respect to that of the pores
dv~--
10.9
0 1_ 0
de l+e
(10.46)
PHENOMENOLOGICAL STUDY: NORMALLY CONSOLIDATED CLAY UNDER HYDROSTATIC COMPRESSION
Elastoplasticity of clays is based on the following concept: the material has the memory of the greatest consolidation stress undergone in the course of its history. The consolidation concept was described in details in Chapter 9: it consists in applying to a sample a constant mean total stress and a uniform interstitial pressure. Consolidation takes a certain time having regard for the permeability of the material. Let us consider a previously consolidated clay sample (at a value P pJ) then completely unloaded, and given eo the void ratio of the sample after removal of the
=
196
Chapter
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
load. Let us load the sample again under a hydrostatic compression P (Fig. 10.6) and under drained conditions. One assumes that loading is sufficiently slow for the interstitial pressure to remain uniform at all times.
10. TbenDIII
with
To introdnc a state function 01
e
For an isothen
while, for a transfC strain will increase
where Cl:B is the de during this transli 0) one can calcula to determine the Ii
In(-P)
Fig. 10.6. Behaviour hydrostatic
p
of a clay under
compression.
10.9.2 Initially the material displays a non-linear elastic behaviour such that the void ratio decreases linearly versus logarithm of mean effective stress P with a slope equal to K known as "swelling coefficient". At pJ, irreversible strains appear. The material hardens and the maximum value reached by the loading (PJ in Fig. 10.6) is memorized as a new consolidation stress. The maximum consolidation stress appears therefore as an elastic limit but also as a hardening variable, so that an unloading according to path Be will be purely elastic and during a subsequent reloading, plasticity will appear in B and no longer in A. During hardening, the material exhibits again a linear behaviour of void ratio versus In (-P), but with a deeper slope >., known as "compressibility coefficient".
When the me; irreversibilities apj (known as compre for strains, the COI e= or taking account,
that is
10.9.1
Behaviour in the elastic domain
If the mean effective stress is less than the current consolidation stress, the non linear constitutive law is written (Fig. 10.6? eO
= eo
- K In( - P)
for the fact that P is negative since it is compressive.
POI.
(10.47)
or, with respect to the mean pressure P and the volumetric elastic strain [see Eq. (10.46)) 3The minus sign compensates
where e~ is the pi
I
It is necessary tition rule) is not since, infinitely so ism. Although ope hypothesis issued
197
Chapter 10. ThermoporoeIastoplasticity
P
P (Fig. 10.6) slow for the
= Poexp
with
ko
{ko(ve
-
(10.48)
va)}
= _1 + eo K;
To introduce in the state law (10.7) thermal phenomena, let us consider P as a state function of u" and T that is
dP = For an isothermal path (dT (~;)
(o~) ov
dve
+
T
(OP)
dT
oT
(10.49)
u.
= 0), (10.48) remains valid so that
= Poko exp {ko(v
T
e
-
(10.50)
va)}
while, for a transformation at constant mean effective stress (dP strain will increase in such a way that
ve
Va = aB(T
-
= 0) the
volumetric
- To)
(10.51)
where aB is the drained expansion coefficient (the interstitial pressure being constant during this transformation). Replacing (10.50) and (10.51) in (10.49) (with dP 0) one can calculate the second partial derivative which allows one after integration to determine the general non isothermal state law
=
P = Po [1 + exp{ko(ve
10.9.2 that the void a slope equal The material ~ is memorized Illlealrs therefore according plasticity will
-
va)} - exp{koaB(T
- To)}]
(10.52)
Behaviour in the plastic domain
When the mean effective stress P reaches the consolidation stress Pal, plastic irreversibilities appear: the void ratio evolves linearly versus In( - P) with a slope >. (known as compressibility coefficient) greater than K;. Assuming the partition rule for strains, the constitutive law will be written (Fig. 10.6) e
= e"
+ eP
= eo + >.In( -POI)
- K; In( -POI) - Aln( -P)
or taking account of (10.47) eP that is
= -(A
- K;)[ln(-P) -In(-PoI)]
P = POI exp {keeP - eb)} 1
(10.53)
k=->._K; where eb is the plastic void ratio associated with the initial consolidation
pressure
POI' (10.4 7) •• (see Eq. (10.46)]
It is necessary to point out that the small perturbation hypothesis (i.e. the partition rule) is not strictly in accordance with a non linear elastic constitutive law since, infinitely small of power more than one are taken into account in the formalism. Although open to criticism from a theoretical point of view, we will adopt this hypothesis issued from the Cambridge School.
198
10.10
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
Chapter
10. Thermop
however that, cone speaking refer to J: distinct structures..
BEHAVIOUR OF A CLAY UNDER DEVIATORIC STRESS CRITICAL STATE CONCEPT
=
To simplify, let us consider the case of a triaxial test (iI, (i2 (i3). After consolidation under P = POI (Fig.lD.7), let us maintain the confining pressure constant and increase the vertical load (iI, under drained conditions (that is at constant interstitial pressure p). In diagram, -Pr, the loading representative point follows path AB (Fig.lD.7) with a slope 3 since 4 dP = d(il
3
and
dr
= =dtr,
260 220
a e•..
180 140 100
60 20 0
elastic
f
limi t
(
IL- __ ~
__
~~_P
-JL-~
Pcr Fig. 10.7. Concept
of critical
state
The clay behaviour for such a loading path is displayed in Fig.lD.8. It can be divided into three phases: initially, the material is strained under growing deviatoric stress and undergoes a plastic volume decrease (contractant behaviour). The density of the sample increases, the material hardens. The second phase shows the appearance of an ideal plasticity stage: the material is then strained at constant plastic volume. This second type of behaviour has a limit, and gradually there is a strain localization in a shear band: this is the phenomenon known as bifurcation for which the behaviour becomes dilatant (dVB > D). Only the first two types of behaviour will be studied in this chapter; bifurcation will be dealt with in the third Part. We may mention 4Do not forget that
dlT~
is negative (compression).
The transition the change from a is associated with which the originaJi 1. Critical sta; P constant The critiea slope M . .Ii and of the i -Pr into • 'f)
= =rl P,
2. This first a density) de
flEJBaterial
strain
199
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
however that, concerning the appearance of a shear band, one can no longer strictly speaking refer to rheological behaviour given the separation of the sample into two distinct structures.
-s)•
positive
Z50
confining pres(that is at tative point
hardening
/
phase
ideal pi aslic behaviour (cri t.ic al slale)
,...--r-~~~'
ZZO
00 bar
180
~ .0 J::'
140 00 bar
100 00 bar 50 100 bar 20 0
Z
5
·1
8
10
12
14
Ev(l~) Fig. 10.8. Stress (remoulded
strain
curve under
deviatoric
loading
deep clay from France).
The transition phase (which can be ranked with perfect plasticity), characterizes the change from contract ant to dilatant behaviour and is known as critical state. It is associated with two fundamental properties, corroborated by experiment and on which the originality of the Cambridge model is built: 1. Critical state appears for a ratio between deviatoric stress r and mean stress P constant. The critical state is reflected therefore in diagram -Pr, by a straight line slope M. M, being a material constant independent of the loading parameters and ofthe initial void ratio (Fig. 10.7). The critical state line divides the plane -Pr into a contracting zone and a dilating zone. Introducing the parameter 1] = -r/ P one has
1]
1]
< M ==? dvP < 0
hardening
1]
= M ==? dvP = 0
critical state
> M ==? dVB > 0 ==?
shear band
2. This first condition is not sufficient: in the critical state, the void ratio (or the density) depends only on the mean effective stress, which is expressed by e
+ A In( -P) = Const. = r
(10.54)
200
Part II. Jl,fechanism of material
strain
r, is a characteristic of the material in the critical state only. In another, plastically admissible state, Eq. (10.54) will remain valid but the constant will be different from r (see paragr. 10.15).
10.11
EXPRESSION
dvP (10.55)
=T}-M
One can then calculate plastic strain work dWP such that [see Eq. (10.42)] dWP
one is led after iDIIi
1
The first condition and its three associated zones can be synthesized by writing that the plastic volume strain, plastic deviatoric strain ratio is such that dc;p
10. TheJDllllll
The constant CI for instance the •• the yield locus eqIII!
OF THE PLASTIC WORK
-
Chapter
= Pdd' + rde"
(10.56)
= -111Pde"
(10.57)
which is the eq~ hardening variable becomes greater; II Hardening caa consolidation pns point P -Pert r
=
that is, taking account of (10.55) dWP
so that the yield ••
Equation (10.57) used in the original model has been modified by Burland so as to obtain better forecasts for low ratios -r / P (10.58) which leads by taking account of (10.56) and introducing the variable dc;P dvp
10.12
DETERMINATION
10.13
to
2T} T}2-
(10.59)
M2
HARI
To determine d (10.54). Indeed, iIi associated void rail
OF THE YIELD LOCUS
An additional hypothesis has to be introduced plastic flow rule. In this case the flow rule is writteu''
iP
T}
now: the associativeness
= ~.of or
of the
(10.60)
Let us unload" line whose ordinal!
Finally, a new that is
4
Taking account of (10.59)
of
or
of -
r
27] T}2-M2
T}
=-P
(10.61)
oP 5A
star has been put after the plastic multiplier to avoid a confusion with the compressibility coefficient.
Eliminating eo ; of (10.47) to
Per increases d the critical state. ']
201
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
one is led after integration
to r2
P
+ M2 P = Const.
(10.62)
The constant can be calculated by choosing a particular "plastic" loading point, for instance the hydrostatic consolidation point r 0, P POI' One obtains finally the yield locus equation
=
=
(10.63) .lSilred by wri ting
(10.55) Eq. (10.42)]
which is the equation of ellipses in diagram -Pro In Eq. (10.63), POI appears as a hardening variable: if the sample is consolidated at a higher value, the elastic domain becomes greater; the material hardens. Hardening can also be characterized by the critical pressure Per instead of the consolidation pressure Po. Indeed, the ellipse (10.63) intercepts the critical line at point P = -Per, r = M Per such that
(10.56)
(10.57)
p __ POI er 2
Per>
0
(10.64)
so that the yield locus can also be written
(10.65) (10.58)
10.13 (10.59)
HARDENING
LAW
To determine the hardening law (i.e. how Per evolves), one has to use the condition
(10.54). Indeed, if Per is the current mean stress [positive according to (10.64)], the associated void ratio is such that (Fig. 10.9) Cer
- iveness of the
= Cer
Finally, a new elastic reloading (1 that is C
(10.61 )
r - ).In Per
(10.66)
Let us unload elastically the material from point A of Fig. 10.9. It follows a swelling line whose ordinate at origin Co will be Co
(10.60)
=
Eliminating of (10.47) to
Co
=
+ K In Per
(10.67)
< -P < Per) will follow the same swelling line Co
-
(10.68)
Kln(-P)
and Cer from (10.66), (10.67) and (10.68), one is led taking account Per = exp{ k( Co
+
cP
-
r)}
(10.69)
Per increases therefore during the hardening contractant phase and is constant in the critical state. The latter corresponds as indicated previously to perfect plasticity.
202
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Chapter 10. Th_
with [see Eq. (10.' e
To calculate II (10.70); taking aCl
eo eer
t---==------.-
K A
I-------~--_I
•• ~
To calculate II sider the three pa
In(-P}
Per Fig. 10.9. Hardening
law for the Carn-Clay.
-ovof = (1+~ P
Substitution of (10.69) in (10.65) gives a more general form to the yield locus, that is taking account of (10.47) r2 + M2 P2] [ -2M2P
f(P,r,e)=e+Kln(-P)+(A-K)ln
-r=o
dvP )
( dc.:P
where -UP is such •
that is by replacil
Equation (10.1 in the critical sta! calculated
PLASTIC FLOW RULE AND HARDENING MODULUS
For the Cam-Clay, the relationship parameters will be such that
3
(10.70)
In the generalized space of the Cambridge parameters (P, r, e), the Cam-Clay can be ranked with ideal plasticity. The yield surface (10.70) is fixed since the only parameters figuring in it are material constants (A, K, M and I'). The representative points localized outside the surface (10.70) are therefore inaccessible to experimentation. In the space of the loading parameters P and r on the other hand, Eq. (10.70) shows that e appears as a hardening variable. To complete the formalism, it is necessary now to calculate the plastic flow rule and the hardening modulus.
10.14
In (10.73)," will be written6
between plastic strain increments and loading
= (N')-l ==
( dP ) dr
(10.71)
6The prime inda: stress. 7 Remember tluI& i
_material
strain
Chapter
203
10. Thermoporoelastoplasticit.r
with [see Eq. (10.41)) 1 of
of
(AP)-l = HoP oP '" [ 1 of of HoP Or
.2. of
of HoP or 1 of of --H or or
1 (10.72)
To calculate the partial derivatives and the hardening modulus, let us differentiate
(10.70); taking account of (10.46) and (10.47), one obtains df
= (1 + e)dvP
21]('\ -
K)
- P(1]2 + M2) dr (10.73)
(M2 _1]2)(,\ - K) dP + P(1]2 + M2)
To calculate the elastoplastic matrix and the hardening modulus, one has to consider the three partial derivatives
.lID
the yield locus,
(10.70) tile Carn-Clay can the only param-
of ~=(l+e) P uv
of or
of oP
(M2 _1]2)(,\ - K) P(1]2 + M2)
In (10.73), vP appears as a new hardening variable so that the consistency condition will be written" _ 0 of . " of. (10.75) !:l ,.0+zuvPp V U£" where
iJP
is such that [see Eq. (10.24) and (10.60))
(10.76)
tative points lIIperiJ" mentation.
lland, Eq. (10.70) law"ism, it is nee-
(10.74)
that is by replacing (10.76) in (10.75) and taking account of (10.74)
(1 + e)(M2 _1]2)(,\ - K) P(1]2 + M2)
(10.77)
Equation (10.77) shows that before the critical state (71 < M), H is positive" while 0 (ideal plasticity). The plastic matrix (10.72) can now be in the critical state H calculated
=
(10.78) 18 and loading
(10.71)
6The prime index is introduced in (10.75) and (10.76) to indicate that £'is an effective state of stress. 7Remember that in (10.77) P is negative.
204
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Chapter 10. ThermopGI
for the plastic matrix and _ >.. - K (dP 1+e P
dtJ'
>.. -
K (
1+ e
for the incremental
10.15
+
=>
2TJdTJ ) TJ2 M2
+
2TJ
)
(2TJdTJ TJ2 M2
+
M2 - TJ2
dv
= dtf'
_ ~
(10.79)
dP)
+P
law.
APPLICATION OF THE CAMBRIDGE TO SOME SPECIFIC STRESS PATHS
Equations (10.79) can be integrated onto some particularly
10.15.1
dP
1+e P
MODEL
interesting stress paths.
Isotropic consolidation
In this case, r
= TJ = 0 which
leads by replacing in (10.70) to
e
+ >.. In( -P)
10.15.3
= .6..
This is charactee
with
.6.. =
r + (>" -
(10.43), K) In 2
(10.80)
The elastoplastic law has thus the same form, as for the critical state but the constant is no longer r but .6...
10.15.2
Oedos
Anisotropic
In this case, TJ = Const.
consolidation => r e
= -TJP
which leads by replacing in (10.70) to
+ >..In( -
P)
Let us seek a all For this purpose let· constant and equal • After substitutial
= e'l
TJo is therefore III
with (10.81 ) which is indeed a constant since TJ is constant in this type of test. Again the elastoplastic law is identical, but the constant is different. It will easily be verified that the three constants are such that r < e'l < .6..(Fig. 10.10). We may observe that in the specific case in which TJ = M (critical state) one has e'l = r. Lastly, for TJ = a (isotropic consolidation) one obtains e'l = .6...
which is a constant K,>" and M). Rather than 'lo. i
•
of material
strain
205
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
e
isotropic
consolidation
(10.79) anisotropic
consolidation
critical
state
MODEL
stress paths.
OL-
~
Fig. 10.10. Admissible
10.15.3
in the e-P
diagram.
Oedometric consolidation
This is characterized (10.43),
by a zero radial strain that is de3 = O. Taking account of
(10.80) state but the
states
-p
de
2 = --dv 3
(10.82)
Let us seek a constant value of 7] (and equal to 7]0) for which (10.82) is verified. For this purpose let us replace in (10.82) Eq. (10.79) with d7] = 0 (since 7] is assumed constant and equal to 7]0 in the course of loading). After substitutions, one obtains 7]2
+ 3A7]
-
M2 = 0
in (10.70) to A=I-}" 7]0
(10.83)
K
is therefore the root of Eq. (10.83) that is 7]0
(10.81 ) which is a constant
= ~ [V9A2 +4M2
-
(it depends only on the material
3A]
(10.84)
parameters
A and M, that is,
K,>.. and M). Rather than
7]0,
it is often better to use the oedometric T/
_
no -
0";,- _ 0"1
327]0
7]0
+3
ratio Ko such that (10.85)
206
Part II. Mechanism
or, after substitution
of (10.84) in (10.85) J(
10.15.4
of material strain
-- 1 [
One can also c phase (~0'2 = 0). 9
-1]
3(1-A)+v'9A2+4M2
0-2
Chapter 10. ThenDllll
(10.86)
Undrained triaxial test
that is by elirmna.
Let us consider a clay sample previously consolidated isotropically at a value Po (Fig. 10.11). According to Eq. (10.80) the corresponding initial void ratio eo is such that eo + Aln(-Po) - r - (A - K)ln2 = 0 (10.87)
or by replacing
(It
M 240
10.16
200
DIFFl
THEi
1;1 160 .0
';:;' 120
In the Cam-OI C1k see FAI-I equation of fluid (
[0P
80
=
40
Fig. 10.11. Typical undrained behaviour of clay for different pressur-es (r'eruoul ded deep clay from Francc). consolidation
Let us now increase 0'1 alone under undrained conditions. Given the matrix incompressibility, this condition is obtained by assuming a constant void ratio during loading so that (10.70) can be written (introducing 'fJ instead of r). eo
+ Aln(-P)
- (A - K)ln
p
2 2
'fJ
-
r=0
(10.88) p
1+ M2 A
Equalling (10.87) 1 - KIA)
which only de~ therefore similar' I To determine • equation. One ~ The first deriw i at constant mean;
and (10.88) one finally obtains
(introducing
the
constant
=
(10.89)
By substitutisq led to
(
_.aterial strain
207
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
One can also calculate interstitial 0). During the latter phase (Ll0"2
=
pressure increase resulting from the deviatoric
(10.86) LlO"l
P that is by eliminating
= Po + -3- + Llp
LlO"l
===} Llp = P - Po
at a value Po -.io eo is such
+ -r
3
or by replacing (10.89) (10.87) (10.90)
10.16
DIFFUSIVITY EQUATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE CAM-CLAY
In the Cam-Clay, one assumes elastic and plastic incompressibility
of the matrix
[0P = c1k see Eq. (10.20)]. Taking account of Eqs (8.102) to (8.105), the constitutive equation of fluid (10.4) becomes
(10.91)
the matrix inratio during
_d
(10.88)
,".
the
constant (10.89)
which only depends on fluid properties. The hydraulic diffusivity equation will be therefore similar to Eq. (8.106). To determine the thermal diffusivity equation, it is necessary to know the entropy equation. One will proceed as in Chapter 8, paragraph 8.6. The first derivative of Eq. (8.55) consists in a non isothermal undrained elastic test at constant mean total stress for which Eqs (10.52) and (10.91) are written
+ Po exp{ kOCkd
p
Po
p
Po +
By substituting led to
- Po exp{ koCl:B(T - To)}
~~(-Ckk) + Cl:jKj(T
(10.92)
- To)
the first Eq. (10.92) in the second and after differentiation,
one is (10.93)
208
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
The second derivative consists in an undrained isothermal elastic transformation P O"kk
3 +P that is after substitution
=
=
Kj Po - -fkk
e
00
[O"Zk]
3 + Po
Chapter
10. Thermot
test. In diagram P (point C) will be I
(10.94) e
exp{kofkk}
r
of the first Eq. (10.94) in the second and derivation,
(10.95)
The last two partial derivatives [Eqs (8.58) and (8.63)] being identical, the entropy equation takes the form 8
=
80
+ m8~ + POCiBko
+ajKj
(f
kk-
:)
exp{a8ko(T
- TO)}fkk
+ ;:CEkk(T-To)
(10.96)
The thermal diffusivity equation is then easily obtained by substituting (10.96) in Eq. (8.107). Let us recall that this equation assumes that no thermal dissipation takes place in the plastic process.
10.17
e, ~
THE CONCEPT OF OVERCONSOLIDATION APPLICATION TO TRIAXIAL TESTS
1
Up to now, we have only considered normally consolidated samples: the beginning of the deviatoric phase always began for P = Po, (consolidation pressure of the sample). Other cases may however be encountered: let us imagine a consolidated clay under an overburden Po, then as a consequence of erosion, the lithostatic stress diminishes markedly. The material is therefore in the present state subjected to a loading P~ much lower than its actual consolidation pressure (maximum reached during its history): it is said to be overconsolidated and the ratio of overconsolidation is defined as N The value of the overconsolidation behaviour of a clay.
10.17.1
=
Po
(10.97)
p~
ratio plays a decisive part in the rheological
Undrained overconsolidated
test
Let us consider a normally consolidated clay sample under a mean effective stress Po (Fig. 10.12). Given eo the initial void ratio. From Po, let us carry out an undrained
R~
al'material
strain
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
209
test. In diagram P, r, one then follows the curve PoBC [Eq. (10.89)]. The critical state (point C) will be reached, with a mean effective stress equal to (10.94)
P2
=
Po 2A
(10.98)
r
tlerivation,
(10.95) M
.meal, the entropy
(10.96)
o~-L
-J~
__ ~+-~
~-P
-L
e
i - the beginning '" pressure of the a consolidated lithostatic stress subjected to . - urn reached OIerconsolidation
critical
(10.97)
state
s
~
Fig. 10.12. Influence ratio
on the stress
of the overconsolidated path (after
Desptuz, 1987).
-p
r
210
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
In diagram e, P, the undrained path, corresponds to line PC (initial consolidation follows path OP). Let us now imagine (still starting from Po) stopping the loading in B (still under undrained conditions). During path PoB, the material has hardened, and the initial elastic limit (passing through Po but not represented on the diagram) moves farther. In particular it passes through point B(r, Pd which is expressed by
(10.99) in which P~ is the new consolidation pressure. It can be calculated by taking account of the fact that B also belongs to the undrained path normally consolidated PoB that is [Eq. (10.89)]
Pl=
Po
[1+ ;2]
A
'h WIt
1]
=--r PI
(10.100)
Eliminating r between (10.99) and (10.100), one is led to
Chapter
10. Th~
If the test was: equal to 2, and III To study the ~ loading point IIJB! constant (and stiI not maintain the consolidate agaia PI (intersection p passing through , If the deviatOl travels along the w loading point rem the two critical sII point is not sit1Ul The represenfil the first plastic in one meets point (;
(10.101 ) An unloading from B being purely elastic the constitutive equation will be e + JCIn( -P)
= Const.
(10.102)
In this case till tion ratio compra
According to Eq. (10.102), as the void ratio does not vary, (it remains equal to the initial void ratio eo), the effective mean stress P remains therefore constant during this unloading (vertical path B Pion Fig. 10.12) while in diagram e, P, the figurative point remains fixed. To understand the effect of the overconsolidation ratio under undrained conditions (in other words at a constant void ratio equal to eo), let us reload the material starting from Pl' The present consolidation pressure being the overconsolidation ratio Nl is therefore such that
P;,
(10.103) Given the choice of Ps ; it can easily be verified that this ratio N; is comprised between 1 and 2. One can moreover, taking account of (10.101), relate pressure PI to the initial consolidation pressure Po and to the overconsolidation ratio Nl that is
(10.104) Starting from PI and reloading the material (still under undrained conditions with void ratio equal to eo), one follows a vertical elastic path PIB. At point B, the first plastic irreversibilities appear. One follows therefore, as far as the critical state in C, the undrained path normally consolidated BC. During this phase, the material hardens and the final yield locus corresponds to a consolidation pressure P; = 2P2.
A typical exau ical analysis (ovee
lllMerial strain
If the test was begun at point P2, the overconsolidation ratio would then had been equal to 2, and the critical state reached according to P2C, in a purely elastic path . To study the effect of an overconsolidation ratio greater than 2, the representative loading point must evolve towards P3 (Fig. 10.12) while maintaining the void ratio constant (and still equal to eo). Since from point P2 elastic unloading P2P3 would not maintain the void ratio constant (path CR in diagram e; P), it is necessary to consolidate again the sample (necessarily under drained conditions) until pressure PI (intersection point of the isotropic consolidation path and the elastic exponential passing through point eo, P3) then unload until P3 (elastic exponential SP3). If the deviator is gradually increased in P3, (under undrained conditions), one travels along the vertical line P3C3 in diagram P, r while in diagram e, P, the figurative loading point remains fixed. When the critical straight line is crossed in C3, one of the two critical state conditions is not respected. Indeed in diagram e, P, the loading point is not situated on the critical state path (point C for a void ratio equal to eo). The representative point crosses therefore the critical straight line r M P, and the first plastic irreversibilities appear only in B3. One can show experimentally that one meets point C by a straight line of slope m (which is a new material parameter)
. •• B (still under .C
211
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
aad the initial moves farther.
(10.99)
(10.100)
=
(10.101)
(10.102)
r = m(-P)
I
+ (M
(-Po) - m)2A"
(10.105)
In this case the curve r, s, displays a peak (Fig. 10.13) while, for an overconsolidation ratio comprised between 1 and 2, it does not.
r
2
(10.103)
axi al strain
o~--------------------------~~ (10.104) Fig. 10.13. Influence of the overconsolidated ratio on the stress strain curve.
A typical example is presented in Fig. 10.14 and shows the validity of the theoretical analysis (overconsolidation ratios of 1, 2 and 12).
212
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Chapter 10. Th~
M=O.90 2
~
•
•
Ii
•
OCR=l
• •
• -P(bar)
3 Fig. 10.14. Typical example (after
of an overconsolidated
clay
D'espax. 1987).
o
10.17.2
Drained overconsolidated test
In the case of drained triaxial tests (slope + 3 in diagram P - r) for samples previously consolidated under PI, the influence of the overconsolidation ratio can be summarized as follows (Fig. 10.15). For a normally consolidated sample one follows the elastoplastic path AlGI. For an initial mean stress comprised between P3 and PI (for example Pd, one follows the elastic exponential DIBI at the beginning then, as soon as one crosses the elastic limit in BI, the plastic path B, G1 as far as the critical state. The case of an initial mean stress equal to P3 poses no problem: the behaviour remains purely elastic as far as the critical state (point G3). Lastly, if the initial mean stress is smaller than P3 (for instance P2), it can be shown that one first follows an elastic exponential D2B2 with decrease of the void ratio until a peak is reached (point B2) followed by an increase in volume until the critical state is reached in point G2. Point B2 which corresponds to the elastic limit is situated on a curve OB2C3 of equation
r = m(-P)
+ (M
- m)
[(-;I)r
(_p)l-A
e~
(10.106) e
-
«material strain
Chapter
213
10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
r
Cl
•..•..
)
O~~L-
~
~"_-P
-4__~~~~
critical
isotropic
consolidation
(10.106) e
Fig. 10.15. Influence under
drained
of consolidation
conditions
(after
ratio
on stress
Despax. 1987).
path
state
214
Chapter 10. Th~
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
C. THE CONCEPT OF INTERNAL FRICTION
10.19 THE]
THE MOHR-COULOMB CRITERION
In diagram tTr.p is known for ob. triaxial compressil cut the straight. iii
In numerous geomaterials, plastic strains take their origin from relative slippage of the grains. The most conventional criteria of rock mechanics derive from this concept. Therefore, although the subject has been developed by numerous authors it seemed essential to examine in detail what is perhaps one of the oldest concepts of rock mechanics: the Mohr-Coulomb criterion first formulated in 1773.
with the directioa criterion reveals a two extreme priDC
10.18 THE CONCEPT OF INTERNAL FRICTION
AND OF COHESION
The concept of slippage is intimately linked to that of friction. Let us imagine two grains 1 and 2 (Fig. 10.16) welded together by a glue of resistance c, and let us subject the whole to a normal stress a and to a shear stress T.
(J
• grain
glue (cohesion
1
t
c)
Equation (10.1 stresses (j[, UIII (. the triangles OO'(
gr ain 2
Fig 10.16. Physical
meaning
of Mohr-Coulomb
AB=~
criterion.
The contact between the two grains produces a frictional force proportional to the normal stress a and opposed to the motion of the two grains. The relative slippage will only be possible if (10.107) in which J1. is known as internal friction
coefficient and c cohesion of the material.
i
I
f
with
In Eq. (10.111),
Chapter
10.19
215
10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
THE MOHR COULOMB STRAIGHT
LINE
=
In diagram U - T, Eq. (10.107) represents a straight line of slope Jl- tan
:;:"
11"
4
2
/3=---
(10.108)
with the direction of the principal major stress UI (Fig. 10.17). The Mohr-Coulomb criterion reveals one of its essential properties: the elastic limit depends oniy on the two extreme principal stresses and is independent of the intermediate component U II.
7
; Fig. 10.17. Mohr-Coulomb
criterion.
Equation (10.107) can moreover be represented as a function of the principal stresses UI, UIII (UI is the major and UIII the minor) instead of U and T. Considering the triangles OO'C and ABC in Fig. 10.17 2
AB
=
UI -
OA =
UfII
UI
+ UfII
.
SlD
AB = AC
Uf -
c cot o
(10.109)
(10.110)
2ccot
UIIf
= -Co
2cc~s
q=
with
Co =
UIII
-
==> (10.107)
OC =
2
2
+ qUI 1 + sin
(10.111)
In Eq. (10.111), Co represents the elastic limit under uniaxial compression.
216
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
Chapter
10. Th~
Similarly one can seek the elastic limit in uniaxial traction by making in (10.111) =0
p~
(7II1
(71
=
Co q
=
2ccosr.p
1 + sin r.p
= To
I
(10.112)
Ii
..
finally the criterion can be written
I
n.
'-
~
V:
(10.113)
Vtj
1
The six eqwdi1j
10.20
~
YIELD LOCUS IN THE SPACE OF PRINCIPAL STRESSES f
Given (Fig. 10.18) a sample under a triaxial state of stress (71, (72, (73. These stresses (Arabic index) are associated with directions x, y, z. The Roman index, that is (71, (7II and (7II1 will define the intensity (major, intermediate, minor).
They describei towards the tradij axis. :
,
,
~
i
I
I
J
i I
.~
i
!
hydrostatic
axis
/
---- ••... i Fig. 10.lB. Yield locus
of the Mohr+Cou lorub cri tcrio n
(after Palll. 1968).
The Mohrthe hydrostatic' (72
To find a 3D representation of the Mohr-Coulomb criterion in the principal stresses space, let us consider the six possibilities of sequencing the principal stresses. To each of the major-minor pairs corresponds an equation of type (10.111) defining a plane in the principal stresses space. The whole is shown in the table hereafter:
+ (73)/V3.
to a straight . symmetry axes Fig. 10.19 rep the hexagon criterion: the
217
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
in (10.111) Plane (10.112)
(10.113)
r
I II III IV V VI
Order (13 (13 (11 (11 (12 (12
< (12 < (11 < (13 < (12 < (11 < (13
Equation of type (10.111)
(TIll
(11
minor stress
major stress
(13
(11
(13
(13
(12
(13
(11
(12
(11
(11
(13
(11
(12
(13
(12
(12
(11
(12
< (11 < (12 < (12 < (13 < (13 < (11
= -Co + = -Co + = -Co + = =C« + = +C« + = -Co +
q(11 q(12 q(12 q(13 q(13 q(11
The six equations have a common point such that (11
=
(12
t
(T3. These index, that
~.
•
=
(13
Co = S; = --q-l = c cot e
(10.114)
They describe a pyramid (Fig. 10.18), the apex of which is pushed back in S; towards the tractions and whose axis (such that (11 (12 (13) is known as hydrostatic axzs.
=
).
a'J
=
'fresco
hexagon
t
,..
t Fig. 10.19 Yield locus in a devi atoric for different
values
of
plane
'P.
The Mohr-Coulomb criterion can also be represented in a plane perpendicular to the hydrostatic axis known as deviatoric plane, graduated by the parameter p «(11 + (12 + (13)/-13. Any deviatoric plane intercepting each face of the pyramid according to a straight line, the yield locus will appear as a "non-regular" hexagon with three symmetry axes (projection of the three axes (11, (12, (13 in the deviatoric plane). Fig. 10.19 represents these hexagons for different values of ip. In particular for ip 0, the hexagon becomes regular: one is then in a special case of the Mohr-Coulomb criterion: the "Tresca criterion".
=
t
=
218
10.21
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
SPECIAL
CASE OF TRIAXIAL
Chapter 10. Thermop
TEST
Pial I D
=
In rock mechanics, the triaxial test (for which CT2 0'3) is of special interest. In this case, we are therefore particularly interested in the intersection of the pyramidal yield locus with the plane 0'2 = 0'3. This plane is made up of the two straight lines common respectively to planes III, IV and I, VI (for 0'2 = 0'3, 0'1 cannot be the intermediate stress component). The yield locus is displayed in Fig. 10.20 in a diagram of absciss .../20'2 .../20'3 and of ordinate 0'1 in order to respect the different proportions. Construction of the yield locus is relatively easy from the three points V (hydrostatic traction Su), T (uniaxial traction To) and C (uniaxial compression Co).
n
n, V
=
V
In plane stress ~ pseudo- hydrostatic
=
=
-'
v
hydrostatic
Ol'-------'--- __~
axis "./
""
.- -'
-'
-'
" planes
III and IV
,
.
;
!
Fig. 10.20. Yield locus
in a triaxial
plane.
Figure 10.20 reveals a second essential property of the criterion: plastification of the material is not possible under hydrostatic compression, the yield locus being open in the third quadrant ..
I
10.22
SPECIAL
CASE OF BIAXIAL LOADING
Another interesting special case is that of the biaxial test (0'3 = 0), for it leads to very different conclusions. Again, one has to consider the six possibilities of sequencing the stresses, and this is summarized in the table hereafter. C.ases I and II, corresp~nd to uniaxial tension, cases IV and V, to uniaxial compression.
10.23
TENS
Up to now we "compression" . In fact, for gn: deviators (a pheno
_ material strain Chapter
219
10. Thermoporoelastoplastici~y
Plane
Order
Cfl
I II
Cfl Cf2
> >
III
Cf2
> 0>
IV V
0> 0>
> >
VI
Cf2 Cfl
Cf2 Cft
Equation of type (10.113)
CfIlI
Cft
Cf2
Cf2
Cfl
0 0
Cfl
Cf2
0
Cft
Cft
0 0
Cf2
Cft
Cft
Cf2
> 0 > 0
Cf2
> 0>
Cft
CfIl
Cf2
0
Cft
= To = To =1 Co = -Co = =C« =1
Cfl,
Cf2 Cf2 _
To Cft Cf2 Cft _
Cf2
To
~
Cf2
Co
In plane stress (Fig. 10.21), it is thus possible to plastify the material under biaxial pseudo-hydrostatic loading (Cfl Cf2), the elastic domain being closed. At least, if cp 0, To Co; and the yield locus becomes a regular hexagon, that of Tresca.
=
=
=
hydrostatic
axis
/ / /
TO
...1----.,./
/
-CO / / /
IV
/ / / /
/ /
V
/ /
/
,
/
Fig. 10.21. Mohr-Coulomb biaxial
10.23
t
I t
TENSION
state
of stress
yield locus
under
( (13 =0).
CUTOFFS
Up to now we have not made any physical distinction between "traction" and "compression" . In fact, for growing mean compression, geomaterials resist increasingly to high deviators (a phenomenon due of course to internal friction) whereas in traction, plas-
220
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
ticity only occurs in connection with the major stress, independently of the two others. In fact, in tension friction has no action since the contact does not exist. Thus, the value of To proposed [Eq. (10.112)] is only an ideal and purely theoretical value. These considerations have led certain authors (Paul, 1961) to modify the yield locus by introducing into the traction domain a cube-shaped yield locus intersecting the initial pyramid by three planes perpendicular to the axes (Fig. 10.22) at a distance equal to To, (real and not ideal traction resistance).
Chapter 10. Thermopa
where F(O") is a fm mentally. This fune of the preceding ail The fundamental PI! particular the indep stress component. j
~
... .0
0.8
0 [/)
'0
.: oj
0.6
[/)
;::l 0
..c: ..,
~\0-
0.4
0.2
0 0
Fig. 10.22. Mohr-Coulomb
modified
with tension
Paul. 1968).
cutoff (after
cr i te r io n
10.25 10.24
GENERALIZATION OF MOHR-COULOMB CRITERION: CONCEPT OF INTRINSIC CURVE
While the Mohr-Coulomb Criterion models fairly accurately the behaviour of low cohesion soils, for rocks the forecasts are often poor particularly at low mean stresses. In fact, for material such as sandstone, the internal friction coefficient is not a constant and depends on the stress level. This phenomenon can be clearly explained by the presence of microcracks and will be developed in the third part. At present, we will content ourselves with introducing the concept of intrinsic curve: the irreversible strains occur when the shear stress 7 on a given plane reaches a limit value as a function of the normal stress on this plane, that is
171 = F(O")
(lO.115)
THE N THEP
It is often assmJI locus. This hypothe model. For the inlli that plasticity is all friction coefficient •• Very often, expe only observed just I has to be consideee yield locus and the model.
221
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
where F(a-) is a function dependent on the material and to be determined experimentally. This function known as intrinsic curve in diagram (J', T is a generalization of the preceding criterion, for which the internal friction coefficient J1. depends on (J'. The fundamental properties of the Mohr-Coulomb criterion remain therefore valid, in particular the independence of the criterion with respect to the intermediate principal stress component. An example is presented in Fig. 10.23.
~ .•.. .n
0.8
0
en
"'s:: "
0.6
11l
en ::l
0 ..c: ...,
~10-
0.4
0.2
o o
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
IQ-Kthousands of bar) Fig. 10.23. Intrinsic
10.25
1 ,
..
(10.115)
curve
of Vosges Sandstone.
THE NON-ASSOCIATIVENESS OF THE PLASTIC FLOW RULE
It is often assumed in plasticity that the plastic potential is identical to the yield locus. This hypothesis of normality has been used in the framework of the Cambridge model. For the intrinsic curve model, the hypothesis of normality (Fig. 10.24) shows that plasticity is accompanied by a plastic dilatancy d€p the greater the internal friction coefficient is large. The dilatancy factor j3 is defined as the ratio de" / diP. Very often, experiments do not confirm these forecasts, and generally dilatancy is only observed just before and possibly after the rupture peak. A "Mohr Coulomb" has to be considered with a non associated plastic flow rule; by differentiating the yield locus and the plastic potential. Such is the case with the Rudniki and Rice model.
222
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
Chapter
10. Thermop
Rudniki and Hi 7
f(7f,7') =1
Expression (10_ defining identically Let us introdue
a~
J-
that is after derivat
_
Fig. 10.24. Non associativiness intrinsic curve criterion.
For a non-assoe yield locus f
of the
where
10.26
THE RUDNIKI AND RICE MODEL In their moi
To understand Rudniki and Rice's approach, let us express in two dimensions the principal stresses as functions of components Uxx, UYY' uxy
C1I
C1II
= 21(C1xx =
~(uxx
+ C1yy) + + Uyy)
-
[2
C1xy
+ 41(C1xx
[u;y
+ ~(uxx
-
-
C1yy)
2] !
-r
Let us now decompose the tensor g into its mean component component s.) such that
2 s.,
u'3 -
(f
(10.116)
and its deviatoric
(10.117) o'J(f
and let us consider the generalized shear 7' such that
7'
in which j3 is the d the plastic strain ill a standard law. 'l'l Eqs (10.40) and (UI of 9 and f is writtl
1 ]! = [2s.,s'3
Finally the (10.118)
Under these conditions, the principal stresses can be written (10.119) (f-7'
COllI
«material
strain
223
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
Rudniki and Rice introduce the yield locus f(O=,1') f(O=,1')
= l' + J1*0= = c"
with
such that
= sin
J1*
(10.120)
Expression (10.120) can be easily generalized to the case of 3D state of stress by defining identically 0= and 1'. Let us introduce matrix Qsuch that
that is after derivations Q For a non-associated yield locus f
_ 'J -
s'J
21'
+
J1* 0
3
(10.121)
'J
plastic flow rule, the plastic potential 9 is different from the (10.122)
where
ag
Pij
=--
au.)
In their model, Rudniki and Rice assume a plastic potential such that dimensions the (10.123)
(10.116)
..t ,
in which f3 is the dilatancy factor defined in paragraph 10.25. Therefore, for f3 = 0, the plastic strain increment will be parallel to the l' axis while for f3 J1* , one obtains a standard law. The calculation of the incremental law is obtained by generalizing Eqs (10.40) and (10.41) to non associated plastic flow rule which, given the definitions of Qand fis written
=
its deviatoric A-"
••
(10.117)
•• (10.124)
elastoplastic matrix of the RRM will be such that
G(OmkOnl (¥Skl
(10.119)
H+Q:1,::f
1,:-1+ ~(Q@f) Finally the constitutive
(10.118)
A:Q@P:A -
+ OmlOkn) + (I< -
2~)
OkiOmn
+ f3I< Okl) (¥smn + kJ1* omn ) H + G + J1* I< f3
(10.125)
224
10.27
Part II. l\1echanism
of material strain
Chapter 10. TherIIJCIIMI
Cu is known as ' idation pressure. II state is independess criterion is reduced only dependent on t
CORRELATION BETWEEN CAMBRIDGE AND MOHR-COULOMB MODELS
The concept of critical state written in the principal stress space makes it possible to define for a clay an apparent cohesion and an angle of internal friction. Indeed, one has (Fig. 10.25)8 r
= -A1P
=
I
==::}
0"1
2M+3 3-M
I
(10.126)
0"2
7
3M 6+M
a~__--~~----~-------------Fig 10.25. Critical
state
in the Mohr di agr am.
D.APPL that is by comparing with (10.111) (these are compressions
Co = 0
2M+3 3-M
s=
==::}
O"Hf
=
O"~)
TO TIm (10.127)
or again c
=O
. sin
= 6 3.M +M
(
10.1
28)
Under undrained conditions on the other hand, taking account of equation (10.89), the critical state will be such that r
= -M P ==::}
I
0"1
I
= 0"2
MP
+ """""2Ao
( 10.129)
that is
Co = _ ~~o
q = 1
(10.130)
or again
O"~
are effective stresses.
C«
=-
MPo
21+1\
(10.131 )
Among rock I logical behaviour. It as "coccolithes". 'l1 erty whose impact 0 reaches 45 % or IIlOI has become essential velopment of chalq been observed (se•• considerable. Numerous exped is highly complex •• the gradual poroSity: multiplicity of elastcJj ticated constitutive 1 to explain the rheola
of material strain
225
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
Cu is known as "undrained cohesion". It increases proportionally to the consolidation pressure. Eq. (10.131) shows that, under undrained conditions the critical state is independent of the deviator since the angle of internal friction is zero. The criterion is reduced to a Tresca criterion (Fig. 10.26) and the undrained cohesion is only dependent on the consolidation pressure Po.
(10.126)
n
-
a-
Fig. 10.26. Tresca-type in undrained
Cu
'J criterion
for a clay
conditions.
D. APPLICATION OF THE LADE MODEL TO THE ELASTOPLASTIC BEHAVIOUR (10.127)
(10.128) ofequation
(10.89),
(10.129)
(10.130)
(10.131)
OF CHALK Among rock materials, Chalk is certainly the one with the most complex rheological behaviour. It originates from the sedimentation of planktonic organisms known as "coccolithes". This chemically very pure rock (99 % Ca C03) possesses a property whose impact on mechanical behaviour is decisive: its porosity which frequently reaches 45 % or more. In recent years, a rheological understanding of this material has become essential in petroleum engineering. Indeed, as a consequence of the development of chalky oil deposits in North Sea, very large payzones compactions have been observed (several %), and their transmissions to the surface (subsidence) are considerable. Numerous experimental studies carried out have dearly shown that this behaviour is highly complex and exhibits very substantial plastic irreversibilities resulting from the gradual porosity destruction, both under deviatoric and hydrostatic loadings. The multiplicity of elastoplastic mechanisms has led certain authors to increasingly sophisticated constitutive laws. However, we shall see that two mechanisms are sufficient to explain the rheological behaviour of this extremely capricious material.
226
10.28
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
PHENOMENOLOGICAL STUDY UNDER HYDROSTATIC LOADING
Chapter 10. Thermopa
10.29
One of the essential characteristics of a "Mohr-Coulomb" material is never to enter plasticity under hydrostatic loading. Now, while this is true for conventional sedimentary materials (sandstones, limestones, dolomites), for very porous rocks like chalk (0 > 40%), the experimental reality is very different. Indeed, under growing hydrostatic loading, the stress-strain curve offers three very distinct zones (Fig. 10.27). Firstly, a linear elastic zone OA rarely extending above 2 % of strain (and limited to a hydrostatic effective pressure of 50 to 150 bar). For this value, plastic irreversibilities appear in the form either of a perfect plasticity stage (AB) or of a smooth positive hardening zone.
PHENC DEVIA
Under deviatoric fluenced by the COD pressure (Fig. 10.281 precedes a pseudo-I rheological significai
600 500
~
400
,D
~
I
300
Ie 200 100 0
2
4
6
8
10
~V/V(%) Fig 10.27. Typical behaviour under
hydrostatic
of a porous
compression
stress
chalk
state.
This zone generally covers a range of substantial strains (over 10%). Lastly, the curve becomes inflected quite sharply (Be), the final slope being of the order of the initial elastic slope. This behaviour becomes even more complex if one carries out successive loading-unloading cycles (Fig. 10.27): the elastic bulk modulus increases very sharply with loading, particularly when the final zone is reached.
Fig. strei
At 75 bar of COD peak is observed; tl vertical strain of 10 Lastly at 150 be practically disappea pression) and only 1
227
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplastticity
10.29
PHENOMENOLOGICAL STUDY UNDER DEVIATORIC LOADING
Under deviatoric loading, the behaviour of chalk is more conventional but is influenced by the confining level as can be seen in Fig. 10.28. At 25 bar of confining pressure (Fig.10.28a) an elastic zone is observed during the deviatoric phase; this precedes a pseudo-brittle peak and a negative hardening zone which no longer has rheological significance (appearance of a shear band, see Chapter 13).
1
1
2
4
f
E1(lII)
E1(lII) 4
8
10i -021 c
100
50
4
B
Fig. 10.28. Behaviour of a porous chalk under stress state for different confining pressures.
deviatoric
At 75 bar of confining pressure, (Fig. 10.28b) the elastic zone is still large, but no peak is observed; the material hardens positively during the elastoplastic phase (a vertical strain of 10 % is reached at the end of the test). Lastly at 150 bar of confining pressure, (Fig.l0.28c) the initial elastic zone has practically disappeared (the material has left the elastic domain in hydrostatic compression) and only the positive hardening phase is observed.
us increases
, I
228
Part II. Mechanism
of material strain
Chapter
10. Thermop
Chalk offers therefore two very distinct types of behaviour in the stress space: on the one hand, an "implosive" mechanism due to the destruction of the porosity under hydrostatic loading, on the other, a mechanism highly dependent on the confining pressure (therefore on the internal friction) under deviatoric loading. It is therefore essential to define for chalk two distinct elastoplastic mechanisms.
10.30
THE "TWO-POTENTIALS"
LADE MODEL
In this model the total strain increment dt:<) is divided into an elastic increment dt::), a plastic collapse increment dt:~) and a deviatoric plastic increment dt:f) so that in accordance with the partition rule (small perturbations) one can write
tri axial plol
(10.132)
10.30.1
Elastic behaviour.
Loading-unloading
modulus
The loading-unloading cycles in Fig. 10.27 show a very sharp increase in the hydrostatic bulk modulus with the mean stress ff ( 10.133) where K; is the initial bulk modulus (in other words under zero confining pressure), Pa the atmospheric pressure (its purpose is to makes the equations homogeneous) and n a material constant. On the other hand the model assumes a Poisson's ratio loading independent. Young's modulus follows therefore a law identical to Eq. (10.133).
10.30.2
Elastoplastic
behaviour under deviatoric loading
Under deviatoric loading, the yield locus is an "internal friction" cone for which the friction angle decreases when the mean stress increases. To take this curvature into account Lade proposes for the yield locus an equation in terms of the first and third stress invariant that is (10.134) in which h = 0'1 + 0'2 + 0'3 Is = O'!O'20'3 m 2: O. In the principal stresses space Eq. (10.134) is a pseudo-conical surface whose projections in a triaxial plane and in a deviatoric plane are represented on Fig. 10.29. Under growing continuous loading, the surface increases in size around the hydrostatic axis by means of the hardening parameter fp which evolves with loading. In conformity with the positive hardenable plasticity hypothesis, the yield locus corresponds to the highest value reached by Ip during the material history.
The value of fp nitely and, for a T.iI bifurcation phenoo motion of two rigi~ Equation (10.C m and '1]1. These all (Pal h). Let us no (confining pressure The hardening I the basis of the aJ curves are extre~ pressure, the more elastic zone is rem. This phenomes where Wp is the pi
'1]1(0'2) (maximl (Fig. 10.30); but, tI increases with inCII
229
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
hydrostatic rupture
triaxial
axis
surface
plane
/ /
(10.132)
/
hydrostatic
/
/ ,/
hydrostatic
plane
axis
,/ ,/ / /
/ ,/
/
,/ ,/ ,/
",teal!;e in the hy-
(10.133)
Fig. 10.29. Yield locus of the Lade model under deviatoric stress state (after Lade. 1977).
t locus an equation
f (10.134)
~
t
I
~
i
!
The value of fp has a limit however: indeed, the material does not harden indefi7]1, a shear band appears (see Chapter 13); this is the nitely and, for a value of fp bifurcation phenomenon followed by a softening phase corresponding to the relative motion of two rigid structures. Equation (10.134) contains (aside from the hardening parameter) two parameters m and 7]1. These can be easily determined from rupture tests in a diagram (Ir /13 - 27), (Pa/h). Let us note that m is a true constant while 7]1 depends on the mean stress (confining pressure). The hardening (i.e. evolution of fp with loading) law needs now to be specified on the basis of the experimental results presented in Fig. 10.28: indeed the stress-strain curves are extremely dependent on the confining pressure. The higher the confining pressure, the more "the plastic effect" dominates "the peak effect" and the more the elastic zone is reduced. This phenomenon appears again very clearly in a diagram fp, Wp (Fig. 10.30) where Wp is the plastic strain work such that
=
Wp
=
J L•
a;
d
cf
(10.135)
7]1(0'2) (maximum value reached by fp on each curve) is fairly 0'2 dependent (Fig. 10.30); but, the amount of plastic strain work required to reach the peak largely increases with increasing confining pressure.
230
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
40r------r------.------r----~~----_.----__,
Chapter 10. Th_"
10
3
0.3
0.1 0]
o~
~
L_
o
~
~
3 (WplPaJ
2
~
4
Fig. 10.30. Hardening
~
5
6
law tp=F(1p)
(after Lade,1977).
This suggests the use of a hardening isotropic law such that
I» = 7]1
(;;~&k)~ ~::;:&:p e
where q and W;-&k are two functions of 0"2 experimentally Deriving fp with respect to Wp, that is
(10.136)
with for ins
determined,
w;e&k_Wl'
e
q
Wpea.k p
(10.137)
=
=
fp is maximum for Wp W;-&k, that is for fp 7]1 and the curve fp (Wp) is tangent at the origin (since 8fp/8Wp is infinite), (q > 1). The hardening law (10.136) depends on two functions of 0"2, that is W;-&k and q. Experience shows that q is a linear decreasing function of 0"2 (Fig.10.31b), while W;e&k is an increasing function of log 0"2 (Fig.10.31a). The criterion being based on the concept of internal friction, the plastic flow rule is not associated, the plastic strain increment being parallel to the direction of the shear which induces the slippage. The plastic potential 9p is therefore not identical to the yield locus. In Lade's model, the function proposed for gp is of the type gp
=
Ir -
[27
+ 7]2
( ~;
)
m] 13
(10.138)
The choice of this function derives directly from experimental observations. Its form is relatively similar to the yield locus (10.134), but the angles at the apex in a triaxial plane are greater than those of the yield locus.
which finally
231
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
10 r-r-r-r-r-r-rr--:
.--.-1 --,---., (a)
3
4~------~------~----~ (bl
0.3
0.1
L-- __
----'-
0.3
.J--.__ ----'__ --------' 3 10 30
0'--------'-----'-------1 0
5
(
10
15
(0'2'Pa) peak of Wp and q with
Fig. 10.31. Evolution confining
pressure
(after
Lade. 1977)
The plastic flow rule will be written under these conditions d
(10.136)
p _ Cj -
\
ogp
(10.139)
Ap OO'j
with for instance (10.140)
(10.137) IS
is W;-&k and q. lO.31b), while
Two further parameters (in addition to m which is a constant) appear therefore in the plastic flow rule: plastic multiplier Ap which determines the plastic strain increment intensity and "12 characteristic of its direction. "12 can be easily determined from triaxial tests (Lade, 1977). To calculate the plastic multiplier one has to multiply the two members of (10.139) by O'j. After summation, one obtains (10.141)
which finally leads to (10.142)
In Lade's
(10.138)
which is written taking account of (10.140) \
_
dWp
Ap -
3gp
+ m"12
( ~;
)m 13
(10.143)
232
10.30.3
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Elastoplastic behaviour under hydrostatic loading
Chapter 10. Thermo,-
In the case of a I
To take account of possible plastic irreversibilities under hydrostatic loading the yield locus has to be closed. In the present model one introduces a second yield locus: a sphere centred on the' origin. Only the sphere part seen by the solid angle of the cone clearly has an interest. Therefore, in a triaxial plane the complete yield locus is represented (Fig. 10.32) by two lines subtending the arc of a circle around the hydrostatic axis. The equation of the sphere in the space of principal stresses is such that
( 10.144)
with dc~ = de; - dii to
Similarly, in the
Experience show ponential form of th
C and p being t diagram. Caleulatio that is
which leads finally t
hydrostatic
axis
10.31 Fig. 10.32. Complete yield surface a triaxial
SHAO
in
plane.
This model whie in the choice of the the scalar quantity.
in which I: (radius of the sphere), is~ second hardening parameter. Under the effect of loading, the radius increases, but this mechanism does not give rise to a possible rupture. Only plasticity is considered here. Let us now study the plastic flow rule. The material being assumed to be isotropic, under hydrostatic loading, strains are identical in all directions. The associated plastic flow rule will be such that
Furthermore,
th
(10.145) As was already the case for the deviatoric mechanism, let us assume an isotropic hardening as a function of the plastic strain work We
(10.146)
For the hydrO&b
of material strain
233
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
In the case of a purely hydrostatic
loading (f, this plastic work is equal to (10.147)
tatic loading
-
centred on the has an interest. (Fig. 10.32) by The equation of
with df:~ to
= de;
-
au/ K.
Taking account of (10.133) and after integration,
Wc = -Uf:v Similarly, in the case of hydrostatic
n-2-n PaU -
(10.148)
(2 _ n)Ki
compression the value of
one is led
Ie
is reduced to (10.149)
(10.144)
Experience shows quite clearly that Eq. (10.146) can be approximated ponential form of the type
by an ex(10.150)
C and p being two hardening variables. They are easily measurable in a log-log diagram. Calculation of the plastic multiplier is carried out in the same way as before, that is (10.151)
which leads finally to (10.152)
10.31
SHAO AND HENRY'S SIMPLIFIED MODEL
This model which is specifically adapted to chalk differs from Lade's model mainly in the choice of the hardening variable which is no longer the plastic strain work but the scalar quantity ~p,c such that (10.153)
Furthermore,
the sphere cap is replaced by a plane such that (10.154)
(10.145) e an isotropic
(10.146)
For the hydrostatic
mechanism, the normality hypothesis enables one to write df:i
=
x, 881 (J'i
i
=
1,2,3
(10.155)
234
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Chapter 10. ~
To calculate the plastic multiplier one proceeds as previously, that is
2:, O";dcf
100WPJ
= ,xc 2: a; ~ I. . uO",
(10.156)
,
.
68
which leads finally to
,x _ The determination
of
,xc
48
dWc
c-
D
S8
(10.157)
Ie
38
necessitates choosing a hardening law
28
(10.158)
18
For the deviatoric mechanism, the yield locus is identical to that of the Lade model [Eq. (10.134)] that is 1(0"1,0"2,0"3)
=
If ) ( 13 - 27
(h)m P
a
= Ip(~p)
•
2
1
(10.159) 38
while for the plastic potential proposed
(non-associated
flow rule) a simplified expression is
•
25
gp =
If -
2713
(10.160)
28
~
which comes down to assuming in (10.138) 15 TJ2
=0
(10.161)
18
The plastic flow rule will be written
5 8 12
(10.162)
•
€v(%) which makes it possible to determine the plastic multiplier such that (10.163)
I
~
1
that is
~
(10.164)
j
10.32 The hardening law of this second mechanism is different from that proposed by Lade (hyperbolic Duncan law) (10.165) where Do and b are material constants. Shao and Henry's model contains therefore eight constants which can easily be determined by conventional tests. Some examples of comparisons between numerical and experimental results are presented in Fig. 10.33.
TA~ RES.
~
i
To take into~ stress space al normal stresses
.
0):1
.~
.,
Tisama~
of material strain
235
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
/(Jt-(J21(MPa)
laKMPa) 28
68
(10.156)
_
51" EXP
a
58
_51" EXP
• 15
40
(10.157)
18
30 28
IU21-5l1Pa
5
(10.158)
18 0
8
6
4
2
8
8
18
12
14
11
8
12
h(%)
4
8
4
8
Ev(%)
12
El(%)
(10.159) lat-a
IO"C0"21(MPa)
I(MPa)
78
38
expression is
_
(10.160)
_
51" EXP
•
25
IUj"4"ttPa
•
S8
•
28
51" EXP
•
S8
48 15 38
(10.161)
18
28 luz-1Bt1Pa
:5
18 8
8
(10.162)
12
8
4
8
8
4
Fig. 10.JJ. Comparison and numerical results
8
4
8
Ev(%)
El(%)
Ev(%)
(10.163)
12
12
4
8
12
El(%)
between experimental on a porous chalk
(after Shao.Henry and Guenot.1988).
(10.164)
10.32
(10.165)
TAKING INTO ACCOUNT RESISTANCE TO TRACTION
To take into account material cohesion, a translation is carried out in the principal stress space along the hydrostatic axes (Fig. 10.34) by adding a constant T to the normal stresses such that 0:;
= +T U;
i
= 1,2,3
T is a material constant loading independent.
(10.166)
236
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
Fig. 10.34. Change of coordinates of resistance
10.33
to take
Chapter 10. Th
account
to traction.
LADE'S MODEL AND PRINCIPLE OF EFFECTIVE STRESSES
LB.,
BURLAND,
of wet clay, in
F., 1987.
DARVE,
The deviatoric mechanism of Lade's model deriving from a non-associated flow rule the application of the principle of effective plastic stresses is theoretically not allowed. However theoretical forecasts are excellent particularly under undrained conditions if one admits the plastic effective stress principle. Under undrained conditions (incompressible fluid and grains) any volume change is zero whatever the loading. In the specific case of Lade's model this is expressed by the condition (10.167) Under undrained conditions a rise in interstitial pressure tlp takes place such that condition (10.167) is respected. The results obtained by Lade show a remarkable concordance between the simulated tests (continuous line) and the experimental points (Fig. 10.3.5).
de lois de com des ponts et dulllli!ll
G., el
DEBANDE,
research pro DESPAX,
D.,
1
phase, internal A., I
DRAGON,
of Poitiers. HILL,
R., 1950,
JAEGER,
J.e.,
& Hall, Londoa.. LADE,
P.V., 1
surfaces, Int. J.
,. material strain
237
Chapter 10. Thermoporoelastoplasticity
•
4
J: ..
....bN3
::--....
b'"'2
.: ... ~.. J 30
20
10
E1(%) Fig. 10.35. Comparison numerical sand
[after
results
between
of undrained
experimental tests
and
on a loose
Lade. 1978).
BIBLIOGRAPHY
BURLAND, I.B., and ROSCOE, K.H., 1968, On the generalized stress strain behaviour of wet clay, in "Engineering Plasticity", Cambridge, Heyman-Leckie. .ated flow rule y not allowed. conditions if
DARVE, F., 1987, L 'Ecriture incremeutale des lois rheoloqiques ei les gran des classes de lois de comportement, in "Manuel de rheologie des geomateriaux" , Ecole nationale des ponts et chaussees press. DEBANDE, G., et aI., 1985, Mechanical research program, phase I, Stavanger. DESPAX, D., 1987, Alwyn, Stability phase, internal report TOTAL CFP.
(10.167)
behaviour of Chalks, Symposium analysis
DRAGON, A., 1988, Cours de Mecanique of Poitiers. HILL, R., 1950, The mathematical JAEGER, J.C., and COOK, N.G.W., & Hall, London.
of inclined
- Plasticite
theory of plasticity, 1979, Fundamentals
of the Chalk
boreholes during 12" 1/4
- Endommagement, Oxford University of rock mechanics,
LADE, P.V., 1977, Elastoplastic stress strain theory for cohesionless surfaces, Int. J. Solid Structures, Vol. 13, pp. 1019-1036.
University Press. Chapman
soil curved yield
238
Part II. Mechanism of material strain
- 1978, Prediction of undrained behaviour of sand, Journal of the geotechnical neering division, June. - 1978, Three dimensional behaviour of remolded clay, JGTED, February. LEMAITRE, J., and CHABOCHE, J .L., 1988, Mecanique
des materiaua: solide, Dunod.
Ii simple potentiel, in "Manuel LORET, B., 1987, Elastoplasticite geomateriaux" , Ecole nation ale des ponts et chaussees press. JONES, M.E., 1985, Deformation mechanisms research program, phase I, Stavanger.
engi-
de rheologie
in chalk, Symposium
des
of the Chalk
PAUL, B., 1968, Macroscopic criteria for plastic flow and brittle fractures, in "Fracture, an advanced treatise", Academic Press New York, San Francisco, London. ROSCOE, K.H., SCHOFIELD, A.N., and WROTH, soils, Geotechnique 9, p.71.
C.P.,
1968, On the yielding
of
RUDNICKI, J .W., 1984, Effects of dilatant hardening on the development of concentrated shear deformation in fissured rock masses, JGR, Vol. 89 B 11, pp.9259-9270. RUDNICKI, J.W., and RICE, J.R., 1975, Conditions for the localization of deformation in pressure-sensitive dilatant materials, J. Mech. Phys. Solid, Vol. 23, pp.371394. SHAO, J.F., HENRY, J.P., and GUENOT, A., 1988, An adaptative constitutive for soft porous rocks (Chalk), in Proceedings of the XXIXth U.S. Symposium questions in rock mechanics" Univ. of Minnesota, Mineapolis, Ed. Balkema.
model "Key
Part III
Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
CHAPTER
11
Fissuring
11.1
HETEROGENEITY OF MATERIAL
The rheological mechanisms studied in the previous chapters only relate to homogeneous materials. In other words, homogeneously loaded materials strained in a homogeneous manner. In fact, actual materials are profoundly heterogeneous: impurities, inclusions, pores, strain incompatibilities of neighbouring grains, are inherent in all materials and represent their heterogeneity. This may be referred to in the broad sense as defects. Emphasis should be laid on the fact that these defects preexist any loading. The fissuring process takes its origin from this structural heterogeneity. Indeed, by the action of loading some defects will progress as cracks along discontinuities where material has been destroyed by rupture of the bonds preexisting the process: we have then what is called material cohesion loss. There exist two distinct fissuring mechanisms: brittle rupture and ductile rupture. Brittle rupture only involves ruptures of bonds, without any appreciable plastic strains. Total energy is concentrated in a process that leads to very large fractures, propagating rapidly through the material. For ductile rupture, on the other hand, energy is primarily dissipated plastically; crack evolution will progress much less quickly than in brittle materials. Since in the majority of cases the fissuring behaviour of rocks is brittle, we shall limit the scope of our study to this single type of mechanism. Readers interested by ductile rupture are referred to the works listed in the bibliography.
11.2
BASIC HYPOTHESIS OF BRITTLE RUPTURE
Brittle rupture is based on the following hypothesis: 1. One assumes, within the continuous medium, the existence of initial defects which can be either inherent in the microstructure or the result of a previous loading.
242
Part III. Mechanisms
of material
cohesion loss
2. Among all the defects some are subjected to much greater stresses than others. This will be particularly the case for those with a shape factor close to zero (infinitely flattened ellipses). We shall therefore specially refer to this type of geometric disturbance as a defect. 3. The continuous material containing these defects is assumed to be linear elastic. 4. Under a system of increasing external loading the initial defect can extend to neighbouring material through rupture of the preexisting bonds (Fig.ll.l).
, !
I
I·
Fig. 11.1 Fracture (after
model
Goodier. 1968).
The layers of particles are linked by elastic springs whose strength has a limit. Beyond this limit, there is rupture of the bond and therefore irreversible separation of the two layers (Fig.Il.2). Fissuring reveals the concept of a threshold: if this threshold is not reached, there can be no fissuring. This simple model shows us that fissuring (brittle or ductile) is an irreversible process in the thermodynamic sense. We shall study this concept in detail later.
1
243
Chapter 11. Fissuring
loading
amax
""',.".".,
,"..,
interparticulate distance V
rnax
Fig. 11.2 Linear model of cohesion by brittle
I
11.3
elastic
loss
fissuring.
STRESS FIELD ASSOCIATED WITH A CRACK CONCEPT OF STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR
Before studying the conditions for crack extension (one also speaks of propagation) under the effect of external loadings, it is essential to study the disturbed stress field around the crack. The material being linear elastic, the problem can be solved considering the' solution of the infinite plate with an elliptical cavity of semi axes a and b under uniaxial tension (J' (Fig. 11.3).
a
2a
I
1I
a Fig. 11.3. Infinite
plate with an elliptical
hole.
244
Part III. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
This calculation has been developed in Chapter 5 and has shown the state of stress along the major axis of the ellipse (that is y 0 and Ixl ~ a) was the superposition of a trivial problem (medium without cavity) and an auxiliary problem (pressure equal to -(1' on the surface of the ellipse)
=
{1'xx
l+m
+ {1'yy
2{1'
+ (1'
2
p -m
(11.1) {1'yy -
{1'xx
=
1{1'(
p
2
m2
-m
[
)2
1 + p2
+2
p2(1 _ p2)] 2
p -m
+ {1'
=
We may recall that in Eqs (11.1), m is the inverse shape factor (m 1 if a and p the first elliptical coordinate such that [see Eqs (5.101), (5.102), (5.103)] 2 p=
x(l
+ m)
acosO
If the ellipse is reduced to a crack axis becomes
+ (a
(11.2)
= 0 that
is m
=
1) the stress
2{1'
{1'yy
Furthermore,
for 0 = 0, (that is y
= 0)
= {1'+-2-p - 1 = 0) and
{1'yy
along y (11.3)
m = 1, one obtains (11.4)
To analyze the stress field at the crack tip, let us write x = a(1
+0
with
~«
(11.5)
1
By replacing (11.5) in (11.4) one obtains p2 -1
= 2(e + 2~)![(e + 20! + (1+~)]
(11.6)
e
~ being small with respect to 1, can be neglected with respect to ~, ~ with respect to 1 and finally ..j'Jl, with respect to 1, which (11. 7) Introducing re-written
coordinate
r considered from the crack tip (x
= a + r)
(11.3) can be (11.8)
with (11.9) Equation (11.8) shows that the linear elastic solution is singular at the crack tip 0). (that is for r
=
245
Chapter 11. Fissuring
If we re-write (11.8) in the form a yy.J'2r I( r can be defined as
I(r
= (j.J'2r + 1(1
(11.10)
= r-+O lim(jyy.J'2r
(11.11)
In other words, for r small one can simply write f{/
(jyy
== V2T
r
-+
0
(11.12)
1(1 represents the intensity of the singularity. It depends on the geometry of the problem (here a) and of the loading o, For obvious reasons it is known as stress intensity factor.
11.4
GENERALIZATION OF THE CONCEPT OF STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR
Irwin (1957) generalized the concept of stress intensity factor in the case of any loading by no longer considering the crack as a particular type of cavity but as a local discontinuity in the displacement field. By decomposing the displacement discontinuity vector [il] into its three elementary components one can describe any movement of the crack lips by three elementary kinematic modes (Fig. 11.4).
,
opening
mode
Fig. 11,4 Elementary
shearing
kinematic
1. Mode I or opening mode such that
lily]
-I 0
mode
modes
tearing
associated
with a crack.
mode
246
Part III. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
2. Mode II or plane shearing mode such that
3. Mode III or antiplane shearing mode such that
Each of these kinematic modes corresponds to a different type of stress with which is associated a stress field in the vicinity of the crack tip. By limiting the study to modes I and II (we shall not develop mode III in the scope of this book), the calculation can be dealt with in plane elasticity. The asymptotic stress field at the crack tip is then such that
8
J{/
---cos(211'r)~
. 8 . 38 1 -sm-sm2 2 . 8 38
sm cos'2
2
2
1
. 8 . 38
+ sin 2Slll2
. () [
8
3()]
- sm - 2 + cos - cos 2 2 2 J{II
. -8 SIn . -38] cos -8 [1 - sm 222
+---. (21I'r) 2
. -8 [cos -() cos -38] sm 2 2 2 (11.13)
and the displacement field
(::)
J{/
=
(
2G
J{II
r ) ~ ( cos ~ 211'
r
+2G (2.) =
(c -
1 + 2sin2~)
)
. 2 8 ( II:+ 1 - 2 cos282)
sin
~ (sin~
[1I:+1+2COS2~]
-w,~
)
[.-1-2'in'~l
where II: 3 - 4/1 (plane strain) and G is the shear modulus of the material. In these expressions rand 8 are the polar coordinates centred on the crack tip (Fig. 11.5), J{/ and J{II the stress intensity factors associated respectively with the elementary kinematic modes I and II. They are function of the geometry of the problem and of the loading parameters. Let us insist once again on the fact that these equations are only valid at the crack tip for the reasons set out in the previous paragraph.
Chapter
247
11. Fissuring
Fig. 11.5. Coordinate
11.5
system
at the cr ac k tip.
PHYSICAL SIGNIFICANCE INTENSITY FACTORS
OF THE STRESS
The stress intensity factors reveal their physical significance through the displacement discontinuities. For this purpose, let us calculate for example the crack opening [u]y such that (Fig. 11.6)
[Uy]
= v» [r, e = 7r] -
= -7r]
v» [r, ()
(11.14)
+7r ----t----->--+---I~
x
_7r
Fig. 11.6. Displacement
discontinuity
at the crack
tip.
Replacing (11.13) in (11.14), one obtains
_ ] = 8I
[
uy
E
v2) fr
V~
(11.15)
in the same way (11.16)
248
Part III. !ltIechanisms of material
cohesion loss
T
The stress intensity factors can be understood as the image of the displacement discontinuities at the crack tip associated with each of the elementary kinematic modes. The fundamental quantities associated with a crack are no longer stresses and strains (or displacements) but stress intensity factors and displacement discontinuities. One can also write Eqs (11.15) and (11.16) in terms of stresses. Indeed, at the crack tip and for e = 0 [{I
= ---, (211"1')2
= (21lT)~
(11.17)
[{II
Eliminating
[{I
and
[{II
(11.18)
through (11.15) (11.16) (11.17) and (11.18), one obtains _ [Uy]
_ lux]
=
=
8(1 - v2) E r 8(1 E
v2)
r
t
(11.19)
(11.20)
,
Through these equations clearly appears the decoupling of the two modes: a normal stress creates only an opening, and a shearing parallel to the crack creates only a slippage.
11.6
CALCULATION OF THE STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR
The elastic calculation of a crack-containing structure is based therefore on the knowledge of the stress intensity factors associated, we may recall, with the geometry of the structure and the external loadings. The stress intensity factors can only be calculated analytically for simple geometries and loadings. The method consists in calculating the stress field in the immediate vicinity of the crack tip, then in evaluating J{I and [{II by identifying the results with Irwin's Eqs (11.13). We reproduce below some fundamental results in infinite plates.
11.6.1
Infinite plate with a rectilinear crack in a uniaxial stress field
f
If the crack is inclined at an angle f3 with respect to the direction of x axis, the stress intensity factors are such that (Fig. 11.7)
tc,
[{II
f3Fa
f3cos f3Fa
"
(11.21)
249
Chapter 11. Fissuring
a
, y
n
a Fig. 11.7. Inclined
11.6.2
crack
under
uniaxial
loading.
Infinite plate with rectilinear crack in any far stress field
Let us observe in Eqs (11.21) that O'cos2 f3 and -O'sinf3cosf3 represent the normal and tangential projections of 0' on the crack plane. Therefore this particular case can be generalized to any loading £'. If ii is the normal to the crack, the stress intensity factors become!
(£' . ii) . iiFa
I (£' . ii) . t I Fa 11.6.3
(11.22)
Infinite plate with a concentrated force on the crack lips
A system of self-balanced concentrated forces P and Q is applied at a distance b from the crack center (Fig. 11.8). The stress intensity factors associated with this configuration are equal to (Sih, 1973)
P (a+b)~ a-b
Fa Q
(a + b)~
Fa a-b 1KJI
must always be positive.
(11.23)
250
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
a
Fig. I1.B. Concentrated
loads
on a crack
(ofter Sih.1973).
11.6.4
Infinite plate with rectilinear continuous loading
crack and
One can easily extend the previous solution to the case of a continuous loading normal O"yy(x,O) and tangential O"xy(x,O). At any point of the crack, a system of self-balanced localized forces acts that is
p
O"yy(x,O)dx
Q
0"
(11.24)
xy( x, O)dx
By summing the effects of the various local loads one is led to
l+ l+
a
=
1 t--::
y7l'a
1 t--::
y 7ra
11.7
-a
O"xx(x,O)
a
-a
O"xy(x,O)
(a+ x)t (a+ X)t --
a-x
--
a- x
dx (11.25)
dx
CONDITION FOR CRACK INITIATION GRIFFITH CRITERION
When the external forces system is such that at the crack tip the bonds between grains reach their ultimate resistance, the initial crack begins to grow. This condition is known as propagation criterion. The singular form of the stress field at the crack tip does not allow one to approach this problem in terms of ultimate stress. /'Therefore it is preferable to use a thermodynamic approach. '
251
Cbapter 11. Fissuring
11.7.1
Writing the first pr-inciple
The energy balance of a transformation during which a crack of initial length a grows by an increment of length da is written [Eq. (3.3)]
if + 1< = Pert + Q -
w.
(11.26)
In Eq, (11.26), W. is an additional term that did not appear for continuous media. It characterizes the fact that the boundary is evolutive and represents the dissipated energy by the cohesion loss mechanism.
11. 7.2
•
Kinetic energy associated with the propagation of a crack
Kinetic energy variation during a transformation - often neglected - is essential from a qualitative point of view to understand the propagation condition of a crack. The general expression of the kinetic energy associated with particles motion of a strained solid of volume V is such that (11.27)
1I i
1
1 :
\
in which it is the displacement velocity field at any point of the solid. If the solid contains a crack of length a which propagates by an increment da under the action of an external constant stress field, expression (11.27) can be written J{
1 2 = _pa 2
1({r)2 .
~
v
aa
dV
(11.28)
in which a is the propagation velocity of the crack. Let us expound (11.28) for a crack of length a under a uniaxial tension a in an infinite plate. In this case the displacement field il associated with the auxiliary problem (one does not consider the trivial solution which is independent of a) is proportional to ao f E; therefore ail/aa is proportional to a l E, a being the only characteristic dimension in the material, the volume integral (11.28) (which is in reality a surface integral per unit of thickness) is proportional to a2 so that (11.28) can be written in the form (11.29) in which k is a constant. One can now calculate the particulate derivative of (11.29). On the hypothesis of a constant propagation velocity a, one obtains finally (11.30)
252
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
In other words "under a given loading, a crack can only grow if the kinetic energy of the system increases during the transformation" which can be summarized by the inequality
I<~O
{::::::::}a=O
K>O
{::::::::}a>O
We should note that the case restoration of the initial crack).
11.7.3
a<0
(11.31)
cannot be physically considered (no possible
Griffith criterion
The energy balance (11.26) makes it possible to express condition (11.31) in the form k = Pext + Q - W$ - U > 0 {::::::::} a>0 (11.32) Each of the terms of (11.32) can be clarified. The expressions of Pext and already been developed in Chapter 3
Pext
=
is
fadS
U
have
(11.33)
in which S is the external surface, f the external loads and 11the displacements the external surface (external surface plus crack), and [see Eq. (3.48)]
of
(11.34) The term W$ is, we may recall, the dissipated energy in the mechanism of cohesion loss. It depends therefore on the crack surface created during the transformation. In Griffith's hypothesis, this energy is proportional to the surface increment created during the time increment that is (11.35)
W. = 2ra
r being the surface energy of the material, independent of loading and geometry, and the factor 2 originating from the fact that the total area created is not da but 2da (newly created upper face and lower face). Replacing (11.33), (11.34) and (11.35) in (11.32), taking account of the fact that the material is elastic one is led to the expression
is
fadS -
Wet -
2ra > 0 {::::::::} a>0
(11.36)
or by revealing derivations with respect to a
(1 S
-fJiidS - -aWel F-
aa
aa
2)'r
a
>
0 {::::::::} a. > 0
(11.37)
253
Chapter 11. Fissuring
then by writing 9
=
r FEN'dS _ aWel aa aa
(11.38)
is
one obtains the final expression of the Griffith criterion
a > 0 ¢::=} 9 >
(11.39)
2,
9 is known as energy release rate. It depends on loading and geometrical configuration. energy contained in V is such that [see (4.53) and (4.57)]
Wet
Indeed, the elastic strain
= 21 ivr (q; : ~) dV = 21 isr rcas
(11.40)
that is by deriving with respect to a
oWe1 = ~ oa 2
isr
of
Ba+ u oa)
(Fou
dS
(11.41)
which leads by replacing (11.41) in (11.38) to 9
=~ 2
ris (faUaa _ uofoa)
(11.42)
dS
When only forces are prescribed on the external surface (11.42) reduces to
}.
I ~ ,
1 I
9
2
11.8
r fOUaa dS
is
(11.43)
GROWTH OF AN INITIATED CRACK QUASISTATIC PROPAGATION
The Griffith criterion tells us about the initiation conditions (the external loading must be such that 9 > 2,), but Eq. (11.39) does not solve the extension problem. Let us consider a material containing a crack of arbitrary length a subjected on its external surface to a loading f (tractions) with which is associated a displacement field U. The energy release rate associated with this loading and "this configuration is such that (since only forces are prescribed on the external surface)
gda
1
=~
For low loadings, (g is reduced to
=~
is
(Fdu)dS
(11.44)
< 2,), the initial crack cannot grow (a = 0) and Eq. (11.36) (11.45)
254
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
The material behaviour remains purely elastic (the work of the external forces is wholly transformed into elastic strain energy) and the stress path can be represented in diagram f, il by a straight line OA whose slope (in other words the modulus) is lower the greater the length of the crack (Fig. Il.9).
F
B
H
~~========~~ Fig. 11.9. Growth of a defect (after
u
Bui.1978).
This slope is moreover limited between a maximum value corresponding to the case of a continuous medium (no initial crack) and a zero slope (u axis) corresponding to a medium completely crossed by the crack. Given A the representative loading point for which 9 2,. A, defines therefore the boundary between purely elastic loading and loading for which propagation occurs. For other initial crack lengths, the limit point f, ii will be different. The set of limit points forms a curve of equation 9 2, in the diagram f, il. This curve is comprised between two asymptotes, corresponding to the two extrema defined just above. If the loading point crosses the limit curve, 9 becomes greater than 2, and the initial crack is propagated. This propagation can have two aspects however.
=
=
11.8.1
Quasistatic controlled rupture
If, starting from point A, one controls the loading so that 9 exceeds only very slightly 2" the rate of kinetic energy remains low, the consequence of this being a slow advance of the crack (a small) hence the name quasistatic given to it. Quasistatic propagation implies therefore as a first approximation that 9 is at any moment equal to 2, which prescribes the representative loading point to evolve on the limit curve. Thus starting from a crack of initial length corresponding to the slope OA, once the equilibrium curve is reached, the representative loading point will evolve on the limit curve from A towards B.
Chapter
255
11. Fissuring
During this phase, the crack will grow. To be convinced of this fact, it is sufficient to carry out in D an unloading according to the elastic path OD whose slope is less than OA. A geometrical interpretation of the surfaces subtended by the limit curve shows that the energy dissipated during loading path OADO is equal to the curvilinear triangle OAD. This energy is assumed to dissipate exclusively in surface energy. One has in this, means of determining experimentally the surface energy 2,.
11.8.2
Uncontrolled
or dynamic rupture
Let us now consider the case in which after elastic loading OA, the representative point crosses the equilibrium curve as far as G (therefore such that 9 largely exceeds 2,), then follows the path GEBF, where the crack stops. As previously, the crack begins to be propagated in A. At point E, the crack is of exactly equal length to that which corresponded to point D in the quasistatic case. Since OAD was equal to the energy exclusively dissipated in an additional element of crack surface, AGED represents therefore the energy excess (g - 2,)da, in other words the kinetic energy variation of the system which will moreover be maximum at point B (equal to area AGEB). This kinetic energy must now be dissipated in order to bring the system back into an equilibrium state. Various dissipative processes can come into play: heat, acoustic energy but also new crack growth. The representative point comes back to the elastic domain but the crack continues to be propagated before finally stopping at point F where it is of a length corresponding to the slope OH. Only a part of the kinetic energy AGEB is therefore dissipated in the form of new surface after point B: namely area BH F. The process leads therefore to a nonuniqueness of the solution: the division of the kinetic energy in the form of additional new surface or in the form of another dissipative process not being known a priori, the final propagation length is not known either. Generally, to solve the problem, one assumes that fissuring is the only source of dissipation. In this case there is equality between areas AGEB and BF H which makes it possible to determine graphically the final point F. The rest of the exposition will be made on a quasistaticity hypothesis, but one must keep in mind that in rock a lot of rupture phenomena are dynamic (earthquakes for example).
11.9
STABILITY AND INSTABILITY
OF PROPAGATION
According to Griffith's criterion, a crack of length a within a structure to a loading F is initiated if g(a, F) > 2,
subjected
(11.46)
Let us consider a crack propagating by an infinitesimal quantity da. If the loading is maintained constant the energy release rate associated with this new configuration will be equal to g(a + da, F). Two situations are then possible:
F
256
Part III. Mechanisms
of material
cohesion
loss
1. Either
g(a
+ da,
F)
< g(a, F)
(1l.47)
and the Griffith's criterion is no longer satisfied after propagation. cannot continue to grow. The situation is stable.
The defect
2. Or g(a
+ da,
F) > g(a, F)
(ll.48)
and the Griffith criterion will again be satisfied after infinitesimal crack growth. The rupture becomes unstable and only a decrease in the external loading can stop the growth. A crack is therefore unstable if and only if
og(a) > 0 oa It can easily be verified that the instability in the rate of kinetic energy. Indeed
ic = (g
(11.49) condition corresponds
to an increase
- 21')ci
(11.50)
which can also be written oJ{
8a = 9 Taking account of (11.49), the instability
21'
(11.51)
condition will be written (11.52)
The crack will then be propagated at increasingly high velocities which can reach orders of magnitude of 1000 m/s. It can however be shown that the propagation velocity is limited to that of longitudinal waves in the material (Berry, 1960). Application: Experimental propagation of a crack As we have just seen, the stability of a brittle process depends strongly on the boundary conditions. Let us consider two specific cases:
11.9.1
Rupture with servo controlled loading (Fig.Il.I0)
When the initiation point is reached (in A or A'), one maintains the force F constant. In this case the crack cannot evolve in a stable manner because one remains constantly in the domain 9 > 21'.
257
Chapter 11. Fissuring
F
\-- __
OL-
Fig. 11.10. Stable
11.9.2
Rupture
~
unstable
~
U
and u ns t ab le prop ag ation.
with servo controlled displacement
By maintaining if constant after initiation in A' the crack is propagated towards point A and comes back to the stability domain. During the process the load F will decrease to maintain the displacement constant. This shows that the only way of obtaining stable ruptures is to carry out tests by servo controlling the displacement and not the load.
11.10
LOCAL EXPRESSION OF GRIFFITH CONCEPT OF TOUGHNESS
CRITERION
Expression (11.42) makes it possible to calculate g knowing if and f everywhere on the external contour. To express the energy release rate using the internal stress field, let us consider an initial state for which the solid contains a crack of length a under the effect of a surfacic load F and a final state, for which under the effect of the same loading the crack has been propagated by an increment AB (not necessarily colinear with the initial crack). if and if + dif are the associated displacements of the external surface respectively under initial and final state. In both cases the crack is assumed stress-free. In the initial state, on the "potential" propagation increment AB a stress field [(1) is applied corresponding to the asymptotic solution (since AB is small). During propagation, this stress state is released on this increment.
258
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
The initial state is thus identical to the final one but, in the initial state, increment AB (which appears this time to be part of the external surface) is loaded by surface (]'(1)ii in which ii is the external normal to increment AB. forces F After propagation on AB one has
=
(11.53) The energy release rate associated with the initial configuration will be written g
11
= -2
s
_OF)
(-ail F- - uoa oa
dS
11AB ( -e«
+-
_OF)
F- - uoa oa
2
dS
(11.54)
since the initial crack is not loaded. Taking account of (11.53) and of the fact that remains constant on the external surface S, one is led to
that is by writing il crack)
r
2gda
= f (Fdil)dS +
+ dil
= iJ<2) (displacement
Js
JAB
q;(l)ii(il
(11.55)
field associated with the propagated
= f (Fdil)dS + f is JAB
2gda
+ dil)dS
F
q;(1)iia(2)dS
(11.56)
The first term of (11.56) represents the work of the forces on the external surface S, while the second represents the work of the forces on the potential crack increment. The first term being of a lower order than the second, one can neglect it so that (11.57)
AB+ and AB- being the upper and lower faces of the crack increment AB. Eq. (11.57) can be analytically expounded in the case of cracks growing in their own direction (Fig. 11.11) by replacing q;(1) and iJ<2) by their asymptotic expressions (11.13). ~a - x) If only mode I plays a role in the process one has (r
=
1
(1) _ (]'
yy
-
J{[
(27rX)
1
2
(2)_
and
uy
»:
-
1\[
",+1 2G
(~a-x)2 27r
(11.58)
and, after (11.57) (11.59) since only increment ~a is loaded. After integration, one obtains _
,/
g -
K,
+ 1J{2
8G
t
(11.60)
259
Chapter 11. Fissuring
O"yy(I)
uf2)
is taken with respect to O(r=x.O=O) is taken with respect to O·(r=Lla-x.
0= 7r)
y
+7r
Lla ",
, , ,
--------------O+--.-----+-O·-L~ x
Lla-x
Fig. 11.11. Crack being propagated
in
its own direction.
If both mode I, mode II had been considered, one would have obtained in the same way K+l 2 2) 9 ---sc;(J(I + J(1I (11.61)
=
The Griffith criterion can therefore be expressed in terms of stress intensity factors. For mode I only, it is written
+ 1 .... = ---sc;AI = 2, K
9
2
or
(11.62)
1
J(I
=
(~6Z~)
'i
= f{JC
(11.63)
f{Ie is known as critical stress intensity factor in mode I, or toughness. It depends only on the material by means of its surface energy, and its elastic constants G and II. Similarly, one can define in mode II, Kt ic whose significance is identical to that of [(Ie, with rupture occurring if
[(II
= Kttc
(11.64)
We shall see in the next paragraph that the latter equation poses a problem and that mode II does not have an obvious physical meaning.
11.11
EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF TOUGHNESS FOR ROCKS
This problem has been dealt with in detail by Ouchterlony. Numerous methods exist at the present time. We shall describe merely two of them.
260
Part III. Mechanisms
11.11.1
of material cohesion loss
Determination of K/C from a three points bending test
It is proposed to determine [{IC (and consequently the surface energy) by measuring the instability load in a bending test (Fig. 11.12).
,,
:w
4W
A
A
OL------J....--II~y a)Totally
unstable
propagation.
b)Unstable
propagation
by a stable
Fig. 11.12. Bending test in three
followed
propagation.
points.
The load (P)-deflection (y) curve is recorded. At rupture it offers an angular point with which is associated a critical load P; (Fig. 11.12). The critical stress intensity factor can then be determined analytically from the theory of linear elasticity and classical beam theory
(11.65) in which B is the width of the beam, W its height, a the depth of the initial notch and F (a/W) a polynomial function such that
11.58
C~)~-18.4~C~) 7
-150.66 ( ; )., Once
[{IC
has been determined,
%
+ 87.18 9
(;)
~ (11.66)
+ 154.30 (;;, ) .,
the surface energy can be calculated using Eq. (11.63).
261
Chapter 11. Fissuring
11.11.2
Triaxial tests Influence of confining pressure on I
While considered as such, toughness is not an intrinsic property of the material and can be heavily dependent on the state of stress. This problem has been dealt with by Biret who has determined J(IC from triaxial tests (Fig.ILl3).
•. =="==",..
.....••.....••-
.
Klc(Mpa*v1i)
DJ---~--~--~--~-..--~~~ o
10
20
30
40
so
60
Confining pressure(MPa)
r······_····_-···_-1 R
H=72 mm R=18 mm 5.3
mm
0.295
Fig. 11.13. Influence (after
of confining
pressure
on toughness
Biret.1987).
The test consists in notching circumferentially at half height a cylindrical sample then in filling the notch with a plastic material so that, if a confining pressure is applied on the sample, it will be wholly transmitted onto the notch surface. The core is first brought to a hydrostatic stress state, then, the confining pressure remaining constant, the axial stress (T" is gradually reduced. The notch subjected to a growing pressure equal to the deviator finally leads to the rupture of the sample in mode I parallelly to the notch plane.
262
of material cohesion loss
Part III. Mechanisms
The deviatoric load (Uh -Uti) at rupture makes it possible to determine the critical stress intensity factor at rupture by equation ]{IC
=
in which F is the traction force at rupture the polynomial
y
= (1-
-ii
fo
[
1222
(R)a ~ -
1777
(Ii)a
(11.67)
7r~~2
and Y a compliance function defined by ~
a
+ 0740 (R)
~
-
0184
(R)a
~]
(1168)
a being the depth of the notch and R the radius of the standardized core according to the dimensions in Fig. 11.13. This type of test enables one to demonstrate the influence of mean pressure on ]{IC, and the independence of the mechanism with respect to the dimensions of the notch (Fig. 11.13). This dependence appears to be linked to the microstructure and not to the porosity of the rock, but no theory exists at the present time to quantify the phenomenon.
11.12
THE PROBLEMS RAISED BY THE CONVENTIONAL THEORY MANDEL CRITERION
It is proposed to study the case of an initial straight crack of length 2a subjected to a shear stress T. If one assumes an incremental growth of the crack ~a, in its own direction (dotted line of Fig. 11.14), the stress intensity factors associated with this loading and this configuration will be such that (11.69)
real
/
path
()
theoretical mode II path
Fig. 11.14. St.raig ht, cr ack subjecled
to a shear.
In other words, if the crack were propagated in its own direction, only mode II should come into play by a relative slippage of the two faces of the crack.
Chapter
263
11. Fissuring
The reality does not correspond to this process, and experience shows that the initial fracture branches in a direction forming an angle () with that of the initial crack: the fracture is said to branch and () is known as branching angle (Fig.Il.15).
a
Fig. 11.15. Uniaxial compression plexiglas (after
plates
with initial
tests
on
defects
Horii and Nem.at=Nasser.
1985)
The physical explanation of this phenomenon has been provided by Mandel. The latter assumes that a critical state is reached around the crack when, on a circle of radius p = TO (from the crack tip), the stress (188 reaches a threshold value (Fig. 11,16).
, fI()()
T
.:
~-....
~-
---~
~
.:/ \'-.a
-------------"!------,.' : ,. p=ro' -~-~ 7
: ...
()(J
,
----Fig. 11.16. Critical
zone associated
with
the Mandel criterion.
The fracture tends therefore to be propagated along a path normal to the direction of the maximum value of (188. In other words, although a shearing stress is the engine of the growth, only opening mode prevails and not mode II as conventional theory would have led one to suppose. In the case of any stress field (1xx, (1YY' (1xy, the branching angle can easily be determined by calculating the polar stress state in the vicinity of the initial crack that is [see Eq. (2.34)]
(1xx (1yy
sin2 6 + (1yy cos2 6 -
(1xx)
2(1xy
sin 6 cos 6
sin 6 cos 6 + (1xy cos 2()
(1l.70)
264
Part III. Mechanisms
in which 0"xx, 0"yy and 0"xy represent in (11.70) and after simplifications (
K1
(.
---
4J27Tr
3KII
()
3 cos - + cos 2 2 ()
.
2
which can also be written
solution (11.13).
Replacing (11.13)
3()) - --- SIll - + SIll -3()) 4J27Tr 2 2 3()) + --- cos - + 3 cos -3()) SIll - + SIll -
[(1
--4v'271T
the asymptotic one is led to
of material cohesion loss
[(II
2
(.
()
.
(11.71)
(()
4J2irr
2
2
in matrix form (11.72)
with
1(
4
()
3())
"2 +COS "2
3 cos
. -3e) -- 3 (.SIll -() + SIll 422
(11.73)
. -3()) -1 (.SIll -e + SIll 4 2 2 1 (()
- cos422 The angle eM for which 0"99 is maximum
+3cos-
3())
is such that
80"99 --=O~e=eM 8e
(11.74)
that is
tc\.1--ae 8K?1 8KP2 = 0 ==:} e = eM + tc\.11--ae that is after substitution -K1 4
of (11.73) in (11.75)
. -3()M) SIll -eM + SIll 2 2
(.
(11.75)
[(II + -4
(
3()M) cos -eM + 3 cos -2 2
=0
(11.76)
In other words, the path for which 0"99 is maxirnum is identical to that for which 0" p9 is zero.
i
II
Chapter
11.13
i
!
I I \
.•..
265
11. Fissuring
11.13.1
MANDEL CRITERION IN TERMS OF STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR Bui's elasto brittle solution for an incremental branching crack
Determination of the stress intensity factors associated with non-rectilinear configuration is a very complex problem from the analytical point of view except when the initial branching crack is infinitesimal (in other words small with respect to the initial crack length). This problem has been calculated by Bui et al. He has shown that the stress intensity factors kl and k2 associated with the final configuration (Fig. 11.17) are such that (11.77)
dl
2a
initial
___
configuration
2a__
final
LJJ)
configuration
Fig. 11.17. Elastobrittle Bui's solution for an incremental branch.
in which the 1(;j are functions of (), and J{/, J{II the stress intensity factors associated with the initial configuration (Fig. 11.17) under the same loading. The J{ij can be expanded in Taylor series, whose first term is largely preponderant with respect to the others and is finally very close to the completed solution. These first terms 1(fj are analytically expressible and furthermore rigorously equal to the 1(fj of Eqs (11.73).
11.13.2
Criterion of the kl maximum or of the k2 zero
The Mandel criterion can now be replaced by a criterion in terms of the stress intensity factor BUBB
B()
=0
or
or
(11.78)
In other words, the crack always chooses the configuration for which kl (which, it should be remembered, is the kl after branching) is maximum, or, which comes down to the same, the configuration for which k2 O.
=
266
11.14
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion Joss
STEIFF'S APPROXIMATE SOLUTION FOR A NON INFINITESIMAL BRANCHING CRACK
When the branching length is no longer infinitesimal, there are no longer any exact analytical solutions for the stress intensity factors. Steiff's solution is an original example of approximate solutions. Let us consider a solid S (Fig. 11.1B) containing a crack oflength 2a (forming an angle f3 with x axis) and two branching cracks of length I each at an angle f3 + ()with the same x axis. On the solid boundary S (assumed to be infinite) a surfacic force field is applied.
-. F
-.
y
n~~8
oV::: t
Fig. 11.18. Non infinitesimal
branch
crack.
/
The stress intensity loading can be written
factors kl and k2 associated
with this configuration
and this
(11.79) ki'O and k~'o being the stress intensity factors associated with the branching cracks if the latter were isolated cracks of same length and k~nJI and k;nJI being the differences between the actual kl and k2 and the isolated contributions kl'o and k;·o. The isolated contributions are given by Eqs (11.22), that is (l1.BO)
267
Chapter 11. Fissuring
ii' being the normal to the branching crack. The quantities k~nJI and k;nJI characterize the influence of the movements of the main crack on the stress field at the branchs tip. Indeed, the stress field projections on the main crack such that 17
= (q:ii)ii
and
T
= (#)t
(11.81)
create at the branching points respectively a normal displacement discontinuity [uy) and a tangential displacement discontinuity [u:oJ (Fig. 11.19). Since the influence of the principal crack on the branches is contained in these movements, the associated stress intensity factors can be written in the form [see Eqs (11.15) and (11.16)J
)( in which f3ij are indeterminate
(11.82)
functions of 8. crack
main
tip
crack
[U;] I
Fig. 11.19. Displacement
discontinuities
at the branching
poinl.
[uy) and [uxJ are computed approximately. If the whole crack was rectilinear (of length 2a + 2C) subjected to a shearing T and a normal stress 17, the associated displacement discontinuities at the branching point (that is for r = C) would be such that (Eqs (11.15) and (11.16))
(11.83)
since the associated stress intensity factors are respectively equal to J{II
= n/7r(a
+ C)
268
Part III. Mechanisms
of material
cohesion loss
Equations (11.83) implicitly include the contribution of the wings subjected to the same stresses (J" and -r and which are respectively equal to
(11.84)
These contributions must obviously be subtracted from (11.83) in order that (11.82) represents the only influence of the principal crack. Replacing in (11.82) one is led to (11.85)
We may observe that when £ --+ 00 (large wing with respect to the initial crack), the influence becomes negligible and the factors k~nfl and k~nfl tend towards zero. On the contrary, when £ --+ 0 (incremental branching) solution (11.85) is equal to solution (11.77) with J{/ = (J"y'7W. and J{II = ry'7W.. By identifying (11.85) and (11.77) with £ -+ 0 one obtains
/311 ( /321
(11.86)
Replacing (11.86) in (11.85) then (11.80) in (11.79) one finally obtains
( :: ) = (J"'
I¥ ( ::)
+~
[va + £ -
Vi] ( ~~~:
and r' being the projections of!!: on the branching direction.
11.15
11.15.1
BEHAVIOUR OF A CRACK UNDER A COMPRESSIVE STRESS FIELD Closure of a crack in a compressive stress field
The problem has already been dealt with in Chapter 3. We showed that an elliptical cavity in an infinite plate subjected to a uniaxial compression (J" (perpendicularly to the major axis of the ellipse) closed for a value (J"c such that [Eq. (6.11)]
(J"c
=
-aE 2(1 _
1I2)
(11.88)
Chapter
269
11. Fissuring
=
Q' being the shape factor (Q' b/a) of the ellipse. An infinitesimal normal component is therefore sufficient to close a crack (Q' --+ 0) in a compressive stress field. In other words, once the solid is loaded there is an instantaneous contact between the crack lips submitted to a normal compressive stress 17. The displacement discontinuity [Uy] being zero, the crack cannot be propagated therefore in this case.
11.15.2
Case of an inclined crack. Coulomb's law of friction
If the crack is inclined with respect to the stress field 2, the analysis is equivalent to that of a crack loaded by 17 and T, respectively normal and tangential projections of Q' on the crack plane. Let us analyse separately the effect of these two components. The normal component 17 closes the crack and induces a nil stress intensity factor K/. Furthermore, a frictional force is created due to the contact of the two lips. In Coulomb's hypothesis, this frictional force is proportional to 17, that is TF
=
(11.89)
J1.17
in which J1. is known as internal friction coefficient. The shearing T tends to cause the lips of the crack to slip but this movement is only possible if T exceeds TF. The driving propagation force is therefore such that (11.90) The stress intensity factors K/ and KII KII
KII
= =0
such that
TMFa
>0 -<=> TM < 0
-<=>
TM
(11.91 )
are thus associated with the initial configuration. The latter equation shows that there can be no propagation if there is no previous slippage.
11.15.3
Conditions for initiation of a crack under biaxial compression (Fig. 11.20)
If the material is subjected to a biaxial stress field and if the initial crack is inclined of an angle /3 with the direction of 172, Eq. (11.90) will be written (11711> 1(721) TM
= ~(172 - (71) sin 2/3 + J1. [~(171
+ (72) + ~(171
- (72) cos 2/3]
(11.92)
The driving force being a shearing, before branching, only KII is different from zero so that the stress intensity factor in mode I after branching will be written [Eq. (11.77)] (11.93)
270
Part III. Mechanisms
of material
cohesion loss
()
t Fig. 11.20. Inclined crack under biaxial compression
stress field.
According to the Mandel criterion, the crack will branch in a direction for which kl is maximum, that is in a direction ()M such that (TM being independent of ()) [)J{P2
~
= 0 ===> () = (}M
(11.94)
This angle (}M is constant whatever the loading and the orientation (3 of the initial crack and is equal to 70.53°, a value wholly in accord with experience. The stress intensity factor associated with the branching configuration is therefore such that
(11.95) kl (()M) is a function of {3(by means of TM). {3 in other words for
= (3M
1
(3M = - arctan 2 (II,
It is maximum for
(1) --
jJ
+-7r2
(11.96)
kl((}M,{3M) is therefore the maximum value of kl that can be found for a loading (12 and a crack of initial length a. Initiation is thus only possible if the initial crack length is greater than amin such
that
(11.97) that is if
(11.98)
Chapter
271
11. Fissuring
If a is greater than amin, the propagation /3 such that
will be possible only for an interval of (11.99)
a> amin Writing
C=
1 Ul - U2
[
+ (2)
J-l(Ul
2f{IC
]
(11.100)
- 1155Fa ' . 1ra
equation (11.99) leads to the solution (11.101) Two conditions are therefore required for a crack of length a and of initial orientation /3 to propagate under a biaxial compression loading, that is a> amin
(11.102)
/3Jr < /3 < /3~r 11.15.4
Approximate
calculation of the propagation
length
Steiff's approximate solution enables one to calculate the branching length. From Eq. (11.87), the stress intensity factor kl after branching is such that (11.103) with
(lull> I(21) a' TM
- 1 1 = (£"n')n' = 2(Ul + (2) + '2(Ul
=
T -
J-llul
=
~(U2
-
-
ur) sin 2/3
(2) cos(2/3 + 28)
+ J-l
[~(
Ul
+ (2) + ~(Ul
According to the Mandel criterion, the crack is propagated that kl (8M) is maximum
-
(2) cos 2/3]
(11.lO4) in a direction OM such
(11.105)
BM is therefore no longer a constant as for the incremental solution. BM depends on all the problem data (loading and initial configuration). The length of the branch having to respect the Griffith criterion, that is (11.106) one thus obtains two Eqs (11.105) and (11.106) of the two unknowns 8M and f.
272
Part III. lViechanisms of material cohesion loss
11.16
THERMODYNAMIC OF FISSURING
FORMULATION
Without considering any thermal and plastic process, the inequality of Clausius Duhem becomes [see Eq. (3.53)] ('Ij; is a volumic quantity)
£ : ~e
_ ~
2: 0
(11.107)
In the case of fissuring, the thermodynamic potential 'Ij; can be described by two state variables: the elastic deformation fe and the crack length a such that .i. 'P
= (O'lj;) .. O'lj;) . 0 fe .€- + 0 a a e
(
(11.108)
By introducing (11.108) into (11.107) and taking account of the first law of thermoelasticity [see Eq, (3.60)], the inequality of Clausius-Duhem is reduced to (11.109) In the case of an elastic cracked material (see Chapter 6) the thermodynamic potential 'Ij; is a quadratic form whose rigidity matrix ~{a) is a function of the crack iength. If one considers a volume V of material subjected to a constant external loading F on its external surface S the elastic strain energy contained in V is such that 'Ij;
= ~ [(f
:
~(a) : f)dV
(11.110)
Deriving (11.110) with respect to a, one obtains (11.111) To eliminate 01:::/ strain law such th~t
oa from
(11.111), one calculates the total differential ofthe stress
Of) da = (O~ oa : - + (A: = oa
d£ Extracting
oMoa
o'lj; oa
€)
from (11.112) and replacing in (11.111) one obtains
(11.112)
273
Chapter 11. Fissuring
since according to equilibrium Y'!! and Y'(d!!) are nil. Applying to the last integral the divergence theorem and taking account of the boundary condition and of the fact that f is constant on S one finally obtains
- a~
,
= ~ { fail
aa
2 }s
Ba
dS
=g
(11.113)
The energy release rate is thus the thermodynamic force associated with the dual variable a. The inequality of Clausius-Duhem is finally written
(11.114) The thermodynamic formulation of fissuring is thus very close to that of plasticity. The evolution of the internal variable a can be computed from a complementary formalism: the dissipation potential
=-
a
ag
(11.115)
Brittle fracture can then be compared with ideal plasticity with a yield locus such that
(11.116)
/(g) = g - 2,
If the energy release rate (Fig. 11.21) is less than 2" the crack length remains constant whereas when g reaches 2, there is a "brute rupture" that is
/<0 /=0 /=0
/<0 /=0
(dg
< 0)
(dg
= 0)
(11.117)
g
Fig. 11.2 I. Analogy between and brittle
ideal plasticity
fracture.
The crack length evolution is indeterminated
a=~a/
ag
=~
since
(11.118)
274
Part III. Mechanisms
of material
cohesion loss
By assuming a linear quasistatic process, one allows the loading point to move outside the yield locus (Fig. 11.22) otherwise than by an incremental quantity (since before releasing the process, the energy release rate can largely exceed 2}) which is theoretically prohibited by the plasticity theory.
g(F+~F.a)
g(F+~F.a+~a) =g(F.a) 2'Y ~
~___________
a
Fig. 11.22. The two steps of a linear brittle
11.17
elastic
process.
CONCLUSION
The propagation of a single crack through a brittle material incompletely explains rocks rupture, particularly under compressive stress fields. In fact, a piece of rock contains numerous flaws and, under increasing loadings, these microcracks propagate, leading finally to the collapse of the structure by appearance of a macroscopic fracture. There is therefore a "non-linear" phase between the purely elastic domain and the collapse level. This non-linear phase corresponding to an "equivalent plastic hardening" is called "damage" and will be studied in the next chapter.
BIBLIOGRAPHY M., BUI, H.D., and BANG VAN, K., 1979, Analytical asymptotic solutions of the kinked crack problem, C.R. acado Sc. Paris, serie B 289; pp. 99-102.
AMESTOY,
BERRY, J.P., 1963, J. App. Phys., 34-62. - 1960, J. Mech. Phy. Solids, 8/194.
Chapter 11. Fissuring
275
BUl, H.D., 1978, Mecanique de la rupture fragile, Masson. CHARLEZ, PH., SEGAL, A., and PERRIE, F., 1991, Microstatistical brittle rocks, Submitted to IJRM and mining sciences.
behaviour
COTTERELL, B., and RICE, J .R., 1980, Slightly curved cruces, International of Fracture, Vol. 16 No2, pp.155-169. ERDOGAN, F., 1968, Crack propagation Vol. II, Academic Press. GOODIER, J.N., 1968, Mathematical advanced treatise", Vol. II, Academic GRIFFITH, A.A., classics.
theories, in "Fracture, theory of equilibrium Press.
1920, The phenomenon
of
Journal
an advanced
treatise" ,
cracks, in "Fracture,
an
of rupture and flow in solids, Metallurgical
lIAMAMDJIAN, C., 1989, Determination de l'eiat de contrainte de la microfissuration des roches, Ph.D Thesis, Ee Paris.
geostatique
par l'etude
HORII, H., and NEMAT-NASSER, S., 1985, Compression-induced microcracks growth in brittle solids: axial splitting and shear fracture, J .G.R., Vol. 90, No 14, pp.31053125. IRWIN, G., 1957, Analysis of stress and strain near the end of a crack traversing plane, J. of applied Mechanics V.S.S., No3, pp.361-364.
a
JAEGER, J .C., 1966, Brittle fracture of rocks, in "Failure and breakage of rocks", 8th Symposium on Rock Mechanics, 15-17 September 1966, Minneapolis, Port City Press, Baltimore. MANDEL, J., 1966, Mecanique
des milieux
continus, Vol. I and II, Gauthier-Villars.
OUCHTERLONY, F., 1980, Review of fracture toughness
testing of rock, unpublished.
RICE, J .R., 1968, Mathematical analysis in the mechanics and advanced treatise", Vol. II, Academic Press. SIH, G.C., 1973, Methods of analysis and solutions hoff International Publishing, Leyden.
of fracture,
in "Fracture,
of crack problems, Vol. I, Noord-
SIH, G.C., and LIEBOWITZ, H., 1968, Mathematical theory of brittle fracture, "Fracture, an advanced treatise", Vol. II, Academic Press. STEIFF, P., 1984, Crack extension under compressive mechanics", Vol. 20, No 3, pp.463-473.
loadings, "Engineering
in
fracture
CHAPTER
12
Introduction to damage theory
Let us consider once more, the case of a triaxial test, but let us in crease the deviatoric loading beyond the elastic domain. The radial and longitudinal stress strain curves are both analyzed (Fig. 12.1). One can easily see that after a linear part, cor. csponding to purely elastic behaviour, there is an inflection of the stress strain curves, much more obvious on the radial direction than on the longitudinal one. This phenomenon is clearly explained if one remembers the Mandel criterion (Chapter 11): "Under compressive loading, each crack has a tendency to align itself parallelly to the minimal component of the stress tensor (compressions are negative!) but, the propagation lengths are limited by friction. Furthermore only a certain quantity of flaws (those inclined with respect to the principal stresses) will be active". Damage by microcracking is therefore only sensitive to the deviatoric component of the stress tensor but insensitive to the mean stress which does not induce any shear on the crack lips. Macroscopically, damage corresponds to a gradual decreasing of the rigidity matrix of the material more particularly, of its shear modulus since damage is insensitive to the mean stress. Furthermore, damage is generally accompanied with other dissipative processes such as plasticity or friction. There are two categories of damage models. The first one is called phenomenological since its foundations are based on purely macroscopic considerations of the material during damage irrespective of microscopic effects. It is based on an irreversible reduction of the rigidity matrix during the process. The second category of models consists in analyzing the microscopic damage effects then in substituting for the heterogeneous solid an equivalent homogeneous solido We propose to analyse precisely both in the following paragraphs.
278
Part III. Mechanisms
re =
0.9
of material
cohesion loss
150 BARS
0.8
~ 0.7 .o
.•... Ol\!
o
0.6
'"
'O
O..... ~ 1
~ 0.5 ;::l o
.<::
t:
0.4
0.3 0.2
Indonesian
sandstone
Fig. 12.1. Stress-strain
curve in a damage material.
A. LEMAITRE'S DAMAGE MODEL 12.1
THEORETICAL
BASES
This model is the simplest one since it introduces a single scalar state variable. It neglects sliding and friction: the only dissipative mechanism considered is damage. The free energy 'Ij; is defined by a single elastic term (no blocked-up energy). The elasticity matrix depends on a damage variable d (12.1) In the original model, the initial elastic isotropy is preserved during the irreversible damage process. Following experimental considerations one is led here to damage exclusively the shear modulus (12.2) where
eij
is the deviatoric strain eij
= éij
-
ékk 3Dij
(12.3)
279
Chapter 12. Introduction to damage theory
The constitutive
law is easily computed by deriving (12.2) with respect to f i.e. (J"ij
= 007j; =
+ 2G(1
IÚ:kkóij
- d)eij
. (12.4)
éij
The thermodynamic
force associated with d can be defined as follows
(12.5) Since damage is the only irreversible phenomenon inequality of Clausius Duhem reduces to
considered in the process, the
gd '? O
(12.6)
If one compares relation (12.6) with Eq. (11.114) of the previous chapter one can associate 9 with the energy release rate and d with the crack velocity a. One can therefore generalize Griffith's criterion to damage process by defining the yield locus I(g) such that
I(g, d)
=9-
k(d)
= Geijeij
- k(d)
= 1(1l, d)
(12.7)
where k(d) is a hardening function characterizing the non-linear behaviour of the material during damage. In the case of an elastobrittle material, this function will be a constant equal to the surface energy 2/. The equivalent plasticity condition can be written as follows
Iis, d) < O
d=O
I(g,d)
=O
j(g, d) < O
=> d=O
I(g,d)
=O
j(g, d) = O
=> d>O
Finally the elastic-damage with respect to time that is
incremental
(12.8)
law can be calculated by deriving (12.4)
(12.9) To complete the constitutive relation, the damage evolution law has to be calculated. Assuming normality, it is written
(12.9b) To calculate the plastic multiplier one has to consider the consistency condition that is
01
.
01·
0ll : Il + od d
=O
(12.10)
After some calculations, one obtains (12.11)
280
d
Part lII. Mecbanisms
is non-negative
(no restoration
of the damage).
Substituting
oi material cobesion loss
(12.11) in (12.9) leads
to O"ij = !
+
[2G(1-
d)ÓikÓjl - kl~d) (2Gekl)(2Ge;j)]
ekl
(12.12)
or again taking account of (12.3) (12.13) where J(ÓijÓkl - ~Ókl [2G(1-
+
d)Óij] (12.14)
[2G(1-
d)ÓikÓjl - kl~d) (2Geij)(2Gekl)]
with
12.2
=O
0=0
ifd
0=1
ifd>
O
EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF DAMAGE HARDENING LAW law k(d) such that
Let us consider a linear hardening
1
= "2ko[l + 2md]
k(d)
(12.15)
The two constants ko and m depend on the material and have to be determined experimentally by triaxial tests for instance. During the deviatoric phase of a triaxial test", (increasing 0"1 and confining pressure 0"2 constant), the Eqs (12.4) are written taking account of (12.3)
+ 4G(1-
d)]
cd3J( - 2G(1-
d)]
cd3J(
which leads after elimination C1 0"1-0"2
of
C2
+ c2[6J( - 4G(1 + c2[6J( + 2G(1
- d)] (12.16) - d)]
to 3
+ d(2v 3E(1-d)
- 1)
O
(12.17)
If d = O (no damage), Young's modulus of the undamaged matrix i.e. E is found. Similarly, the yield locus g can be expressed in terms of 0"1 and 0"2. Indeed [Eq. (12.5)] (12.18) lOne has to consider stress variations to write (12.16). In fact, the sample is loaded by and O.
0"1
-
0"2
Chapter 12. Introduction
to damage
281
theory
or taking account of (12.3) (in the case of the triaxial path) (12.19) lO.
By subtracting
the two Eqs (12.16), that is
El -
=
E2
0"1 -
0"2
2G(1 _ d)
(12.20)
0"2)2(1 + v) (1- d)2E
(12.21)
one finally obtains
1 (0"1 9=
:3
-
In the case of a triaxial test, the incremental elastic-damage law is written
= + L1l22i2 + L1l33i3 Ó"2= L2211il + L2222i2 + L2233i3
Ó"l
f
Llllli1
Let us use Eq. (12.14) to compute the different coefficients. Taking account of the fact that i2 i3, it is easily shown that,
=
L1l22 L2222
l
(12.22)
= L1l33 = L2233 + 2G(1
(12.23)
- d)
that is
!
(12.24) or using again (12.14)
t
Lllll
-
L2211
e
Lll22 - L2233
•
e
d) - k'(d) (2G)2el(el
2G(1-
- k'(d) (2G)2e2(el
- e2) (12.25)
- e2)
Since
•
(12.26)
ez
r
1
= :3(E2
-
El)
By replacing (12.25) and (12.26) in (12.24) one finally obtains (12.27)
282
Part TII. Mechanisms
oE material
cohesion loss
Let us consider now the stress strain curve (Fig. 12.2) and the two particular points A and B corresponding respectively to the beginning of non linearity (d O) and to the peak. For these points, the following conditions are fullfilled:
=
point A
0"1 -
0"2
point B
0"1 -
0"2
= Do = DR
/ -
Id=dR
/, I DO
d=O
--
Al
= PR
I
=:r:
-
secant slope
I
I
DR
d=O
lB
I
I / / / /
P
R E~ 1
Fig. 12.2. Calibralion of t.he model through a triaxial test.
From the first condition, ko can be determined. O, the yield locus is written Indeed, for d
=
2g
= ko
d=O
(12.28)
that is, taking account of (12.21) (12.29) From the second condition, one calculates first the value dn of damage at rupture [Eq. (12.17)] versus the slope PR of the stress strain curve at rupture, that is (12.30) Furthermore,
at the peak 0-1
-
0-2 = O which induces [Eq. (12.27)] (12.31)
Chapter 12. Introduction
283
to damage theory
or finally taking account of (12.20) (12.32) since at the peak
r
0"1 -
0"2
= DR.
1
12.3
1
Damage modifies profoundly the thermomechanical behaviour of porous rocks. The phenomenon can be summarized by assuming that damage consists of an irreversible transformation of the non connected porosity into connected porosity. Indeed, before damage the total porosity t is such that
CASE OF THERMOPOROUS MATERIALS
(12.33) where 8 and ~ are respectively the initial non connected and connected porosities. During the non-linear phase, progressive microcracking of the material modifies the initial data and connected porosity in creases while total porosity is supposed to remain constant. At the peak (i.e. for d dR) porosity is wholly connected. Let us consider a linear process, where c (connected porosity) evolves with damage (Fig.12.3a)
=
c = ~
d
1
+ dg
(12.34)
= df d«
being comprised between O (no damage) and 1 (maximum damage). The porous space modifications have a fundamental consequence on the rock behaviour: the compressibility KM, of the matrix increases during damage since the unconnected porosity decreases. On the contrary, the total porosity remaining constant, damage has no influence on the bulk compressibility modulus, KB. Biot's constant o is thus an increasing function of d bounded by !l'o (elastic value) for d O and very close to 1 when maximum damage d« is reached. In a linear process, evolution of o with damage wiU be Such that (Fig. 12.3b)
=
!l'
=
!l'o
+ (1 -
!l'o)d
(12.35)
One understands more clearly here the dependence of the effective stress on the rheological behaviour of rocks: the elastic effecti ve stress !2"+!l'op[ is not valid anymore when damage appears and tends gradually towards the effective plastic stress !2"+ p], Equations (12.34) and (12.35) define a simplified damage process of a porous medium and, as a consequence, aII the thermoporous parameters depending on c and !l' such that B, Ku, TI, !l'u and L wiII be functions of damage while the other parameters such that KB, Kf, «s, !l'f, !l'M wiII remain constant. Determination of the incremental law is very similar to that of the previous paragraph. However, to simplify the calculations one will consider the case of an isothermal porous medium. Taking into consideration thermal effects does not induce any additional difficulty.
284
Part III. Mechanisms
oi material
cohesion loss
b
d
Fig. 12.3. Damage of a porous
In these conditions, 1jJ
the thermodynamic
=
1jJo
+ 21
(m)2 Po
-a(d)1](d)([ Frorn this potential
potential
[Ku(d)Skk - 2
+1](d) 2
é
+ 2GB(1
can be written
- -ddR)eijeij
[see Eq. (8.83)]
]
+crz.o :s+gOm m
(12.36)
: ~) (:)
one can derive the constitutive ![
= (~~)
P - Po =
law
(12.37)
T,m,d
Taking account of (8.45)
and eliminating such that
material.
+
n [-aSkk
mi Po from (12.38) one obtains
:J
(12.38)
the constitutive
law in a drained form (12.39)
Similarly, the thermodynamic
force ~ssociated
with
d
is such that (12.40)
g = - (~~) T m e , '-
that is, taking account of (12.38)2 g
= -21[2 Skk
{OKod
u
+ a 201] od
O)}
- 2GBdReijeij
- 2a od(a1]
1 0'fJ (p - Po) 2 [01] a O -- -=- - -=(a'fJ)2 od 'fJ2 od 'fJ od 20ne derives first expression (12.36) with respect to not a state variable.
d
J (p -
1 'fJ
J (12.41)
PO)Skk
and then substitues (12.38). Indeed, p is
Chapter 12. Introduction
285
to damage theory
The first term between brackets is nil. The second term such that (12.42) leads after derivation to
B(d)-
=
(C o)
2K1B
;-
-
+ 2B1
(1
2 ) KB - Ku (1 -
Cl"o)
(12.43)
where C is a constant such that (12.44) Finally it is easily shown that the third expression between brackets is a constant equal to -(1 - Cl"o). In these conditions, (12.41) becomes
t
l
(12.45)
f
\.
I !
function k(d) is introduced.
As in the previous paragraph, the damage-hardening The equivalent yield locus gk, p, d] will be such that
=g-
(12.46)
k(d)
and the damage condition will be expressed by
1
(12.47)
i I
¡= O is the
classic consistency condition allowing one to calculate the flux variable
d. This condition is written of. + -= of-d'-- O f· -- -of .'. é + -p of. - op od
t
(12.48)
(12.49) with
(p - po)2 B'(d) (p - Po)(l 2(p - po)B(d)
+ k'(d) (12.50)
Cl"o)
- (1 -
Cl"o)ékk
B' (d) is a constant such that 1
(12.51 )
286
Part lIT. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
The incremental law is determined in the same way as in the previous paragraph by calculating the derivative of (12.39)
+ 2GB(1
I
- ddR)eij
- 2GBdReijd (12.52)
-Q'.pbij - (1 - Q'.o)(p - po)dbij which can also be written after elimination of
d
by (12.49) (12.53)
with , [I'Í.B
+ (1 -
2
-'3GB(l-
PH2] Q'.o) Hl
-
ddR)bijbkl
1
- Hl [2GBdReij
Mij = [~:2GBdR]
b¡jbkl
+
+ 2GB(1-
2GBH2dR Hl
e¡jbkl
-
ddR)bikbjl
(12.54)
+ (1- Q'.0)pbij][2GBdRek¡) e¡j
+ [~: (1- Q'.o)p -
B. HOMOGENIZATION
0'] bij
(12.55)
OF
A FISSURED SOLID
12.4
INTRODUCTION
Homogenization consists in substituting for a heterogeneous solid an equivalent homogeneous solid whose macroscopic behaviour is identical. This type of approach allows one to define a physically consistent damage variable linked to the presence of a crack and no longer purely empirical as in the Lemaitre's model. The process taking into account geometrical discontinuities, phenomena like sliding or friction can be envisaged in the constitutive law by introducing other state variables. Once the state variables are defined, the irreversible processes (crack sliding andjor propagation) will be described through a damage-plasticity equivalent formalismo
Chapter 12. Introduction
12.5
287
to damage theory
MACROSCOPIC
AND LOCAL STRESS FIELDS
Let us consider (Fig.12.4) a representative cell volume V containing volume Z. The volume of the salid part is therefore such that V· = V - Z
Fig. 12.4. State
of stress
a cavity
(12.56)
in the representative
cell.
The cell is assumed to be loaded by a uniform stress field ~ known as "macroscopic stress" while within the material, the local non-uniform stress state q; is statically admissible with~. If ii and ñ are respectively the external normal to S (external surface) and to Sz (surface of the cavity) the boundary conditions can be expressed q;ii
= ~ ii
on S
(12.57)
If the cavity is opened, the normal displacement Un is not nul but, Un (normal stress companent on the crack lips) is zero everywhere (since the cavity is not loaded); if it is closed (un = O) then Un f. O. These two conditions can be summarized on Sz
(12.58)
which can also be written in a vectorial form
lz itj· n = O
on Sz
(12.59)
The stress field being statically admissible at any point of V· (12.60)
288
Part LII. Mechanisms of material
Given f any uniform strain field in V* and ü the associated frorn (12.60) it follows
cohesion Ioss
displacement
r (V9.:)üdV = O lv. which can also be written, theorem
r
j;
(12.61 )
taking account of (12.59) and applying 9.:: f dV =
r
ls
(9.:ü)iJdS=
field;
r
ls
the divergence
(~ü)i7dS
(12.62)
= ~.
since on S, 9.: Applying to the last integral the divergence theorem and taking account of the fact that ~ and f are homogeneous, one is led finally to (12.63) since 9.:is nil inside the cavity when V differs from zero (cavity opened).
12.6
MACROSCOPIC
AND LOCAL STRAIN
FIELDS
Let us consider any strain field f and let us extend it in the cavity. If ü is the local displacement field associated with f on S, one can write (since ~ is homogeneous)
~1aoas =
19.:üiJdS
(12.64)
Applying to (12.64) the divergence theorem, one obtains i
= 19.:üiJdS
(~ : f)dV
Let us write
§= ~
(12.65)
lf
dV
=> V(~: §)
(12.66)
= 19.:üiJdS
(12.67)
(12.67) express es the equivalence between the macroscopic strain energy and the work done on the external surface S. Expression (12.66) can be developed sínce f has been defined arbitrarily in the cavity, that is
E
~[l.
fdV
~ [i.fdV
h + ~lz +
fdV]
[(ü® ñ)
(12.68)
+ t(ü®
ñ)]dS]
289
Chapter 12. Introduction to damage theory
Writing (12.69) ..,-l'
one finally obtains §=< f.
> +p
(12.70)
in which < f. > is the average strain field in the healthy is not therefore sufficient to describe the internal state of a state variable p describing the displacements Ü of to describe completely the state. This approach known and Mande!.
parto The macrocospic strain of the cell. The introduction the cavity surface is essential as mean method is due to Hill
f !
12.7
1
EXPRESSION
OF IN THE CASE OF A CRACK
When the cavity is reduced to a crack, one can expound Eq. (12.69) for the upper and lower lips taking account of the fact that the normals are in an opposite direction. If ü+ and ir: are the displacements respectively associated with the upper and the lower lips, p will be written
(12.71)
=
Let us introduce now the displacement discontinuity vector ¡; ü+ - ü- . The latter can be decomposed into a normal component [ün]ñ and a tangential component [Üt][ In these conditions, (12.71) can be expressed in the form (12.72) where (ñ ® i)5 is the symmetric part of (ñ ® i). For a microcrack, ñ does not vary along Sz (straight line). One can therefore extract the matricial products (ñ ® t)5 and (ñ 0 ñ) from the integrals. Writing (12.73)
p can
be finalIy written
p = a( ñ 0 i)5 + /3(ñ 0
ñ)
(12.74)
290
Part III. Mechanisms
oE material
cohesion loss
The description of the cell state requires therefore that beside ffl an additional information be added about the displacement discontinuities across the crack by introducing two internal variables a (slipping variable) and /3 (opening variable). The description of the state is incomplete however since no variables characterize a possible damage of the cell by crack propagation.
12.8
INTRODUCTION OF THE "DAMAGE" VARIABLE
To introduce a damage variable, we shall start from elementary solutions in infinite medium containing a crack such as have been developed in Chapter 11. Let us consider the case of a straight crack of length 2a. We showed in the previous chapter that the displacement discontinuities across the crack lips can be written in the form
x
E] -
a, a[ i = t or n
(12.75)
By replacing (12.75) in (12.73), that is (12.76) leads after integration
to k;7ra2
a,/3= ~
7rkid
= -8-
(12.77)
=
4a2 / f.2, f. being the dimension of the repreafter having introduced the variable d sentative plane cell (V f.2). By replacing (12.77) in (12.75) one obtains
=
(12.78) A new state variable d characterizing the relationship between the dimension of the representative cell and that of the crack appears in the process. Its evolution (always positive) characterizes the irreversible deterioration of the cell.
12.9
STATE LAW. EXPRESSION OF THE THERMODYNAMIC POTENTIAL
We will now determine the expression of the free energy 'I/;(ffl, a, /3,d) [Andrieux (1983)]. The problem consists in applying on the external boundary of the cell a macroscopic stress field ~ and on the crack lips displacement discontinuities [Üt] and [ün].
291
Chapter 12. Introductíon to damage thepry
We may also recall that §is the macroscopic strain field while !!, f and ü are the corresponding local fields. To calculate the expression of the thermodynamic potential 'I/J, let us decompose the global problem into two elementary problems (Fig. 12.5).
Em·2: '" '"
+
local
local
fields
fields
local fields
U,E,\? rvrv I
I
¡
Fig. 12.5. Decomposilion
of the global
prob lern.
1. That of the non-microcracked cell loaded with a homogeneous stress field ~' If it is assumed that the material is linear elastic (with an elastic matrix A) and if E-m is the macrocospic uniform strain field within the non-microcrack;d cell, one will have (Hooke's law)
~=A:E .... == and
1
'l/Jm
where
-m
'l/Jm
= -E : A: E 2 -m ". -m
(12.79)
(12.80)
is the associated elastic free energy [see Eq. (4.51)].
=
O) 2. That of the microcracked cell stress-free on the external boundary (~d but subjected to displacement discontinuities [Üt], [un] on Z. Given !!d' fd and Ud the various local fields, the free energy is such that (12.81) The external surface S being stress-free, we have (12.82) 'l/Jd
can then be written (12.83)
292
Pert III. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
or by introducing the displacement discontinuities boundary conditions on the crack lips Ut and Un
[Üt] and [ün] and the associated
(12.84) Taking account of relationships
(11.19) and (11.20), leads to (12.85)
in which
7'
is the distance between the crack tip and a point of coordinate x (Fig. 12.6). y
-a
-x
x
---
a
o
r
Fig. 12.6 Coordinate
system
at the crack
tipo
Replacing the elementary solutions (12.78) in (12.85) one obtains
tPd
=
4E(
a
71"2[2(1
which leads after integration
2
+ (32) 2
-
v2)d
{¡a
(a
o
+ x )dx +
¡-a
(a
o
+ x )dx
}
(12.86)
to . hK wit \.0 =
or in a matrix form by introducing
(12.87)
the unit tensor of the fourth order
tPd = ~K(cI> : 1 : cI» 2
2E 2( 1- v 2)
71"
-
==
-
Ko wit. l}r 1 \. = -=d
(12.88)
The total free energy is the sum of the elementary thermodynamic potentials tPm and tPd. By introducing §instead of §m in (12.80) (§= §m +~) one finally obtains (12.89)
Chapter
12. Introduction
12.10
293
to damage theory
INEQUALITY OF CLAUSIUS-DUHEM ASSOCIATED THERMODYNAMIC FORCES
The thermodynamic potential makes it possible to study reversible processes and to define the thermodynamic farces associated with state variables. If dissipative mechanisms come into play, a complementary formalism is necessary to describe the evolution of the internal variables. In the case of a damage process by microcracking and of a plastic process due to microfrictions (three state variables a, (3 and d), inequality of the Clausius-Duhem can be written Aa
+ B /3 + gd. 2: o
(12.90)
/3
a, and d being the time derivatives of internal variables and A, B and g the thermodynamic forces associated with the internal variables and such that 8'1/;
B = _8'1/; 8(3 The thermodynamicforces [Eq. (12.89)]
(12.91)
g=--.
8d
(12.91) can be calculated since expression of'l/; is known
8'1/; 8~ = -[(~- E): A+ KI : ~l: -= -.. '" - 8a 8'1/; 8~ B = - 8(3 = -[(p-.fd): ~+ A·r: p]: 8/3
A
= -- 8a
(12.92)
?
1
g
=-
8'1/;
8d
1 ic;
= 2d
2
[p:
(12.93)
l; : p]
(12.94)
Replacing (12.92), (12.93) and (12.94) in (12.90) and taking account of the fact that ~- - E -E-m and E = A· E one obtains ---::::-m
=
8~. + (E -
(E- - K 1•• : ~) : !:l - a va
-
8~. + (1- ~d.
K 1 : ~) : !:l(3- (3 •• -
v
Ko
2
[~: -.. 1 :~]-
) -'d> O
-
(12.95)
or again, taking account of (12.74) (12.96) Three terms, each associated with each of the internal variables, appear in the inequality (12.96). If the only dissipative processes are friction and damage, the central term linked to opening is zero. Indeed, without damage (d O), it is only when the crack is closed (/3 O) that dissipation can exist (by friction). In this way, the inequality of Clausius-Duhem is reduced to
=
=
(12.97)
Part lII. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
294
Vle shall now derive from Eq. (12.97) four specific constitutive following cases: (a) (b) (c) (d)
=
O). Open crack (f3 # O) without damage (d Closed crack (f3 = O) without damage (d = O). Open crack (f3 # O) with damage ((1 # O). Closed crack (f3 = O) with damage (d # O).
12.11
NO DAMAGE.
OPEN CRACK
. If the crack is open, there is not any friction.
(d
laws concerning the
If the damage does not evolve
= O),
the process is therefore purely reversible and Eq. (12.96) becomes an equality which leads to (since ¿, and j3 # O)
f3
2E: J{ -
(ñ ® ¡:'S
2E: J{-
(ñ ® ñ)
')
(12.98)
which can also be expressed as a function of the macroscopic strain fields. Indeed, since by writing
Equations
..
T
A: (ñ®t)s
!j
A: (ñ® ñ)
(12.99)
'"
(12.98) will therefore be written
(12.100)
f3 In these expressions, the right-hand terms containing J{ and ~ are of the second order in d [see Eqs (12.74), (12.77) and (12.88)] while those containing only J{ are of the first order in d. As d is small (a « f) one can limit oneself to the terms of the first order and write 1 a ~ }.?E:T \. (12.101)
-
f3
~
-
1 J{!2:!j
Taking account of (12.74), (12.89), (12.98) and (12.99) the free energy equal to
'1j;
will be
(12.102)
Chapter 12. Introductíon
to damage
295
theory
that is replacing (12.101) in (12.102)
1/J =
1
"2.fd: [~- [{-l(T® T+ N® N)] : .fd
(12.103)
which can be written 1
1/J=-E:A 2-
ti = ~ -
with
I
:E '" J(-l(T®
(12.104)
T+
N® ~D
The effect of the microcrack (compared with a healthy matrix) is therefore to reduce the rigidity of the material and to create a structural anisotropy (directional character ofTand!!J. On the other hand the behaviour remains, as predicted, elastic since no dissipation intervenes in the process.
12.12
NO DAMAGE.
CLOSED CRACK
If friction alone intervenes as a dissipative proc~ss, the inequality
of Clausius-
= O since the crack is closed, d = O since no damage
Duhem is reduced to (/3
occurred) (12.105)
whereas the thermodynamic
potential is such that [see Eq. (12.87)]
1/Jd =
1
a2
2
d
-J(o-=-
(12.106)
1/Jd represents a blocked-up energy in the friction process. This energy is stored in the elastic matrix as in a spring and can be recovered if friction is inverted. The thermodynamic potential is no longer sufficient to describe the material behaviour: one has to introduce into the formalism a slippage criterion that of Coulomb for example, that is if
IUtl < -J.l.Un
[Üt] = O i.e. no slippage
if IUtl = -J.l.Un
:1 O
[Üt]
(12.107) i.e. slippage
J.I. being the internal friction coefficient previously defined, Un and a¡ the normal and tangential stress on the crack lips (un is negative). These components can be computed from the solution of the elastic problem whose boundary conditions are
on S on Sz
~= ~ [ün]
=O
(where ~ is the boundary condition)
[Üt]
=
8~ 7rd
Ja
everywhere in V,
2 -
"V~
x2
=O
[Eq. (12.78)]
(12.108)
296
Part TIl. Afechanisms
oE material
cohesion loss
The solution to the problem is such that a¡
~t-Ka (12.109)
Un
~n
and ~n being the normal and tangential projections of ~ on the crack lips. Replacing (12.109) in (12.107), one defines a convex domain f(~, a) such that
~t
f(~,a)
= (~t - Ka)2 - J.l2~~
(12.110)
This convex can be expressed with respect to the global macroscopic strain gby introducing the elastic directional tensors T and J:! (~ñ){=
~t
(~ñ)ñ -
~: (ñ®
i)s
= ~:
= ~ : (ñ ® ñ) = A : E -
-= T:
§m : (ñ® i)s : (ñ ® ñ)
-m
=:::
-= N: -
§ (12.111)
E-
since p [Eq. (12.73)] contains a which is of the first order in d [Eq. (12.77)] whereas § and Ka are of order zero in d. Replacing (12.111) in (12.110), one obtains f(§, a) = (T: §+ J.lJ:!: §- Ka)(T:
§- J.lJ:!: §- Ka)
(12.112)
(12.112) represents a "damage" yield locus. By analogy, with plasticity, slippage condition will be written
= O (no
f(§, a)
f(§, a)
=O
and j(§, a)
á = O (no slip)
f(§, a) = O
and j(§, a)
=O
á
á
Equation (12.112) represents in the space
T:
i=
slip) (12.113)
O (slip)
§, J:!: §two straight lines (Fig.12.7).
f=O, ()=1
Ka
--------...""'-------j,.--'----~ f=O, () =-1
closed crack
~~
open crack
Fig. 12.7. Yield locus in the case of slippage wíthout
Equation
damage.
(12.112) can be condensed in the form f(§, a) = T: §+ (}J.lJ:!:§- Ka = O
(}= 1 { (}= -1
(12.114)
Chapter 12. Introduction
297
to damage theory
The inequality of Clausius-Duhem
[Eq. (12.96)] which is written (12.115)
makes it possible to determine the signe of ex (i.e. the sliding direction). Indeed, if = 1 the criterion is written
e
'[: l}d+ ¡tJ;f: l}d- K ex
=o
(12.116)
Replacing (12.116) in (12.115) and taking account of the first Eq. (12.111), leads to (-¡tJ;f: fd)a ~ O
(12.117)
e a a~
which shows (since J;f: fd < Othe crack being closed) that if = 1 is always positive. Similarly one could show in the same way that if = -1, O. Let us now calculate the evolution of the sliding parameter ex by expressing the consistency condition
e
f The derivative of
af
.
.
=
af
.
af.
(12.118)
afd: fd+ aex ex = O
f with respect to fd is written [Eq. (12.112)] ('[: §+ ¡tJ;f: §)('[: l}d- ¡tJ;f: l}d- Kex)
al}d:E
(12.119)
+('[: §- ¡tJ;f: §)('[: l}d+ ¡tJ;f: l}d- Kex) If
o = 1, the
yield locus is such that '[: fd- Ko
= -¡tJ;f:
fd
(12.120)
Replacing (12.120) in (12.119), one obtains af . al}d: l}d= (-2¡tl:!:
.. l}d)('[: l}d+¡tJ;f: l}d)
In the same way, one obtains for the other derivatives
af
.
: E = (-2¡tN: al}d -
E)(-T: -
..
E+ u.N: li'I r" -';;;1
0=-1
~~a
= (-2¡tJ;f:
l}d)(-Ka)
0=1
~~ a
= (-2¡tJ;f:
l}d)(K a)
0=-1
(12.121)
The consistency condition can be condensed in the form . . T: E+ O¡tN: E- - -
Ka
=O{
0=1 0=-1
(12.122)
298
Part TIl. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
The evolution of
a will be
therefore such that
a = ~[T: 1. B.. -
E+ O/lN: E] . {:.' -
-
(12.123)
0=-1
-
When a varies, the two straight lines of the yield locus move along the axis '[': J}; as shown in Fig.12.7. This is a sort kinematic hardening. We should note lastly that the plastic strain increment ~ is such that [see Eq. (12.74)] (12.124) ~ is parallel to the '[': J}; axis (direction of slip). The plastic flow rule is therefore not associated since the normality principle is not respected.
12.13
DAMAGE
As in Lemaitre's phenomenological model, and by analogy with classical fracture mechanics one considers that the damage will evolve if the thermodynamic force associated with d reaches a critical value k(d) in other words if and only if [see Eq. (12.94)]
= ~;~ (a2 + ,82) -
F
k(d)
=O
(12.125)
The damage condition is therefore written if F
if F
=O =O
if F
12.13.1
d=O and
F<
and F
O
d=O
=O
d>O
(12.126)
Specific case in which the crack is open
In this case, the first two terms of the inequality of Clausius-Duhem there is no dissipation by friction, that is [see Eq. (12.96)]
~(~:
are zero since
(ñ ® i)s) = I~o('[: J};) (12.127)
,8
=
~(E : (ñ ® ñ)) K
-
=
d (N: E)
Ko -
-
Replacing (12.127) in (12.125), one obtains
F(J};,d)
= 2J
J};)2+ (ij: J};)2] - k(d)
(12.128)
Chapter
12. Introduction
In space
l:
299
to damage theory
§, 1j: §, the function F represents
J
a central circle of radius
k(d)
(Fig.12.8). T:E
"''''
N:E ----------------~------+--------~ "''''
open crack
closed crack
Fig. 12.8. Yield locus in the case of damage without friction.
The consistency condition is written (12.129) and leads to
d = Kok'(d) 1
E) + (N:
[(T: E)(T: -
-
-
-
-
-
Similarly, deriving expressions (12.127) with respect to
d
.
Ko (l: §)
.
f3
12.13.2
d
.
Ko (1j: §)
E)]
E)(N:
-
-
-!2 and d, one
(12.130) obtains
d + Ko (l: §) .
(12.131)
d
+ ko (1j:
§)
Specific case in which the crack is closed
If the crack is closed, f3 = O, two mechanisms of dissipation and friction) with which are associated the two yield loci
f(-!2, a, d)
F(d,a)
T: -!2+
!Ko 2
-¡p
8J1.!j:
a2 _
are involved (damage
-!2- K(d)a
k(d)
(12.132)
300
Part III. Mechanisms
oi material cohesion loss
Let us assume separately a non negative dissipation condition for each mechanism. The "plastic" conditions are
a =1 o d>o
{:::::::>
f
= o and j = o
{:::::::>
F
= o and F = o
(12.133)
The last one can be expounded directly
F and
= O => a = ac(d) = d . F
aF. = O => ~a+ va
(12.134)
aF.:... O
--=d= ad
That is after derivation -d· _
-
Ko ( -2
md
. )+
aa
since
d is always positive (no restoration)
(12.135)
with
Equation (12.134) shows that for the damage to evolve, one has reach a c:-itical of dissipation conditions (i.e. Aa value ac. The independence do es not induce the independence of the two mechanisms. The conditions (12.133) can be replaced by
2:: o and gd 2::
O)
j=O (12.136) aa>
O
The evolution of a can be calculated from the first consistency condition that is
al . E al. ald - o f· -- a § . - + aa a + ad -
(12.137)
which leads, taking account of (12.121) to
¿ = BK(d)a + BK'(d)ad
(12.138)
with
¿ = el: §+ Id!: § or, replacing K(d),
K'(d)
and d by their values
¿=
I~o [Ba - :~3Ba(aa)+]
(12.139)
Chapter
12. Introduction
301
to damage theory
which can also be written in the form (after a relatively long calculation)
¿ = ~o es [kl(d) + ~d) d
{l- 05g(a)}]
(12.140)
dm
m
where 5g is the sign function. still being of the same sign as and expressions between square brackets still being positive, is strictly positive. From expression (12.139), can be calculated
a
o
¿
a
md a = k'(d)d
+ k(d)[l
dO'+ _ 8Sg(a)] J{o (O
The phenomenon is globally displayed in Fig.12.9. (T: .§, !:f: .§) is in a position such that f < O and F elastic.
<
(12.141)
If the representative point O, the behaviour is purely
f=O,M=l
______________ ~~----~~~L--___ ~:~ Ka
f=O.M=-1 open crack
closed crack
Fig. 12.9. Yield locus in lile case closed crack with damage.
of a
When the first criterion (that is f = O) is reached, there is some slip without axis, damage, and the two straight lines defining the slip criterion move along the until one of the straight lines merges with F = O. At that moment, damage begins (d > O), and ac evolves. The two straight lines F = O (a = ac or a = -ac) then move in the direction indicated by the slip, which creates a dissymmetric evolution of the damage criterion with respect to its initial state . The sense of this dissymmetry must be physically understood through the frietion process: the blocked-up energy due to friction makes it more easy to reach the critical value -ac if the sliding is reversed. Analogy of Fig.12.1O clearly shows the phenomenon.
r: ~
•
~
f
302
Part III. Mechan;sms
oEmaterial coheaion
1055
ROCK The e ncr gy stored in the spring m ake s it e aster lo bre ak lhe
Fig. 12.10. Analogy when reversing
glue.
lhc sliding.
BIBLIOGRAPHY ANDRIEUX, S., 1983, Un modele de matériau au béton, Thesis ENPC, Paris.
microfissuré.
Application
aux roches ei
ANDRIEUX, S., BAMBERGER, Y., and MARIGO, J.J., 1986, Un modele de matériau microfissuré pour les bétons et les roches, J. Mécanique Theor Appl, Vol. 5, pp. 471513. CHARLEZ, PH., DESOYER, T., and DRAGON, A., 1989, Etude de la tenue mécanique des parois rocheuses autour des forages. Intégration de l'endommagement, CNRSTOTAL CFP report, "Stabilité des forages profonds" . DRAGON, A., 1988, Homogénéisation. Endommagement par microfissuration. Bifurcatíon par localisation de la déformation, Conferences TOTAL CFP, unpublished. DRAGON, A. and DESOYER, T., 1989, Endommagement par microfissuration accompagné d'effets de type plastique dú aux microfrotiemenis, Etude de la tenue mécanique des parois rocheuses auiour des forages profonds, TOTAL CFP report, CNRS Project "Stabilité des parois" , unpublished. DRAGON, A., 1988, Plasticité Poitiers, ENSMA.
et endommagement,
Cours de 3' cycle, Université
de
DRAGON, A., and MROZ, Z" 1979, A continuum model for plastic briitle behaviour of rock and concrete, lnt. J. Engineering Science, Vol. 17, pp. 121-137. KACHANOV, M.L. (Jr), 1982, A microcrack chanics of materials", 1, pp. 29-41. KACHANOV, L.M., 1986, Introduction jhoff.
model of rock inelasticity,
to continuum
damage mechanics,
KRAJCINOVIC, D., and LEMAITRE, J., 1987, Continuum tion, CISM Course, Springer. SUQUET, P.M.,
1982, Plasticité
et homogénéisation,
partII. Martines
"MeNi-
damage theory and applica-
Thesis Université
Paris VI.
I
CHAPTER
13
Appearance of shearing bands in geomaterials
I
I
A. INTRODUCTION BASIC CONTRADICTION Appearance of shearing bands in geomaterials (and particularly in rocks) remains a poorly understood phenomenon. The main problem lies in the fact that there is a contradiction between the microstructural and the macroscopic behaviour with regard to rupture. Indeed under compressive loading single cracks will always tend to align themselves with the minor component of the stress tensor (compressions are assumed to be negative) by propagating in mode I (Fig. 13.1a). If this reasoning is extrapolated for material containing numerous defects, any sample should therefore develop a macroscopic crack parallel to this same minor stress and break into pillars (Fig. 13.1b). This rupture mode is clearly observed under uniaxial compression. On the contrary under biaxial (or, which is the same, triaxial revolution) compression, a "shearing band" (Fig. 13.1c) inclined with respect to 0'1 appears. Aside from any kinematic consideration the observed fracture threshold seems very closely linked to the cracking mode: while at high confining pressure, the intrinsic curve is practically linear (and consequently equivalent to a Mohr-Coulomb straight line) under low mean stress, the material seems much less resistant than forecast by extrapolation of the MohrCoulomb slope (Fig. 13.2). The stress area can therefore be separated into two distinct zones I and II corresponding respectively to the non-linear part of the intrinsic curve, on the one hand (zone I) and to the linear part on the other (zone II). The two kinematics described previously can be associated (qualitatively at least) with zones I and II: in zone lone is more likely to observe column-type fractures, in zone II, shearing bands.
Part III. l\.fechanisms of material
304
c
b
a Fig. 13.1. Fundamental behaviour
contradiction
and the appearance a-single
cohesion loss
between
of a shear
the microscopic
band.
crack
b+p ill ar rupture c+she ar band
7
ZI
Z2
(J
Fig. 13.2. The two zones of the intrinsic
curve.
There is therefore a basic contradiction under biaxial compression between the behaviour of a crack and that of a macroscopic volume containing a certain number of cracks. At the present time there is no satisfactory answer: three different approaches will be developed successively in this chapter. Firstly, the appearance of a shearing band will be seen as a purely macroscopic phenomenon. This is the simplest and most conventional approach: the Mohr-Coulomb criterion. Secondly, the process will be envisaged as the result of the coalescence of growing cracks and, lastly, as a bifurcation phenomenon.
Chapter 13. Appearance
of shearing bands in geomaterials
B. THE MOHR-COULOMB THE CONVENTIONAL
305
CRITERION
MACROSCOPIC
APPROACH
Appearance of a shearing band can be considered as the ultimate process of a plastic strain by slip as described in Chapter 10. The Mohr-Coulomb criterion represents the most conventional approach in rock mechanics, to the problem of rupture in compression. It is also the earliest since it dates back to the 18th century when builders and architects were vitally concerned with knowing the maximum weight a column could support. Coulomb, however, was the first to correlate the orientation of rupture planes and the direction of the maximum shearing parallel to them. It was Coulomb again who attributed the angle differences with respect to 45° to the internal friction of the material. This brief historical presentation shows that the origin of this criterion, is known above all from a kinematic macroscopic description: the appearance of a shearing band forming an angle 1r/4 - 'P/2 with the direction of the minor principal stress (where 'P is the friction angle). Although this kinematic is in contradiction with the microstructural rupture mechanism (mode I), the Mohr-Coulomb criterion remains at the present time as good an explanation as any other. In particular, it provides a highly satisfactory explanation for the three rupture modes encountered in the Earth's crust with which geologists associate three different types of faults.
normal
fault Fig. 13.3. The three
thrust
fault
types of elementary
transcurrent
fault
faults
(after Paul. 1968)
Depending on whether the vertical stress (Fig. 13.3) is major, intermediate or minor, principal stress, the observed rupture plane will be oriented differently. These three rupture modes are extremely important for they are often to be encountered around deep wells.
306
Part III. Mechanisms
C. THE MICROSTRUCTURAL
of material
cohesion loss
APPROACH
OF THE SHEARING BAND Another approach is no longer to consider the material as homogeneous but as a population of cracks around which high stress concentrations eventually lead to a collapse of the structure and consequently to the potential appearance of a shear band.
13.1
THE ROCK CONSIDERED AS A MATERIAL WITH A POPULATION OF CRACKS
Let us consider a macroscopic volume V of material as a set of N small elementary cells of volume Va, each containing a crack of length 2a, of shape coefficient a and of orientation (3 with respect to x axis (Fig. 13.4).
~
r-
/
-, -, -, -,
/
<,
/ /
<,
/ /
/
/
-, -,
/
-, -,
/
<,
/
<,
/
/
,"-
/
-,
/
"-
/
<,
/
<,
/
<,
Fig. 13.4. Micro-structural
y
"'----------'---tl~
x
model of a geomaterial.
Lengths, opening and orientations are considered to be random variables A, B and C with which are associated the probability distribution functions F(a), H(a) and G({3) such that
F(a)
= ~[A
< a]
H(a)
= ~[B
< a]
G({3)
= ~[C
< {3]
(13.1)
Before any loading, the material is considered as isotropic; the orientation of the cracks is thus equiprobable in all directions (varying by symmetry between 0 and 7f /2 only), that is (13.2)
Chapter
13. Appearance
of shearing bands in geomaterials
307
in which g(f3) is the probability density associated with f3. The equiprobability dependence of g(f3) with respect to (3) enables one to write 2 g(f3) = -
!
l
I ~
(in-
(13.3)
7r
The lengths distribution can be determined by taking account of the fact that among a set of cracks identically oriented the longest will be the most critical under an identical loading. One therefore seeks to find the distribution of the longest cracks contained in V. One can show in this case that a follows an exponential-type distribution (see Freudenthal, 1968) such that
i
~[A
~ ~
I
< a] = F(a) = exp
[_ (~)
-or]
(13.4)
in which 'Yand u are intrinsic characteristics of the material. u represents the modal value of the distribution and 'Ythe dispersion around this modal value. It can easily be verified that (13.4) respects the boundary conditions
l
F(oo)
=
F(O)
~[A < 00] = 1 ~[A
< 0] = 0
By deriving (13.4) with respect to a one obtains the probability density associated with a that is
(13.5)
1 \/.
The openings (or shape coefficients) distribution can be determined by a compressibility test and is limited to a maximum value aM. The knowledge of h( a) makes it possible to calculate the number of cracks which remain open under a given state of stress by the equation [see Eqs (6.37) and (6.40)]
NT N
=
10F"
with f3cr = arcsin
13.2
1 ;h(a)[7r
- 2f3cr(a, 0'1, 0'2)]da
0'1 + aI(
(13.6)
E I(
= 2(1- v2)
RUPTURE PROBABILITY OF A SINGLE CRACK UNDER BIAXIAL LOADING
Since the crack is small with respect to the elementary mesh size (of volume Vo), calculations can be made under the hypothesis of an infinite medium.
308
Part III. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
We saw in the chapter devoted to fissuring that a closed crack under a compressive biaxial loading initiated [Eqs (11.98) to (11.102)] if two conditions were observed, namely
(13.7)
with
1
= -2 arctan
13M
(1) --
J-l
+-7r2
and
(13.8) with
In the more general case for which the crack is open, these equations have to be corrected because of the fact that the actual normal stress is the difference between the critical closing stress (equal to exl{) and the previous one. Consequently, the driving shear stress acting on the crack is equal to k k
= 1 closed crack = 0 open crack
(13.9)
Finally one is led to
with 13M
1
(1)
= -2 arctan 7r
13M =4
--
if k
+-7r2
u
=0
if k
=1
closed crack
open crack
(13.10)
and
(a)
~f3 Cr
with
= 13c1,
-
132 Cr
= arctan
~v'_1_---,-(C_2_---,kJ-l_2....:..)
C
(13.11)
309
Chapter 13. Appearance of shearing bands in geomaterials
The rupture probability of a crack contained in an elementary volume Vo can now be calculated by considering all the lengths, orientations and openings, leading to rupture that is
(13.12) Assuming, to simplify, a constant average value for a, and taking account of (13.3) and (13.5), we obtain
1
I
~R[0"1'0"2]
=~ 7r
('0
J
,u'Yil,Bcr(a)a-('Y+1)exp {_
(~)-"f}
da
(13.13)
U
amin
By writing
(13.14) the integral (13.13) becomes
(13.15) with Zmin
= exp { -
Y} -u(amin)-'
The form of il,Bcr makes it possible to approximate that is
(13.16) (13.15) by the mean formula, (13.17)
For a given loading one can therefore assign a rupture cracks and Fc to closed cracks
,
FT
=F
(0"1'0"2,fL
Fc
=F
[0"1, 0"2,fL:/=
13.3
1 1
= O,,BM =~) O,,BM
= ~ + ~arctan
COLLAPSE OF A SAMPLE CONCEPT OF REFERENCE
probability
FT to open
open cracks
(13.18) (--};)]
closed cracks
VOLUME
The conventional models proposed on the subject characterize the collapse of a sample of volume V by individually analyzing each elementary mesh Vo. Two approaches are generally proposed:
310
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
1. The Weibull model based on the "weakest link concept" which assumes that instability "of a single mesh" is sufficient to collapse the sample. This is therefore a "serial model" (Fig. 13.5).
v
Fig. 13.5.
Weakest link concept
model.
2. The J ayatilaka model based on the "bundle concept" which on the contrary assumes that the collapse results in the coalescence of several critical cracks. This model can therefore be idealized by a structure in parallel (Fig. 13.6).
v
Fig.13.6. Bundle concept
statistical
model.
In fact neither of these two models adequately accounts for rupture under compressive stress fields. Indeed damage does not progress homogeneously through the sample. For example, under biaxial loading, the shearing band, which is the most intense damage zone does not affect the entire sample (Fig. 13.7), but remains localized in a small volume VR (known as reference volume) greater than Va but much smaller than V. Moreover, outside VR, the material is only slightly damaged and even completely sound. These considerations lead us to build a mixed model by decomposing the total volume V into a certain number of NR reference volumes, each containing N elementary cells of volume Va. The model assumes that the collapse of volume V is reached with the destruction of a single reference volume. So, if HR«(Tl, (T2) represents the rupture probability of any reference volume, the fracture probability of the sample of volume V will be such that (13.19) since the state of stress is assumed to be homogeneous, i.e. identical in any reference volume.
Chapter 13. Appearance
311
of shearing bands in geornaterials
shear
b andfd amaged
zone)
/ v
VR containing
N dcfccts
urid am aged zone
Fig. 13.7. Combining CFP model (after Ctuirtez et al. 1991).
The fracture probability of the reference volume under a given loading 0"1, 0"2 is obtained by considering all the cases for which at least Nf cracks (among the N contained in the reference volume) are critical. Since the loading is fixed, one applies a constant fracture probability FT to every open mesh and a probability Fe to every closed mesh. Let us consider for example the case in which i open cracks (among NT) and j closed cracks (among Ne) are critical. With such a configuration is associated the probability (product of two binomials) NT! F,i (1 F )Nr-i Ne! Fi (1 F. )Nc-i (NT - i)!i! T - T (Ne _ j)!j! e - e
(13.20)
since (NT - i) open cracks and (Ne - j) closed cracks are not critical. The fracture probability of the reference volume is obtained by considering all possible cases (that is i varying from 0 to NT and j varying from 0 to N e) giving rise to rupture (that is i + j ~ NJ), in other words
= (13.21)
i
•
= =
=
It can easily be verified that HR is a probability: for zero loading (FT Fe 0) it is equal to zero while for infinite loading (FT Fe 1, NT 0, Ne N) it is equal to 1. An example of computed intrinsic curve with this combined model is presented in Fig. 13.8.
=
=
=
312
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
u=1 Nf/N=26% VO=0.000125cc p.,=0.68
J.L=0.6 0.8
V=100cc
8
•.... 0
/
300
a=0.49
,D
0.6
'Y=1.5·10~-3
tIl
"0
C
'"
tIl
::>
0.4
0
..:: ~-'
~
0.2
o o
0.4
0.2
0.6
0.8
1001(thousands Fig. 13.8. Computed (the
Mohr circles
inlrinsic are taken
Obar
curve
1
1.2
wilh the combined
for 50% r up ture
75bar
1.4
1.6
1.8
of bar) CFP model
probability).
200bar
500bar
0.9 0.8
l!. l!.
0.7 50bar
0.6
+<>
" l!.
C....0.5
P::
l!.
0.4 l!.
0.3 0.2 0.1
O~~rL-.~~~.-~r-"--.---.--.--~~'---r-~ 0.2
0.6
1
1.4
1.8
2.2
2.6
10011(thousands of bar) Fig. 13.9. Prediction sandstone
of the CFP combined
model
for Vosges
(after Charlez and al. 1991).
It can be observed that for high confining pressure, the intrinsic curve with a slope of 0.68 i.e. very close to the microfriction coefficient /1.
IS
linear
Chapter
13. Appearance
313
of shearing bands in geomaterials
The micromechanical model takes complete account of the non-linear part of the intrinsic curve at low confining pressure (compare the diameter of Mohr's circle at 0 bar with the extrapolation of the linear part of the intrinsic curve). Figure 13.9 shows that a proper set of parameters makes it possible to fit very closely experimental results with this model except at 50 bar confining pressure which corresponds in that particular case to the transition between non-linear and linear parts of the computed intrinsic curve: for this value, the model underestimates the resistance considered. Physically speaking this means that at 50 bar there are no longer any open microcracks although the model still envisages a certain number. This shows moreover that the effect of open cracks is considerable on the quality of the model prediction at low confining pressure.
13.4
CASE OF HETEROGENEOUS STATE OF STRESS
In the case of a heterogeneous state of stress, the structure is divided into a certain number of reference volumes but, since in each point the state of stress varies, the rupture probability of each reference volume will be different. If is the rupture probability of the reference volume localized at a point i, the rupture probability of the structure will be such that
Hk
(13.22)
13.5
PSEUDO-THREE-DIMENSIONAL EXTENSION AND SHAPE OF THE FAILURE ENVELOPE
The theory described above can be extended to a three-dimensional stress state ~ by assuming that the fracture (whose direction is localized by its azimuth 0 and its line of slope rp) is propagated under the effect of the shearing stress applied on its plane that is (assuming a 0)
=
=
TM
T -
Illul
(13.23)
with
(13.24) a
= (~.ii).ii
(13.25)
in which ii is normal to the crack plane (Fig. 13.10). rupture probability P(~) is such that 4
P(~)
1
s:
!!
2
2
= 2" f f f 7r Jo Jo Jo
1i[K/(i[)
Under these conditions,
- K/cldOdrpdFa
the
(13.26)
314
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
z
n
y
;;;>-------;----~
() x Fig. 13.10. Tridimensional
in which 'H is the Heavyside
function
1i( x)
crack.
such that
=1
1i(x)=O
if
x ~ 0
if
x
800
600
400
200
1000
Fig. 13.11. 3D average failure the CFP combined
model
envelope
(after
Charlez
obtained
with
et al, 1991).
Chapter 13. Appearance
of shearing bands in geomaterials
315
and dFa the differential of the distribution of lengths [Eq. (13.5)). In this way, Eq. (13.26) takes account only of the cases for which !{J(q:) ~ !{JC in other words all the cases for which there is crack initiation. The calculation of a 3D !{J('Z) raising considerable analytical problems, one contents oneself in this model with Bui's two-dimensional expression [expression (11.93)). . This pseudo-three-dimensional extension makes it possible to display in the principal stress space the failure envelope (Fig. 13.11) which is relatively similar to that of Mohr-Coulomb, namely a more or less strained pyramid around the hydrostatic axis. This model leads therefore to very coherent results. However, it can be criticized for globally disregarding kinematics and for viewing failure as a purely statistical phenomenon.
13.6
i ~
\
I.
NEMAT NASSER'S
MICROMECHANICAL
MODEL
The appearance of a shearing band seen as an ultimate process in the coalescence of cracks becoming propagated individually in mode I, can only be justified if one considers the mutual interaction between cracks. This type of approach presents theoretical difficulties and, at the present time, it is only in simple cases for which a geometric periodicity is introduced that resolution is possible. Let us consider a row of identical cracks (Fig. 13.12) all of initial length 2e and orientation /. These cracks are periodically spaced by a length d and are propagated individually in mode I of a length f in an azimuth B. Lastly, the middle of each crack is aligned along a straight line forming an angle cI> with the direction of 0"1. The analytical calculation of the !{J associated with each of the propagated cracks and taking account of the influence of the adjacent cracks is extremely awkward. We shall content ourselves here with expounding the main results. If confining pressure 0"2, crack space die and crack orientations / are fixed, the propagation stress 0"11, as a function of the extension length fie for various directions cI>, exhibits a type of curve represented in Fig. 13.13. For sufficiently large values of cI>, 0"1 increases monotonically with fie. For these values of <1>, growth does not therefore lead to instability. On the other hand, for smaller values of cI>, 0"1 initially increases with fie, but quite quickly reaches a maximum then decreases towards a minimum value followed by a further rise. These results show that for a critical value of 0"1, the process suddenly becomes unstable, which leads to the appearance of a macroscopic shearing band. This model is extremely interesting because it takes account of the interaction between cracks, but it can be criticized for the periodicity which "forces" the model towards the expected result, and for the fact that the instability of the cracks being propagated in mode I (in other words parallel to O"t) tends to lead to a uniaxial type rupture and not to a shearing band. The appearance of a shearing band seen as a coalescence of cracks remains therefore physically unexplained at the present time. 1Mode
I only is envisaged in this approach.
316
Part III. Mechanisms
of material
.L a1
, (I' h;
//
,
I
,
I
,
I
, ,
I
,
I
,
I
,
I
: / ()
i/ ,I
~'Y
----------------------~-----I, /:
-------------
••••
2c
I
,
!
, i i i i i
I I
.I I
,,
I
/t Fig. 13.12. Nemat
+
Nasser's
micromechanical
model.
8
6
4
l/e 2
-~--------""""'------¥o 12".
(22·1
.161'
(29")
Fig. 13.13. Evolution in Nernat
Nasser's
.2".
136"1
of the rupture micromechanical
stress model.
cohesion loss
Chapter
13. Appearance
of shearing bands in geomaterials
D. APPEARANCE
317
OF A SHEARING BAND
SEEN AS A BIFURCATION Another approach is to consider the shearing band as a zone in which there is localization of strain leading to a macroscopic instability of the material. Mathematically speaking, this leads to a loss of uniqueness of the boundary solution in other words to a bifurcation.
13.7
EXISTENCE OF THE PHENOMENON DESRUES'S EXPERIMENTAL APPROACH
Stereophotogrammetry makes it possible to measure the incremental displacement field between two successive loadings and to calculate the associated strain field. This method has been successfully used by Desrues (1984) to display the appearance of a shearing band in biaxially loaded (plane strains) sands samples. One of his tests is shown in Fig. 13.14 for various successive loading increments. At the top one can observe the displacement field and at the bottom the associated strain field. These observations reveal starting from increment 3-4, a block-on-block slippage mechanism which intensifies during increments 4-5 and 5-6. For the latter, one observes a spectacular relative motion of two structures (only the upper left-hand part moves). The strain fields clearly show that the localization appears during increment 3-4 then intensifies very sharply for the following increments. The strain localization in the band is accornpained by an unloading of the healthy parts which after localization are practically no longer strained. The appearance of a shearing band can therefore be seen as the shift from a diffuse strain mode (increment 1-2 and 2-3) to a localized strain mode. Fig. 13.14 shows that this localization is at the origin of the peak observed on the stress strain curve. We should note however that, on loose sands, a localization can be observed in the absence of a peak. Generally, localization always precedes the peak, and the peak comes into being in the extension phase of the band. The peak must therefore be considered as a consequence of localization: localization precedes cohesion loss. Furthermore, the appearance of a shearing band is characterized by a substantial dilatancy. Strain localization in a shearing band is therefore experimentally observed. We shall see that by expressing it as a kinematic condition, one is led to the loss of uniqueness of the boundary solution, in other words to a bifurcation.
318
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
axial load(N) 3000
I _4,
2000
1000
volume variation
1 <,
,o
/-,0;- 0-I
10
20
Fig. 13.14. Biaxial test localization (after
13.8
30
axial displacement 40
(mm)
50
on loose sand and display
from a stereophotogrammetry
of
method
Desrues. 1987).
MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION OF LOCALIZATION
Although Hill (1962) put forward the idea oflocalization, it was Rudniki and Rice (1975) who offered a clear formulation of the problem. The following paragraph is therefore built on the basis of their work.
Chapter
13. Appearance
319
of shearing bands in geomaterials
Given a homogeneous solid loaded in a homogeneous manner. At all points of the solid the state of stress ![o is statically admissible. Given (\7 ® 00 the associated velocity gradient (also homogeneous). The strain velocity tensor at all points is such that (13.27) Let us now assume that there is localization in a shearing band chosen arbitrarily normal to the reference axis X2 so that the strain velocities are higher than those of the healthy material (Fig. 13.15) that is in the shear band
(13.28)
healthy
material (~
,!O)
av-
ax
(Jxy
healthy
Fig. 13.15. Localization
of the deformation
in a shear
material
band.
In the shear band, localization prescribes therefore a velocity gradient such that
ee (aJ)
ax = ax
0
(aJ)
+ ~ ax
(13.29)
In the healthy part, ~ (au/ax) is clearly zero. Can the velocity gradient (13.29) exist, in other words is it kinematically, statically and rheologically admissible?
320
Part III. Mechanisms
of material cohesion loss
If so, two solutions will exist concomitantly: the homogenous solution fo which shall remain valid and the bifurcated alternative solution; the boundary problem would therefore no longer be unique. To verify the existence of such a solution, one has to write certain supplementary conditions.
13.8.1
Kinematic condition
The direction of the band represents a first essential condition. Indeed, in a plane parallel to the band (plane Xl, x3 in Fig. 13.15) the velocity gradient remains continuous and it is only if one moves according to axis X2 t.hat the localization phenomenon is perceptible. In other words, it is only in the direction normal to the band that the 6. (fJv;jfJXj) are non-zero which is written
with
{
Dij
=0
if
i =f. j
Dij
=f. 0
if
i
=j=2
(13.30)
or again in a vectorial form (13.31) since ii is parallel to X2. In view of the latter equation, the increase in the strain velocity between the band and the healthy part is therefore such that
6.4: = ~ [Ui® 13.8.2
ii)
+ t(g®
ii)]
(13.32)
Static condition
The stress vector (or stress ratio) must be continuous when passing the bounda of the band which is written (13.3
Q-o and Q- being the stress rates respectively in the healthy part and the band.
13.8.3
Rheological condition
The constitutive
law must be identical in the band and the healthy part, that is
u= -
..
in which L is the constitutive
matrix.
Le =:
(13.34
Replacing (13.34) in (13.33) one is led to
iif;(i - io) = 0
(13.35
Chapter
13. Appearance
321
of shearing bands in geomaterials
which can also be written taking account of the kinematic condition (13.32) (13.36)
...
The condition for bifurcated solution is presented therefore in the form of a homogeneous linear system of three equations in the three unknowns ss, g2, g3. This system admits on the one hand the trivial solution gl g2 g3 0 which corresponds to the homogeneous strain io (no localization). To obtain localization, (gk non-zero) determinant of the matrix Aj k has to be zero
=
det
I~I= 0
A=n.L.n
-
'"
=
=
(13.37)
(13.37) is known as "bifurcation condition" for linear incremental constitutive laws. It is essentially conditioned by the constitutive matrix L. We shall see that only certain constitutive laws can lead to bifurcation. For this p{;'rpose let us envisage two specific cases: linear elasticity and hardening plasticity.
13.9
ELASTICITY
AND BIFURCATION
In the case of linear isotropic elasticity, the constitutive matrix is loading independent (no memory of the material) and the constitutive law is written (Chapter 4)
u=Ai - ::::-
(13.38)
with Aijkl
= >'DijDkl
+ G(DikDjl + DilDjk)
(13.39)
Replacing (13.39) in (13.37) one easily shows that ~ can be written in the form.
~ = (>.
+ G)n ® n + Gf
(13.40)
where>. and G are the Lame's constants. The determinant of A can never be zero (given the term The appearance of a shearing band is therefore not possible in linear elasticity, since only the trivial solution exists.
GD.
13.10
CASE OF RUDNIKI AND RICE'S ELASTOPLASTIC MODEL
Rather than adopt a very general approach we shall seek the conditions for localization in the specific case of Rudniki and Rice's elastoplastic model. Indeed, in accordance with the values of f3 and p,*, it will be possible to analyze the effect of the associativeness of the law on possible bifurcation.
322
Part III. Mechanisms of material cohesion loss
Given an element of material subjected to a stress state 0"1, 0"2, and 0"3 with respect to its principal directions 1, 2, 3 and given II a potential localization plane (a priori unknown) (Fig. 13.16) normal to a direction whose cosine directors are nl, n2, n3, with respect to the reference frame 1, 2, 3. Let us consider lastly, the reference frame x, y, z such that coordinate y is merged with normal ii. The elastoplastic matrix is written [Eq. (10.125)]
G(DmkDnt (~Skt
+ DmlDkn) + + (3KOkl) H
(I< -
2;)
DktDmn
+ Kp.*Dmn)
(~smn
., (13.41)
+G + p.*K(3
x
localization
pl anc
I Fig.
., l3.16.
Reference
frame
and localization
plane.
We should remember that in this equation, G and K are respectively the elastic shear modulus and the hydrostatic bulk modulus, p.* the friction coefficient [in fact this is not exactly the Mohr-Coulomb internal friction coefficient (equal to tan cp) but p.* = sin cp] and (3, the dilatancy coefficient. H is the hardening modulus. The stresses intervening in (13.41) have also been defined previously such that
r
1
T Sij
=
[~SijSij
=
O"ij -
DijU
(13.42) _ O"kk 0"=-
3
Chapter
13. Appearance
323
of shearing bands in geomaterials
The condition for localization (13.37) will therefore be expressed given the specific choice of the system Oxyz (Oy == ii) det
161 = 0
(13.43)
which leads after resolution with respect to the hardening modulus H to
(Gsyy
+ j3K"f)(Gsyy +
J.t*
H= 1'2
K"f)
+ (~G +
f{) G(u;", + u;J -1
(~G + 1<)
(13.44)
The value of H is a function of the orientation of the future localization plane and of the stress state. The question that may be asked is "for a fixed stress state, what is the direction of the first plane on which localization is observed?" H being a decreasing function of incremental strain, one has therefore to seek the orientation for which H is maximum. For this purpose, one has to express each of the components Uyy, uyx and uyz as well as r in the principal reference frame 1,2,3 (Fig. 13.16). By using the matrix of axis change [Eq. (2.34)], one obtains the equalities (Ul < U2 < U3 < 0)
..•,
+ n~s2 + n~s3 sr + s~ + s~ nrSl
n122+ sl
n222+ s2
22 n3s3
(13.45)
2
Syy
l' being independent of ii, it is not necessary to replace it in (13.44). Substituting the other two equations, one is led to ·r
H
+
.,
(~G+ 1<) G r2 (~G + f{)
(13.46)
[n~s~ - (n~sk)2] -1
subjected to the constraint J
= ni + n~ + n5 =
1
(13.47)
The search for a stationary point of H subjected to the constraint (13.47) can be carried out using the method of Lagrange multipliers. The value of ii which maximizes H is solution of the three equations
oH _ oX oj = 0 j
onk
onk
k = 1, 2, 3
(13.48)
which is written after derivation of (13.46) and (13.47)
k = 1,2,3
(13.49)
324
Part III. Mechanisms
with ,X*
=~
and X G Three cases can be discussed:
=
(f3+fl*)(I+v) 3(1-v)
_
of material cohesion loss
Syy
(13.4gb)
r(l-v)
1st case None of the unknown X
nk
is zero. One obtains in this case two independent equations in the
(13.50) This system has no solutions, X not being able to be chosen so that (13.50) is satisfied. Therefore, at least one of the nk is zero. 2nd case Two of the nk are zero. Although the solution is mathematically admissible, this configuration has no physical sense, the shear band never originating in a principal plane (in other words in a zero shear plane). The only physical solution corresponds therefore to that in which the shear band is parallel to one of the principal directions. 3rd case Only one of the nk is zero. Let us assume for example (this choice is arbitrary for the moment) that n2 O. In this case the localization plane is parallel to n2. Given that the localization plane intersects the plane 1 - 3 according to a straight line whose normal makes an angle 0 with direction 3 (major principal stress, in other words minimum compression) (Fig. 13.17). In this case, the director cosines of the normal are such that
=
nl
= sinO
n3
= cos 0
1
(13.51)
'\
trace
of the shear band in plane 1-3.
/"
n
()
219----"---"------~
3
Fig. IJ.17. Trace of the she ar band in the plane in lhe case n2=0.
1-J.
Chapter
13. Appearance
and condition
325
of shearing bands in geomaterials
(13.49) is reduced to the equation (13.52)
whose solution
is such that (13.53)
that is since Sa
=0 (13.54)
from which one extracts (13.47) and (13.51)
by replacing
2
cos 80
=
X in (13.49b)
~-Nm NM - Nm
.
and taking
2
~ -
sin 80 = N
m-
account
NM N
of (13.45),
(13.55)
M
with
~= (1+v)(,B+tL*) 3 Nm = ~
(13.56)
N = ~
T
Replacing
-N(1-v) NM = ~
T
finally (13.55) in the expression
T
(13.46) of H, one is led to
-,'-'-
. t
(13.57) From expressions (13.55) and (13.57) one obtains therefore both the orientation of the shear band and the critical "bifurcation" hardening modulus. This argument is conditioned however by the arbitrary choice of the direction of the localization plane: this choice, which was made parallel to 0"2, could have been made identically with respect to 0"1 or 0"3. In these cases, the condition of the type (13.54) would have been
X=~ 'f
X
=
T S3
T
for a band parallel to
0"1
for a band parallel to
0"3
(13.58)
and the corresponding hardening modulus would have been obtained by substituting in (13.57) N by Nm or NM. Knowing the three values of the critical hardening modulus one has to compare them, which leads to the following inequalities (since H normally decreases with loading)
3
H~r
> H;r <==>,B+ tL* < -2(N
H;r
> H;r
3 <==>,B+ tL* > -2(N
+ NM)
~
band parallel to 3
+Nm)
~
band parallel to 1
(13.59)
326
(0'1
Part III. Mechanisms
of material
cohesion loss
Equations (13.59) can be clearly studied in the case of a compression triaxial test < 0'2 = 0'3) for which NM
1
= N = ..;3
2
and
n.; = - ..;3
(since NM
+ N + N,« = 0)
(13.60) -
,"
Substituting H~r
> H;r
H1cr
H2cr
>
'-
(13.60) in (13.59), one obtains
-..;3 < 0
¢=}
(3 + Jl*
<
¢=}
(3 + Jl *
V3 > 2"
plane parallel to
0'3
(13.61) I pane para IIe1 to
OJ
0'1
The first condition (13.62) can never be satisfied since (3 and Jl* are always positive. Furthermore, the orders of magnitude encountered for (3 (often very small for geomaterials) and Jl* show that the second condition is almost never respected «(3 0, Jl* > 0.87). In a more or less systematic way, the Rudnicki and Rice model schedules therefore a shearing band parallel to the intermediate component 0'2. Bifurcation is therefore in agreement with the Mohr-Coulomb criterion.
=
13.11
BIFURCATION AND ASSOCIATIVENESS
Equation (13.57) shows that, in the case of an associated plastic flow rule «(3 = Jl*), bifurcation appears for a negative hardening modulus, in other words after the peak. On the contrary, for a non-associated plastic flow rule localization can appear during the positive phase of hardening; this is what is known as prebifurcation. This second case is generally much more realistic.
13.12
DISCONTINUOUS BIFURCATION "
In what precedes we assumed that the shear bands and the healthy parts were identically loaded. In reality, experience clearly shows that the material in the healthy part (in other words external to the localized zone) is unloaded elastically after bifurcation. '\
13.13
CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDED RESEARCH }
The appearance of shearing bands in geomaterials remains a complete theoretical problem. While in elastoplastic materials, the theory of bifurcation provides valuable indications, in brittle rocks the basic contradiction between microscopic damage
Chapter
13. Appearance
327
of shearing bands in geomateriaIs
and the macroscopic shearing band remains unexplained. We feel that the purely micro "Nemat Nasser-type" approach is too complex to consider dealing with complicated geometries. We believe much more in a possible "homogenization-bifurcation" coupling, the approach to which in our view is much more accessible. This research could be a good challenge for the future.
BIBLIOGRAPHY CHAMBON, R., 1986, Bifurcation par localisation en bande de cisaillement, proche avec des lois incremenialement non lineaires, JMTA, Vol. 5.
une ap-
CHAMBON, R., and DESRUES, J., 1984, Quelques remarques sur le probleme localisation en bande de cisaillement, Mech. Res. Comm., Vol. 11, pp.145-153.
de la
CHARLEZ, PH., SEGAL, A., PERRIE, F., and DESPAX, D., 1991, Microstatistical behaviour of brittle rocks, submitted to the Int. J. of Rock Mech. and Min. Sci. and Geomech. Abstr. COTTERELL, E., and RICE, J.R., 1980, Slightly curved of kinked cracks, International Journal of fracture, Vol. 16, No 2, pp. 155-169. DESRUES, 1984, Localisation de la deformation D Thesis, IMG Grenoble, June 1984.
dans les metericux
qranulaires,
Ph.
FREUDENTHAL, A., 1968, Statistical approach to brittle fracture, In "Fracture an advanced treatise", Vol. II, pp. 591-619, Academic press, London, New York, San Francisco. HILL, R., 1962, Acceleration
waves in Solids, J. Mech. Phys. Solids, 10, pp.1-16.
HILL, R, and HUTCHINSON, J.W., 1985, Bifurcation test, J. Mech. Phys. Solids, 23, pp. 239-264. ;!
phenomena
HORII, H. and NEMAT NASSER, S., 1985, Compression induced microcrack growth in brittle solids: axial splitting and shear failure, Journal of Geophysical Research, Vol. 90, No 84, pp. 3105-3125. JACQUIN, G., 1985, Caractere fracial des rescaux de discontinuite IFP Report, ref. 33699 .
.~
in the plane tension
JAYATILAKA, S., and TRUSTUM, K., 1977, Statistical Journal of Materials Science 12, pp. 1426-1430. MANDEL, J., 1964, Condition canique des Sols, Kravtchenko
des massifs rocheux,
approach to brittle fracture,
de stabilite ei posiulai de Drucker. et Sirieys Ed., IUTAM Symposium,
MORLIER, P., 1971, Description de l'etat de formation d'une roche non destructifs simples, Rock Mechanics 3, pp. 125-138.
Rheologie Grenoble.
a partir
ei Med'essais
PAUL, E., 1968, Macroscopic criteria for plasticfiow and brittle fracture, In "Fracture an advanced treatise", Vol. II, Academic press, New York, San Francisco, London. RICE, J .R., 1973, The initiation and Soils MechanicS~ridge
and growth of shear bands, Symposium (UK).
on Plasticity
328
Part III. Mecluuiisrns of material cohesion loss
RICE, J .R., 1976, The localization of plastic deformation, Mechanics, W.T. Koiter Ed., North Holland Publ. Compo RICE, and RUDNICKI, 1980, A note on some features deformation, Int. J. sol. struct., 16, pp. 597-605.
Theoretical
and Applied
of the theory of localization
of
RUDNICKI, J.W., and RICE, J.R., 1975, Conditions for the localization of deformation in pressure sensitive dilatant materials, J. Mech. Phys. Solids, Vol. 23, pp. 371-394. VARDOULAKIS, 1., GOLDSCHEIDER, M., and GUDEHUS, Q.G., 1978, Formation of shear bands in sand bodies as a bifurcation problem, Int. J. Num. Anal. Meth. Geom. 2, pp. 99-128. VARDOULAKIS, I., 1979, Bifurcation Mechanica 32, pp. 35-54.
analysis of the triaxial test on sand samples, Acta
VARDOULAKIS, I., 1980, Shear band inclinaison and shear modulus of sand in biaxial tests, Int. J, Num. Anal. Meth. Geom. 4, pp. 103-109. VARDOULAKIS, I., 1981, Rigid granular constitutive model for sand and the influence of the deviatoric flow rule, Mech. Res. Comm. 8, pp. 275-280. VARDOULAKIS, I., and GRAF, B., 1982, Imperfection sensitivity dry sand, IUTAM conf. Def. Fail. Grand. Media, Delft. WEIBULL, W., 19.51, A statistical Mech.,18.
distribution
function
of the biaxial test on
of wide applicability,
J. Appl.
Index
. ~:
Airy's potential definition, 86 for infinite plates, 87, 89 for finite plates, 94, 96 in complex variables, 100 Analytical functions, 98
'i
Betty's reciprocity theorem, 83, 138 Belt rarni-Mit.chall equations of continuous media, 80 of porous media, 153 Bifurcation, 198, 317 Biot coefficient of, 137, 143, 175, 283 modulus of, 144 Boundary condition, 30 integral, 105 Brittle, 241 Bui,265 Bulk modulus definition, 78 effective, 111, 115 drained, 135, 173 matrix, 136, 175 undr~ned, 143, 168 Cambr-idge, 194 Cauchy stress tensor, 29 Cauchy-Rieman cond., 50, 98 integral, 105 Chalk, 225, 233 Clausius-DuheIn (inequality of) of solids, 51 of porous media, 128
in poroplasticity, 187 of a damaged material, 293 Cohesion coefficient of, 214 Complex variable, 98 potentials, 100 boundary integrals, 105 Compressibility fluid, 50 coefficient of a clay, 196 Confining pressure, 159 mapping, 102 Conformal Consolidation isothermal equation of, 153 coefficient of, 156, 167 second phase of, 173 of a clay, 195, 204 overconsolidation, 208 Constitutive law of solids, 51 standard, 65 of thermoporous media, 130 of poroplasticity, 183 Modified Cam-Clay, 194,224 Mohr-Coulomb, 214, 224 Rice and Rudnicki, 222 Lade, 225 Shao and Henry, 233 Lemaitre, 278 Weibull,310 Jayatilaka, 310 CFP, 311 Convection, 133, 153 Coulomb, 214, 269, 295
330 Crack stress field of a, 243 initiation of a, 251 infinitesimal branching, 265 finite branching, 266 Criterion Mohr-Coulomb,214 Griffith, 250 Mandel, 262 Critical state, 198
Damage experimental, 277 of porous materials, 283 variable, 290 Darcy, 132, 151 Darve, 193 Desrues, 317 Diffusion of fluid, 132 of heat, 132 Diffusivity equations of fluid, 132 of heat, 132 in poroelasticity, 151, 152 of Cam-Clay, 207 Displacement definition, 9 discontinuity of, 247, 289 Dissipation potential of, 58 intrinsic, 129 thermohydraulic, 129 Drained bulk modulus, 135 elastic modulus, 137 Poisson's ratio, 137 thermal expansion, 145
Elasticity definition, 45, 57 constant of, 77 uniquiness of solution, 81 plane, 85
Index
in polar coordinates, 87 of thermoporous media, 131 Energy kinetic, 32, 127, 251 internal, 43, 127 free, 46 specific, 47 elastic, 82 of an elliptic hole, 109 of a cavity, 111 specific surface, 252 release rate, 253, 273 blocked-up, 301 Enthalpy definition, 46 free, 46 specific, 47, 128 in poroelasticity, 147 in poroplasticity, 186 Entropy definition, 44 specific, 47, 129 expression for a fluid, 51 in poroelasticity, 145 in poroplasticity, 185 Eulerian definition, 2 strain tensor, 17 Expansion coefficient of fluid, 50, 144 drained, 145 undrained, 144 of the matrix, 150 measurement of, 175 of a clay, 197
Fourier, 132, 153 Freudenthal, 307 Friction of a piston, 163 in the cylinder, 164 Coulomb Internal, 214, 269, 295
Griffith,
250
,
•
i
Index
}
331
Hardening modulus, 64, 188, 191 concept of, 188 kinematic, 190 modulus of Cam-Clay, 202 damage law, 280 modulus of localization, 325 Heat specific, 49, 146, 180 rate, 52, 128 diffusion, 131 latent, 147
Hill principle of, 65 theorem of, 66 localization of, 318 Homogenization, 286 Hooke's law of continuous media, 57, 73 isotropic, 74, 79 in cylindric. coord., 84 of a porous medium, 135 Incremental plastic matrix definition, 62, 191, 193 of Cam-Clay, 202 Intrinsic curve definition, 220 non-associativiness, 221 Irwin, 245 Kirsch'problem,
89
Lagrangian definition, 2 strain tensor, 13 convective transports, 10, 12, 124 stress tensor, 36 descr. of porous media, 124 Latent heat, 147, 150 Localization general formulation of, 317 Rudnicki and Rice model, 321
Momentum linear, 4 kinetic, 5, 33 balance, 31 Mandel, 262, 265, 289 Mass balance, 52, 125 variation of fluid, 141 Muschelishvili,98 Microcrack definition, 113 closure of a, 119, 123 population of, 306 Mohr circle, 38 Coulomb criterion, 214, 305 Morlier, 116
Nemat-Nasser, 315 Normality (concept of), 58
Oedometric
test, 205
Permeability definition, 132 measurement of, 167 Plasticity definition, 45, 57, 59 plastic flow rule, 62, 191, 202, 221 plastic multiplier, 64, 188, 230, 233, 234 plastic work, 65 Plate infinite, 87 with circular hole, 89 finite, 92 with elliptical hole, 106 Poisson's ratio of continuous media, 78 drained, 137 undrained, 142 Porosity definition, 122 relative variation of, 140
332 Pressure of a fluid, 46 interstitial pore, 128 Propagation (of a crack) quasistatic, 253 dynamic, 255 stable and unstable, 256 Reference frame definition, 1 change of, 35 Rudniki and Rice, 222, 321 Saleh,92 Saturation (of a sample), 165 Shape coefficient, 115 Shear stress, 30 modulus, 78 band, 303, 306, 315, 317 Skempton's coefficient definition, 141 measurement, 168 Softening, 188 State variable definition, 43 observable, 54, 130 concealed, 55, 130 Statistical distribution, 306 Sneiff, 266 Strain Lagrangian sate of, 13 tensor, 17 diagonal, 19 non diagonal, 19 plane state of, 21 in cylindrical coord., 23 measurements of, 162 homogeneized, 288 Stress vector, 27 tensor, 29 principal state of, 35 Lagrangian state of, 36 plane state of, 38 elastic effective, 137
Index
plastic effective, 187 deviatoric, 195 intensity factor, 243,245,247 homogeneized, 287 Swelling coefficient, 196 Tension cutoffs, 219, 235 Tensorial zone, 192 Terzaghy approximation of, 168 effective stress of, 187 Thermal conductivity definition, 132 measurement, 178 Thermodynamics definition, 43 first principle of, 43, 52, 127 second principle of, 45, 53, 128 potential, 55, 130, 186, 290 forces, 58, 273 of porous media, 123 in poroelasticity, 148 formulation of fissuring, 272 Triaxial test, 159 Mohr-Coulomb, 218 Toughness definition, 259 experimental measurement, 260 Undrained definition, 141 elastic properties, 142 thermal expansion, 145 test for a clay, 206 Void ratio, 195 Volum.e relative variation of, 20 bulk variation, 138 pore variations of, 139 elementary, 306 reference, 309 Weibull,
310
333
Index
Yield locus definition, 59, 61 of modified Carn-Clay, 200 Mohr-Coulomb,216
,)
/'
Young's modulus of continuous media, 77 drained, 137, 173 undrained, 142,174